WO2023125414A1 - 可穿戴设备 - Google Patents

可穿戴设备 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023125414A1
WO2023125414A1 PCT/CN2022/141942 CN2022141942W WO2023125414A1 WO 2023125414 A1 WO2023125414 A1 WO 2023125414A1 CN 2022141942 W CN2022141942 W CN 2022141942W WO 2023125414 A1 WO2023125414 A1 WO 2023125414A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
earphone
host
shaft
magnet
groove
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/CN2022/141942
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
李科林
郑威
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority to US18/720,554 priority Critical patent/US20250063283A1/en
Priority to EP22914668.3A priority patent/EP4412241A4/en
Priority to JP2024532425A priority patent/JP7694868B2/ja
Publication of WO2023125414A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023125414A1/zh
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; ELECTRIC HEARING AIDS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/10—Earpieces; Attachments therefor ; Earphones; Monophonic headphones
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; ELECTRIC HEARING AIDS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/12—Sanitary or hygienic devices for mouthpieces or earpieces, e.g. for protecting against infection
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; ELECTRIC HEARING AIDS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/02—Casings; Cabinets ; Supports therefor; Mountings therein
    • H04R1/028—Casings; Cabinets ; Supports therefor; Mountings therein associated with devices performing functions other than acoustics, e.g. electric candles
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; ELECTRIC HEARING AIDS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/10—Earpieces; Attachments therefor ; Earphones; Monophonic headphones
    • H04R1/1025—Accumulators specially adapted for earpieces; Arrangements specially adapted for charging thereof
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; ELECTRIC HEARING AIDS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/10—Earpieces; Attachments therefor ; Earphones; Monophonic headphones
    • H04R1/1041—Mechanical or electronic switches, or control elements
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05K—PRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K5/00—Casings, cabinets or drawers for electric apparatus
    • H05K5/06—Hermetically-sealed casings
    • H05K5/061—Hermetically-sealed casings sealed by a gasket held between a removable cover and a body, e.g. O-ring, packing
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; ELECTRIC HEARING AIDS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R1/00—Details of transducers, loudspeakers or microphones
    • H04R1/10—Earpieces; Attachments therefor ; Earphones; Monophonic headphones
    • H04R1/1016—Earpieces of the intra-aural type
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; ELECTRIC HEARING AIDS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R2420/00—Details of connection covered by H04R, not provided for in its groups
    • H04R2420/07—Applications of wireless loudspeakers or wireless microphones
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; ELECTRIC HEARING AIDS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R2460/00—Details of hearing devices, i.e. of ear- or headphones covered by H04R1/10 or H04R5/033 but not provided for in any of their subgroups, or of hearing aids covered by H04R25/00 but not provided for in any of its subgroups
    • H04R2460/17—Hearing device specific tools used for storing or handling hearing devices or parts thereof, e.g. placement in the ear, replacement of cerumen barriers, repair, cleaning hearing devices
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04R—LOUDSPEAKERS, MICROPHONES, GRAMOPHONE PICK-UPS OR LIKE ACOUSTIC ELECTROMECHANICAL TRANSDUCERS; ELECTRIC HEARING AIDS; PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
    • H04R2499/00—Aspects covered by H04R or H04S not otherwise provided for in their subgroups
    • H04R2499/10—General applications
    • H04R2499/11—Transducers incorporated or for use in hand-held devices, e.g. mobile phones, PDA's, camera's

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of electronic equipment, in particular to a wearable equipment.
  • Wearable products such as smart watches and smart bracelets, as well as wireless earphones have been widely used by users.
  • users In everyday scenarios, users often wear wearable products and wireless headphones at the same time.
  • the user In order to store the wireless earphones, the user also needs to carry the earphone box with him, which causes the user to carry more equipment, which is not conducive to user experience.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a wearable device, which can store wireless earphones directly in the wearable product, realize the integration of wireless earphones and wearable products, reduce the number of devices that users carry with them, and improve user experience.
  • the wearable device of the embodiment of the present application includes an earphone and a host; the earphone has an earphone magnet; the host includes a first part and a second part, the first part can rotate relative to the second part and open relative to the second part so that the host is opened, or the first part It can be closed with the second part so that the host is closed; the first part has a first accommodating groove, and the second part has a third accommodating groove.
  • the first accommodating groove and the third accommodating groove enclose an accommodating space;
  • the first part has a second accommodating groove A main body adsorption magnet;
  • the earphone is accommodated in the accommodation space, and the earphone magnet is magnetically attracted to the first main body adsorption magnet;
  • the earphone can be adsorbed in the first accommodation groove and move with the first part;
  • the earphone When stored in the first receiving groove, the maximum distance between the part of the earphone located in the first receiving groove and the plane where the opening of the first receiving groove is located is the first distance, and the part of the earphone located outside the first receiving groove and the plane of the first receiving groove The maximum distance of the plane where the opening is located is the second distance, and the first distance is smaller than the second distance.
  • the wireless headset can be accommodated in the host, and the product form integration of wireless headsets and wearable products is realized, which reduces the number of devices that users carry with them and improves user experience.
  • the earphone can be attached to the first part, and most of the earphone can be exposed to the first part, which is convenient for the user to pick and place the earphone.
  • the magnet for the first host is a Halbach array
  • the earphone magnet is a single magnet or a Halbach array.
  • the first host magnet is a Halbach array
  • the first host magnet includes two connected single magnets, and the two single magnets have different magnetic field directions
  • the earphone magnet includes a single magnet
  • a single magnet is Halbach array with two different magnetic field orientations.
  • the second part has a second main body adsorption magnet; when the earphone is accommodated in the accommodation space, the earphone magnet is magnetically attracted to the first main body adsorption magnet and the second main body adsorption magnet, and the earphone magnet is attracted to the first main body.
  • the magnetic force between the magnets is greater than the magnetic force between the earphone magnet and the second host magnet.
  • This kind of magnet design can not only realize that the earphones are adsorbed to the first part after the main unit is opened, but also if the earphones are located in the second part when the main unit is opened, due to the magnetic attraction force of the second part to the earphones, the earphones can be placed on the second part reliably, even if the main unit is turned over The earphones are also not easy to drop.
  • a groove is provided on the periphery of the first part; the first part has a seal, and the surface of the seal is provided with a plurality of protrusions, and the protrusions are separated by two; the seal is fixed in the groove of the first part, Several protrusions of the seal are connected to the bottom surface of the groove of the first part, and the side of the seal facing away from the protrusions of the seal is exposed outside the groove of the first part; when the host is closed, the seal is exposed to the groove of the first part
  • the outer part is in contact with the second part to seal the gap between the first part and the second part; or, the periphery of the second part is provided with a groove; the second part has a seal, and the surface of the seal is provided with several protrusions, Several protrusions are spaced apart in pairs; the seal is fixed in the groove of the second part, and several protrusions of the seal are connected with the bottom surface of the groove of the second part, and the side of the
  • the second part has a first charging shrapnel and a second charging shrapnel;
  • the earphone has a centrally symmetrical shape;
  • the earphone includes a first electrode and a second electrode, and both the first electrode and the second electrode are located on the outside of the earphone , and both are annular structures surrounding the center line of the earphone, the first electrode and the second electrode are arranged at intervals; when the earphone is located in the second part, the first electrode is in contact with the first charging shrapnel, and the second electrode is in contact with the second charging shrapnel
  • the host includes a charging circuit, which is used to charge the earphone through the first charging shrapnel and the second charging shrapnel. This solution can enable the host to charge the earphone when the earphone is put into the second part at a relatively random rotation angle.
  • the second part has a foreign object detection shrapnel
  • the host includes a processor, and the processor is used to control the charging circuit to shut down according to the abnormal charging signal of the charging circuit, and to control the charging circuit to work according to the normal charging signal of the charging circuit; wherein, When at least one of the first charging shrapnel, the second charging shrapnel, and the foreign object detection shrapnel contact foreign objects, the charging circuit generates an abnormal charging signal; otherwise, the charging circuit generates a normal charging signal.
  • This solution enables the host to stop charging the earphone when it is determined that a foreign object has entered the second part, so as to avoid abnormality and ensure the safety and reliability of the product.
  • the first part or the second part has a temperature detection module;
  • the host computer includes a processor, and the processor is configured to control the charging circuit to close when the detected temperature is greater than or equal to a threshold according to the detection result of the temperature detection module;
  • the controller is also used to control the operation of the charging circuit when the detected temperature is determined to be lower than the threshold according to the detection result of the temperature detection module.
  • the second part has a state detection magnet
  • the first part has a first magnetic field sensor, and the first magnetic field sensor is used to detect the magnetic flux of the state detection magnet
  • the host computer includes a processor, and the processor is used to Heartbeat to determine if the host is in the open or closed state.
  • the first part or the second part has a second magnetic field sensor, and the second magnetic field sensor is used to detect the magnetic flux of the earphone magnet;
  • the host computer includes a processor; , to determine whether the earphone is located in the first receiving slot; or, the processor is used to determine whether the earphone is located in the third receiving slot according to the detection signal of the second magnetic field sensor of the second part.
  • the second part has a state detection magnet; the earphone has a third magnetic field sensor, and the third magnetic field sensor is used to detect the magnetic flux of the state detection magnet; the earphone has a controller, and the controller is used for detection according to the third magnetic field sensor signal to determine whether the earphone is located in the third receiving slot.
  • the main engine includes a rotating shaft assembly
  • the rotating shaft assembly includes a sleeve, a driven member, an elastic member, and a first shaft
  • the sleeve has an inner cavity, and the outer side of the sleeve is fixedly connected to the first part
  • the driven member has a shaft fitting
  • the through hole of the follower runs through the mating surface of the shaft
  • the follower is located in the inner cavity, and the follower can slide along the surface of the inner cavity but cannot rotate relative to the shaft sleeve
  • the elastic member is located in the inner cavity and presses from the The surface of the moving part facing away from the shaft mating surface
  • a part of the first shaft is located in the inner cavity and is rotatably connected with the sleeve
  • the part of the first shaft located in the inner cavity passes through the through hole of the driven part and is connected with the driven part
  • the shaft mating surface cooperates to form a cam mechanism; the other part of the first shaft is located outside the inner cavity and is
  • the shaft fitting surface includes a first slope, a plane, and a second slope connected in sequence, the first slope forms an obtuse angle with the plane, the plane forms an obtuse angle with the second slope, and the first slope, the plane, and the second slope
  • Two steps are formed; in the first stroke, the first inclined surface is in sliding contact with the part of the first shaft located in the inner cavity; in the second stroke, the plane is in sliding contact with the part of the first shaft located in the inner cavity; In the third stroke, the second inclined surface is in sliding contact with the part of the first shaft located in the inner cavity.
  • the rotating shaft assembly includes a shaft sleeve, a second shaft, and a flexible circuit board;
  • the shaft sleeve has an inner cavity; a channel is formed on the second shaft along the axial direction of the second shaft; a part of the second shaft is located in the inner cavity and It is rotatably connected with the sleeve; the other part of the second shaft is located outside the inner cavity;
  • the flexible circuit board includes a first electrical connection end, a mounting part and a second connection end, and the installation part is located between the first electrical connection end and the second electrical connection end Between them, the installation part includes a winding part and a laminated part connected; when the flexible circuit board is installed on the second shaft, the first electrical connection end and the second electrical connection end are located outside the inner cavity, and the winding part is wound around the first
  • the two shafts are located on the part of the inner cavity, the laminated part is in a folded state, and at least a part of the laminated part is accommodated in the channel of the second shaft;
  • the first host circuit board assembly includes a circuit board, and the circuit board has a grounding point and a power feeding point; the first part includes a first host housing, and the first host housing is fixedly connected to the outside of the shaft sleeve.
  • a host circuit board assembly is fixed on the side of the first host housing facing away from the shaft sleeve; the first host housing is electrically connected to the ground point and the feeding point, and the first host housing serves as the antenna of the host.
  • the rotating shaft assembly includes a shaft contact piece; the shaft contact piece is fixed in the shaft sleeve, and is in sliding contact with the part of the second shaft located in the inner cavity; the second part includes a third main body casing, and the third main casing The body is fixedly connected with the part of the second shaft outside the inner cavity, and the third host housing is used as an antenna of the host.
  • the antenna system is constructed by using the first host housing, the rotating shaft assembly and the third host housing, and realizes the antenna function of the host.
  • the first part is one of the cover of the host and the main body of the host, and the second part is the other of the cover and the main body;
  • the host includes an opening key, and the opening key includes a keycap, an elastic member, and a handle shrapnel; a part of the keycap is located in the second part, and another part of the keycap is located outside the second part; the keycap is movably connected with the second part;
  • the keycap has a convex point located in the second part;
  • the elastic member is installed on the second part part, to provide rebound force to the keycap;
  • the feel shrapnel is located in the second part, and the feel shrapnel is opposite to the convex point of the keycap at intervals;
  • the keycap and the first part form a snap connection to connect the first part to the second part
  • the two parts are locked; when the keycap is pressed, it can move into the second part, so that the buckle connection is released, and the convex point of the keycap presse
  • the shape of the earphone is adapted to the shape of the first receiving groove, and/or the shape of the earphone is adapted to the shape of the third receiving groove.
  • the earphone includes an earplug, a first electrode, a front shell of the earphone, a second electrode and a rear shell of the earphone, the first electrode is located between the earplug and the front shell of the earphone, and the front shell of the earphone is connected to the first electrode and the second electrode , the second electrode is connected to the earphone front shell and the earphone back shell; when the earphone is accommodated in the first or third accommodation groove, the earplug faces the rotating shaft assembly, and the earphone rear shell faces away from the rotating shaft assembly.
  • the host includes a smart watch.
  • This solution can store the wireless earphones directly in the smart watch, realize the integration of the product form of the wireless earphones and the smart watch, reduce the number of devices that users carry with them, and improve the user experience.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an assembly structure of a wearable device in an embodiment of the present application
  • Fig. 2 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the wearable device in the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 3 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the wearable device in the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 4 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the wearable device in the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 5 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the wearable device in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of an exploded structure of a wearable device in an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 7 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the first host casing of the wearable device in Fig. 6;
  • Fig. 8 is a schematic diagram of an exploded structure of the first host casing in Fig. 7;
  • Fig. 9 is a schematic diagram of the assembled structure of the first main body casing of the wearable device in Fig. 6;
  • Fig. 10 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the locking part of the first host housing in Fig. 8;
  • Fig. 11 is a schematic diagram of an exploded structure of the magnet assembly of the first main body casing in Fig. 8;
  • Fig. 12 is a schematic structural view of the sealing bracket of the first main engine casing in Fig. 8;
  • Fig. 13 is a schematic diagram of the A-A sectional structure of the first main body casing in Fig. 9;
  • Fig. 14 is a schematic diagram of a partially enlarged structure at B in Fig. 13;
  • Fig. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of the first host circuit board assembly of the wearable device in Fig. 6;
  • Fig. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of a second host casing of the wearable device in Fig. 6;
  • Fig. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of a second host casing of the wearable device in Fig. 6;
  • Fig. 18 is a schematic diagram of an exploded structure of the second main body casing in Fig. 17;
  • Fig. 19 is a schematic structural view of a second bracket of the second main body casing in Fig. 16;
  • Fig. 20 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the second host casing and the host battery
  • Fig. 21 is a schematic diagram of the assembled structure of the third main body casing of the wearable device in Fig. 6;
  • Fig. 22 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the third main body casing of the wearable device in Fig. 6;
  • Fig. 23 is a schematic diagram of a partially enlarged structure at A in Fig. 22;
  • Fig. 24 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the third main body casing of the wearable device in Fig. 6;
  • Fig. 25 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the unlock key of the wearable device in Fig. 6;
  • Fig. 26 is a schematic diagram of an exploded structure of the opening key in Fig. 25;
  • Fig. 27 is a schematic structural view of the keycap of the opening key in Fig. 25;
  • Fig. 28 is a schematic structural view of the key bracket of the open key in Fig. 25;
  • Fig. 29 is a schematic structural view of the feel shrapnel of the opening key in Fig. 25;
  • Fig. 30 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the opening key and the third main body casing
  • Fig. 31 is a schematic diagram of the cross-sectional structure of A-A in Fig. 30;
  • Fig. 32 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the opening key and the first main body casing
  • Fig. 33 is a schematic diagram of a partially enlarged structure at B in Fig. 32;
  • Fig. 34 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the second main body casing, the third main body casing and the opening key;
  • Fig. 35 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the fourth main body casing of the wearable device in Fig. 6;
  • Fig. 36 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the fourth main body casing of the wearable device in Fig. 6;
  • Fig. 37 is a schematic diagram of an exploded structure of the fourth main body casing in Fig. 36;
  • Fig. 38 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the shaft assembly of the wearable device in Fig. 6;
  • Fig. 39 is a schematic diagram of the cross-sectional structure of A-A in Fig. 38;
  • Fig. 40 is a schematic diagram of an exploded structure of the shaft assembly in Fig. 38;
  • Fig. 41 is a schematic structural view of the shaft sleeve in the shaft assembly
  • Fig. 42 is a B-B sectional structural schematic diagram of the shaft sleeve of Fig. 41;
  • Fig. 43 is a schematic structural view of the shaft sleeve in the shaft assembly
  • Fig. 44 is a schematic structural view of the shaft sleeve in the shaft assembly
  • Fig. 45 is a structural schematic diagram of a bump fitting in the shaft assembly
  • Fig. 46 is a structural schematic diagram of a follower in the shaft assembly
  • Fig. 47 is a schematic diagram of the A-A sectional structure of the follower in Fig. 46;
  • Fig. 48 is a structural schematic diagram of a follower in the shaft assembly
  • Fig. 49 is a schematic structural view of the gasket in the shaft assembly
  • Fig. 50 is a schematic structural view of the gasket in the shaft assembly
  • Figure 51 is a schematic structural view of the first shaft in the shaft assembly
  • Figure 52 is a schematic structural view of the first shaft in the shaft assembly
  • Figure 53 is a schematic structural view of the first shaft in the shaft assembly
  • Fig. 54 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the first shaft, the driven member and the elastic member in the rotating shaft assembly;
  • Fig. 55 is a structural schematic diagram of a limiter in the shaft assembly
  • Figure 56 is a schematic structural view of the second shaft in the shaft assembly
  • Figure 57 is a schematic structural view of the second shaft in the shaft assembly
  • Figure 58 is a schematic structural view of the second shaft in the shaft assembly
  • Figure 59 is a schematic structural view of the flexible circuit board in the shaft assembly
  • Figure 60 is a schematic structural view of the flexible circuit board in the shaft assembly
  • Figure 61 is a schematic structural view of the flexible circuit board in the shaft assembly
  • Fig. 62 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the second shaft and the flexible circuit board in the shaft assembly
  • Fig. 63 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the second shaft and the flexible circuit board in the shaft assembly
  • Figure 64 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the shaft assembly
  • Fig. 65 is a structural schematic diagram of the clamping part in the shaft assembly
  • Figure 66 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the shaft assembly
  • Fig. 67 is a schematic cross-sectional structural view of the shaft assembly
  • Fig. 68 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the rotating shaft assembly and the third main body casing
  • Fig. 69 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the rotating shaft assembly, the third main body casing and the second main body casing;
  • Fig. 70 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the rotating shaft assembly, the third main body casing, the second main body casing and the first main body casing;
  • Fig. 71 is a schematic diagram of a partially enlarged structure at A in Fig. 70;
  • Figure 72 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the host in the wearable device.
  • Fig. 73 is a schematic diagram of a partially cutaway assembly structure of a host in a wearable device
  • Fig. 74 is a schematic cross-sectional structural view of the shaft assembly
  • Fig. 75 is a schematic diagram of a partially enlarged structure at B in Fig. 74;
  • Figure 76 is a schematic diagram of the A-A sectional structure of the structure shown in Figure 75;
  • Fig. 77 is a schematic diagram of the cooperative structure of the first shaft, the driven member and the elastic member in the rotating shaft assembly;
  • Fig. 78 is a structural schematic diagram showing the mating state of the shaft sleeve and the protrusion fitting in the shaft assembly;
  • Fig. 79 is a schematic diagram of the cooperative structure of the first shaft, the driven member and the elastic member in the rotating shaft assembly;
  • Fig. 80 is a structural schematic diagram showing the mating state of the shaft sleeve and the protrusion fitting in the shaft assembly
  • Fig. 81 is a schematic diagram of the cooperative structure of the first shaft, the driven member and the elastic member in the rotating shaft assembly;
  • Fig. 82 is a structural schematic diagram showing the mating state of the shaft sleeve and the bump fitting in the shaft assembly;
  • Fig. 83 is a schematic diagram of the structure when the first part of the host is opened to the extreme position relative to the second part;
  • Fig. 84 is a schematic diagram of a partially enlarged structure at A in Fig. 83;
  • Fig. 85 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the first earphone of the wearable device in Fig. 6;
  • Fig. 86 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the first earphone in Fig. 85;
  • Fig. 87 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the earphone front shell assembly in the first earphone
  • Fig. 88 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the earphone front shell assembly in the first earphone
  • Fig. 89 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the earphone front shell assembly of the first earphone
  • Fig. 90 is a schematic diagram of the A-A sectional structure of the earphone front shell assembly in Fig. 88;
  • Figure 91 is a schematic structural view of the clamp clamping the intermediate component
  • Fig. 92 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the assembly jig of the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 93 is a schematic structural view of the base of the assembled jig.
  • Fig. 94 is a schematic structural view of the base of the assembled jig
  • Fig. 95 is a schematic structural view of the upper cover of the assembled jig.
  • Fig. 96 is a schematic structural view of the upper cover of the assembled jig
  • Fig. 97 is a structural schematic view of placing the clamp and the intermediate assembly into the base
  • Figure 98 is a structural schematic view of matching the upper cover with the base
  • Fig. 99 is a schematic diagram of the cooperation structure of the upper cover and the base;
  • Fig. 100 is a schematic diagram of a partially enlarged structure at A in Fig. 99;
  • Fig. 101 is a schematic structural view of putting the earphone magnet into the assembly jig;
  • Fig. 102 is a schematic structural diagram of the first electrode of the first earphone
  • Fig. 103 is a schematic structural view of the earbud support assembly of the first earphone
  • Fig. 104 is a schematic structural view of the earbud support assembly of the first earphone
  • Figure 105 is a schematic diagram of an exploded structure of an earplug holder assembly
  • Figure 106 is a schematic structural view of the earplug holder in the earplug holder assembly
  • Fig. 107 is a structural schematic diagram of the earplug of the first earphone
  • Fig. 108 is a structural schematic diagram of the earplug of the first earphone
  • Fig. 109 is a schematic diagram of the A-A sectional structure of the earplug in Fig. 108;
  • Figure 110 is a structural schematic diagram of several sound pickup through holes of the earplug inner cover in the earplug;
  • Fig. 111 is a schematic structural diagram of the second electrode of the first earphone
  • Fig. 112 is a schematic diagram of an exploded structure of the earphone rear shell assembly of the first earphone
  • Figure 113 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the earphone rear shell assembly
  • Fig. 114 is a schematic structural view of the earphone rear case in the earphone rear case assembly
  • Fig. 115 is a schematic diagram of the A-A sectional structure of the earphone rear shell in Fig. 112;
  • Fig. 116 is a schematic structural diagram of the antenna in the earphone rear shell assembly
  • Fig. 117 is another structural schematic diagram of the antenna in the earphone rear shell assembly
  • Fig. 118 is another structural schematic diagram of the antenna in the earphone rear shell assembly
  • Fig. 119 is a schematic structural view of the rear shell support in the earphone rear shell assembly
  • Fig. 120 is a B-B sectional structural schematic diagram of the earphone rear shell assembly in Fig. 113;
  • Fig. 121 is a schematic cross-sectional structural view of the first earphone
  • Fig. 122 is a schematic diagram of a partially enlarged structure at A in Fig. 121;
  • Fig. 123 is a schematic structural diagram of another first earphone
  • Fig. 124 is a schematic structural diagram of another first earphone
  • Fig. 125 is a schematic structural diagram of electronic components in the first earphone
  • Fig. 126 is a schematic structural diagram of electronic components in the first earphone
  • Fig. 127 is a schematic cross-sectional structural view of the first earphone
  • Fig. 128 is a schematic diagram of a partially enlarged structure at A in Fig. 127;
  • Fig. 129 is a schematic diagram of a partially enlarged structure at B in Fig. 127;
  • Fig. 130 is a schematic diagram of the coordination relationship between the first main unit adsorption magnet in the main unit and the earphone magnet in the first earphone;
  • Fig. 131 is a schematic diagram of a magnet design in which the first host absorbs the magnet and the earphone magnet;
  • Fig. 132 is a schematic diagram of another magnet design in which the first host absorbs the magnet and the earphone magnet;
  • Fig. 133 is a schematic diagram of another magnet design in which the first host absorbs the magnet and the earphone magnet;
  • Fig. 134 is a schematic diagram of another magnet design in which the first host absorbs the magnet and the earphone magnet;
  • Fig. 135 is a schematic diagram of the design of the magnetic attraction between the first main body and the first electrode and the second electrode in the earphone;
  • Fig. 136 is a structural schematic diagram showing that the first earphone is adsorbed to the first part after the host is opened;
  • Fig. 137 is a schematic diagram showing the process of automatically returning the first earphone to the first part when the first earphone is released from the host to the first part;
  • Fig. 138 is a schematic diagram showing the process of automatically returning the first earphone to the first part when the first earphone is released from the host to the first part;
  • Fig. 139 is a schematic diagram showing the process of automatically returning the first earphone to the first part when the first earphone is released from the host to the first part;
  • Fig. 140 is a schematic diagram showing that the host performs opening and closing state detection
  • Figure 141 is a schematic diagram showing that the host detects the status of the earphone in and out of the box;
  • Fig. 142 is a schematic diagram showing the state of the earphone detecting itself in and out of the box;
  • Fig. 143 is a schematic diagram showing foreign object detection performed by the host.
  • the following embodiments of the present application provide a wearable device, which is a brand-new product form that integrates a host and an earphone.
  • the product forms of the host include but are not limited to electronic devices such as smart watches, electronic blood pressure monitors, smart bracelets, smart helmets, smart clothing, smart glasses, mobile Wi-Fi, and smart backpacks.
  • the earphones are wireless earphones, including but not limited to Bluetooth earphones (such as True Wireless Stereo (TWS) earphones), infrared earphones, etc.
  • TWS True Wireless Stereo
  • the following will be described by taking the product form of the host as a smart watch and the headset as a Bluetooth headset as an example.
  • the wearable device 1 of this embodiment may include a host 2 and an earphone 3 , and the earphone 3 may be accommodated in the host 2 .
  • the related design of the host 2 will be described first, then the related design of the earphone 3 will be described below, and finally the overall characteristics and functions of the wearable device 1 will be described.
  • the host 2 may include a first part 21 , a shaft assembly 22 , a second part 23 , a function key 24 and an open key 25 .
  • the first part 21 may be called a cover body
  • the second part 23 may be called a main body.
  • the host 2 may also include wrist straps, which may be attached to opposite sides of the second part 23 .
  • the shaft assembly 22 connects the first part 21 and the second part 23 , and the first part 21 can rotate relative to the second part 23 through the shaft assembly 22 so that the host 2 is in a closed state and an open state.
  • the first part 21 and the second part 23 can enclose an accommodation space, and the earphone 3 is accommodated in the accommodation space.
  • FIG. 1 shows that the host 2 is in a closed state, and at this moment, the first part 21 and the second part 23 are closed. 2-5 all show that the host 2 is in an open state, and at this moment the first part 21 opens a certain angle relative to the second part 23 .
  • the opening angle a of the first portion 21 in FIG. 2 may be approximately 15 degrees.
  • the opening angle b of the first portion 21 in FIG. 3 may be approximately 75 degrees.
  • the first part 21 is rotated to the extreme position, and the opening angle c of the first part 21 can be approximately 90 degrees. It can be understood that the specific value of the opening angle c when the first part 21 is at the extreme position can be designed according to the product requirements, and is not limited to the above.
  • the earphone 3 when the host 2 is in an open state, the earphone 3 can be detached from the second part 23 and attached to the first part 21 .
  • This design is convenient for the user to pick and place the earphone 3 (it will be further explained below).
  • the earphone 3 when the host 2 is turned on, the earphone 3 can be stored in the second part 23 .
  • the rotation stroke of the first part 21 can be segmented, and in each stroke, the first part 21 has a corresponding rotation characteristic.
  • the first part 21 can provide tactile feedback (the specific principle will be described in detail below).
  • the rotation stroke of the first part 21 can be divided into three sections.
  • the opening angle of the first part 21 gradually increases to the opening angle a, and the first part 21 automatically rotates under the torque drive of the rotating shaft assembly 22 without external force.
  • the state shown in FIG. 2 to the state shown in FIG. 3 can represent the second stage of travel of the first part 21 .
  • the opening angle of the first part 21 gradually increases from the opening angle a to the opening angle b, wherein the rotating shaft assembly 22 no longer provides torque to the first part 21, and the first part 21 needs to be driven by external force to rotate.
  • From the state shown in FIG. 3 to the state shown in FIG. 5 can represent the third stage of the stroke of the first part 21 .
  • the opening angle of the first part 21 gradually increases from the opening angle b to the opening angle c, wherein the first part 21 automatically rotates under the torque drive of the rotating shaft assembly 22 without external force.
  • the opening angle of the first part 21 is the opening angle c, the torque of the shaft assembly 22 can continue to exist. It is easy to understand that the host 2 has a limiting structure, and under the joint action of the limiting structure and the rotating shaft assembly 22, the first part 21 can maintain a balanced state.
  • the flip of conventional flip electronic devices requires continuous force from the user to open, and the hand experience is relatively monotonous.
  • the rotation stroke of the first part 21 is segmented through the structural design of the rotating shaft assembly 22, so that the first part 21 only needs to be driven by the user in the second stroke, and can automatically rotate in other strokes. The user applies force, thereby providing a novel tactile experience.
  • the first part 21 is driven by the rotating shaft assembly 22 to move away from the second part 23 .
  • the opening angle of the first part 21 reaches the opening angle c, the driving force of the shaft assembly 22 still exists, so it is difficult for the user to remove the earphone 3 from the first part 21 to pull the first part 21 to the second part 23 .
  • This design is convenient for the user to take off the earphone 3 and can increase user experience.
  • the structure of the rotating shaft can be designed so that the rotation stroke of the first part 21 does not need to be segmented, but is rotated continuously by the user or always automatically.
  • the unlocking key 25 can be mounted on the second part 23 , and can be located at two radial ends of the second part 23 with the rotating shaft assembly 22 .
  • a part of the opening key 25 can be exposed on the second part 23 for the user to press.
  • a lock structure (described below) in the opening key 25 can form a detachable connection with a lock structure (described below) in the first part 21 .
  • the unlocking key 25 cooperates with the locking structure in the first part 21 to realize the opening and locking of the host 2 .
  • the locking structure in the opening key 25 forms a detachable connection with the locking structure in the first part 21 .
  • the user when the user wants to open the host 2, the user can press the opening key 25, so that the opening key 25 produces a mechanism movement, and the locking structure in the opening key 25 no longer cooperates with the locking structure in the first part 21 .
  • the first part 21 can be automatically expanded under the drive of the rotating shaft assembly 22, and the first stage of stroke is performed.
  • the user when the user wants to close the host 2 , the user can press down the first part 21 to make it rotate towards the second part 23 .
  • the locking structure in the second part 23 is in contact with the locking structure in the unlocking key 25, the unlocking key 25 will produce a mechanism movement, and the locking structure in the unlocking key 25 restores the cooperation with the locking structure in the first part 21 .
  • the unlocking key can also be installed in the first part, and the second part has a locking structure, and the unlocking key cooperates with the locking structure in the second part to realize the opening and locking of the host.
  • the first part may be a cover body
  • the second part may be a main body. The following will take the design of the opening key 25 mounted on the second part 23 as an example to continue the description.
  • the product form and motion design of the wearable device 1 have been briefly described above, and the wearable device 1 will be described in detail below in the order of first describing the first part 21, the second part 23, the opening key 25 and the function key 24, and then describing the shaft assembly 22.
  • the first part 21 of the host 2 of the wearable device 1 may include a display screen 211 , a first host circuit board assembly 212 and a first host housing 213 .
  • the display screen 211 and the first host circuit board assembly 212 are installed on the first host case 213 , and the first host circuit board assembly 212 is located between the display screen 211 and the first host case 213 .
  • the outer shape of the first host housing 213 may be approximately disc-shaped.
  • the first main body casing 213 can be assembled from several parts, for example, it can include a first frame body 213a, a first bracket 213b, a magnet assembly 213r, and a locking part 213d (that is, the first part 21 mentioned above). locking structure), sealing bracket 213t and sealing ring 213s.
  • the first frame body 213a may be substantially a frame structure with a circular outer contour.
  • the edge of the first frame body 213a may define a through hole 213z, and the through hole 213z may be a waist-shaped hole (or called a racetrack-shaped hole).
  • the first frame body 213a can be made of conductive material, such as metal.
  • the first frame body 213a can be used as an antenna (will be described below).
  • the first bracket 213b may be approximately in the shape of a disk.
  • a partial area of the first bracket 213b may form a first receiving groove 213y and a second receiving groove 213x, and the first receiving groove 213y and the second receiving groove 213x are arranged at intervals.
  • the local area forming the first receiving groove 213y and the second receiving groove 213x is in a concave shape.
  • the local area forming the first receiving groove 213y and the second receiving groove 213x is convex.
  • the first receiving groove 213y can be used to accommodate the first earphone 31
  • the second receiving groove 213x can be used to accommodate the second earphone 32 .
  • a peripheral edge of the first bracket 213b may also be provided with a circumferential groove, and the opening of the groove is located on the same side of the first receiving groove 213y as the opening of the first receiving groove 213b.
  • the groove surrounds the outer circumference of the first receiving groove 213y and the second receiving groove 213x. As will be described below, the groove is used for installing the sealing bracket 213t and the sealing ring 213s.
  • the first bracket 213b is fixedly connected to the first frame body 213a, the peripheral area of the first frame body 213a surrounds the outer periphery of the first bracket 213b, and the through hole 213z of the first frame body 213a is also located The outer side of the first bracket 213b.
  • the locking portion 213d can be fixed on the edge of the first bracket 213b and can be disposed opposite to the through hole 213z of the first frame body 213a.
  • the end of the locking portion 213d facing away from the first bracket 213b may have a frame structure 213w, and the frame structure 213w may be located on the same side of the first bracket 213b as the opening of the first receiving groove 213y.
  • the frame structure 213w may enclose the through hole 213v.
  • a side of the frame structure 213w facing away from the first bracket 213b may have a slope 213u.
  • the frame structure 213w of the locking part 213d is used to form a detachable snap connection with the locking structure in the unlocking key 25 (described below), wherein the slope 213u acts as a guide, so that the frame structure 213w can be smoothly connected with the opening
  • the catch structure in the key 25 cooperates.
  • the magnet assembly 213r may include a fixing bracket 213r1 and a first host magnet 213r2 .
  • the first host magnet 213r2 can be spliced by two single magnets, each of which has a single magnetic field direction, and the first host magnet 213r2 composed of two single magnets can have two magnetic field directions,
  • the first host magnet 213r2 can form a Halbach array.
  • the first host magnet can be a Halbach array spliced by other numbers of single magnets.
  • the first host magnet is a Halbach array spliced by three single magnets, and the first host magnet may have three magnetic field directions.
  • the first host-attaching magnet is a Halbach array spliced by four single magnets, and the first host-attaching magnet may have four magnetic field directions.
  • the first main body attracting magnet may be a single magnet with a single magnetic field direction.
  • the first host magnet can be a single magnet, but the first host magnet can form a Halbach array with at least two magnetic field directions (which can be achieved by magnetizing different directions in different regions of a physically single magnet). have to).
  • the shape of the first host magnet 213r2 in this embodiment can be compared with the outer surface of the groove wall of the first receiving groove 213y (or the second receiving groove 213x) in the first bracket 213b. Shape fit.
  • the first main machine attracting magnet 213r2 may be fixed to the outer surface of the groove wall of the first receiving groove 213y and the outer surface of the groove wall of the second receiving groove 213x.
  • the four first host magnets 213r2 can be formed into a group of two.
  • the first group is installed on the outer surface of the groove wall of the first accommodation groove 213y, and the two first host magnets 213r2 of the first group can be symmetrically installed on both sides of the groove wall of the first accommodation groove 213y (for example, FIG. 7 the left and right sides of the viewing angle).
  • the second group is installed on the outer surface of the groove wall of the second accommodation groove 213x, and the two first host magnets 213r2 of the second group are symmetrically installed on both sides of the groove wall of the second accommodation groove 213x (for example, in the perspective of FIG. 7 left and right sides).
  • the number of the first host magnets 213r2 can be designed according to product requirements, and is not limited to the above.
  • the number of fixing brackets 213r1 may be the same as that of the first host magnets 213r2 , for example, there are four fixing brackets 213r1 .
  • the fixing bracket 213r1 can be installed on the first bracket 213b, and one fixing bracket 213r1 can correspond to a first host magnet 213r2, so that each first host magnet 213r2 is fixed on a fixed between the bracket 213r1 and the first bracket 213b.
  • the fixing bracket 213r1 can ensure the reliable fixing of the first host magnet 213r2. In other embodiments, the fixing bracket 213r1 may not be provided according to product requirements.
  • the sealing bracket 213t may form a circle, and its shape matches the shape of the periphery of the first bracket 213b.
  • the sealing bracket 213 may include a bracket body portion 213p, and a plurality of protrusions 213q protruding from one side of the bracket body portion 213p. All protrusions 213q may be spaced apart from each other.
  • the former protrusion 213q can be close to the outer side of the main body part 213p of the bracket, and the second protrusion 213q adjacent to the former protrusion 213q can be closer to the inner side of the main body part 213p of the bracket, and all the protrusions 213q can be arranged according to this rule.
  • all the protrusions 213q may not be arranged in a "one inside and one outside" manner, for example, all the protrusions 213q may be located on the outside or inside of the bracket main body 213p.
  • the sealing ring 213s may form a circle, and its shape matches the shape of the sealing bracket 213t.
  • the sealing ring 213s is fixedly connected to the sealing bracket 213t, for example, the two can be integrally formed, such as through integral injection molding.
  • the material of the sealing bracket 213t may be relatively hard, have high structural strength, and not easily deformed, and the material of the sealing ring 213s may be relatively soft, have low structural strength, and be easily deformed.
  • the component composed of the sealing ring 213s and the sealing bracket 213t may be called a sealing element.
  • FIG. 13 shows the assembly structure of the first frame body 213a, the first bracket 213b, the sealing bracket 213t, and the sealing ring 213s.
  • FIG. 14 is a partially enlarged schematic view at B in FIG. 13 .
  • a groove 213n may be formed on the periphery of the first bracket 213b.
  • the groove 213n surrounds the periphery of the first bracket 213b for a week, and the groove 213n may surround the periphery of the first receiving groove 213y and the second receiving groove 213x.
  • the sealing bracket 213t is fixed in the groove 213n, and the protrusion 213q can contact the bottom surface of the groove 213n.
  • a gap is formed between the portion of the bracket main body 213p without the protrusion 213q and the bottom surface of the groove 213n.
  • the sealing bracket 213t can be bonded in the groove 213n by, for example, a dispensing process.
  • the glue can be filled in the groove 213n, and filled in the gap between the portion of the bracket main body 213p where no protrusion 213q is provided and the bottom surface of the groove 213n. Since the sealing bracket 213t has a plurality of projections 213q distributed at intervals, a number of gaps are formed between the sealing bracket 213t and the bottom surface of the groove 213n, which can ensure the filling amount of glue and further ensure the bonding strength. In addition, due to the existence of the gap, the adhesive is not easy to overflow, which can ensure the yield of the dispensing process.
  • the sealing ring 213s is located on the side of the sealing bracket 213t away from the protrusion 213q. As will be explained below, the sealing ring 213s is used to seal the gap between the first bracket 213b and the second main body housing 231 of the main machine 2 .
  • the groove 213n of the first frame body 213a is narrower, and the sealing ring 213s is thinner and softer (that is, the material hardness of the sealing ring 213s is relatively small). If the sealing ring 213s is installed into the groove 213n alone, there will be a problem that the sealing ring 213s is difficult to install. However, by connecting the softer sealing ring 213s with the harder sealing bracket 213t (the material of the sealing bracket 213t is relatively hard), and then installing the sealing bracket 213t into the groove 213n, the sealing ring 213s can be assembled relatively easily. to the first frame body 213a.
  • the first host circuit board assembly 212 may include a circuit board 212a and devices arranged on the circuit board 212a.
  • the circuit board 212a may be, for example, the main circuit board of the host computer 2 .
  • the components on the circuit board 212a may include, for example, a grounding elastic piece 212b, a grounding elastic piece 212c, a grounding elastic piece 212d, a grounding elastic piece 212e and a feeding elastic piece 212f.
  • the grounding elastic piece 212b, the grounding elastic piece 212c, the grounding elastic piece 212d, and the grounding elastic piece 212e can all be electrically connected to the ground on the circuit board 212a, and the feeding elastic piece 212f can be connected to the feeding point on the circuit board 212a.
  • Devices on the circuit board 212a may also include magnetic field sensors, such as Hall sensors or magnetometers.
  • the first host circuit board assembly 212 can be installed on the side of the first bracket 213b that is away from the opening of the first receiving groove 213y, and is partially located between the groove wall of the first receiving groove 213y and the first receiving groove 213y. Between the groove walls of the second receiving groove 213x.
  • the display screen 211 may have a circular outer contour, and its edges may have transitional rounded corners.
  • the display screen 211 can be connected with both the first frame body 213a and the first bracket 213b of the first host casing 213 .
  • the display screen 211 may face the first host circuit board assembly 212 .
  • the display screen 211 can be electrically connected with the first host circuit board assembly 212 to realize image display.
  • the display screen 211 may also have a touch function.
  • the second part 23 of the host 2 of the wearable device 1 may include a second host housing 231, a host battery 234, a third host housing 232, a second host circuit board assembly 235, a wireless The charging coil 236 and the fourth main body casing 233 .
  • the second main body casing 231 may include a second bracket 231a, a second charging shrapnel 231c, a first charging shrapnel 231e, a foreign object detection shrapnel 231d, a status detection magnet 231x and a status detection magnet 231w, and the second host attracts the magnet 231v.
  • the second bracket 231a may generally have a circular shape.
  • a local area of the second bracket 231a may form a third receiving groove 231f and a fourth receiving groove 231g, the third receiving groove 231f and the fourth receiving groove 231g are arranged at intervals, and the structures of the two may be basically the same.
  • the local area forming the third receiving groove 231f and the fourth receiving groove 231g is in a concave shape.
  • the local area forming the third receiving groove 231f and the fourth receiving groove 231g is convex.
  • the third receiving groove 231f is used to accommodate the first earphone 31
  • the fourth receiving groove 231g is used to accommodate the second earphone 32 .
  • the third receiving groove 231f and the first receiving groove 213y form a receiving space for accommodating the first earphone 31
  • the fourth receiving groove 231g and the second receiving groove 213x form a receiving space for accommodating the second earphone 32. of accommodation space.
  • the third receiving groove 231f may be deeper than the first receiving groove 213y
  • the fourth receiving groove 231g may be deeper than the second receiving groove 213x.
  • the definition of groove depth can be: along the normal direction of the circuit board in the host computer 2, from the receiving groove (the first receiving groove 213y, the second receiving groove 213x, the third receiving groove 231f and the fourth receiving groove 231g collectively refer to ) to the maximum distance from the opening of the receiving tank to the tank bottom.
  • the earphone 3 when the host 2 is turned on, the earphone 3 can be attached to the first part 21 .
  • a part of the first earphone 31 is located in the first receiving groove 213y, and another part is located in the first receiving groove 213y.
  • the maximum distance between the part of the first earphone 31 inside the first receiving groove 213y and the plane where the opening of the first receiving groove 213y is located can be defined as the first distance, and the part of the first earphone 31 outside the first receiving groove 213y can be defined as the first distance.
  • the maximum distance between the part and the plane where the opening of the first receiving groove 213y is located is defined as the second distance, and the first distance is smaller than the second distance.
  • the wall of the third receiving groove 231f may define two through holes 231z, and the two through holes 231z may be provided on the side wall of the third receiving groove 231f away from the fourth receiving groove 231g, for example.
  • the two through holes 231z have a pitch.
  • the two through holes 231z are respectively used for installing the second charging elastic piece 231c and the first charging elastic piece 231e (to be described further below).
  • the groove wall of the third receiving groove 231f can also define a through hole 231y, for example, the through hole 231y can be roughly located on the bottom wall of the third receiving groove 231f.
  • the through hole 231y has a distance from the two through holes 231z.
  • the through hole 231y is used for installing the foreign object detection elastic piece 231d (which will be described further below).
  • the groove wall of the fourth receiving groove 231g may also define the above-mentioned through holes 231z and 231y (hereinafter collectively referred to as through holes).
  • the through hole on the wall of the fourth receiving groove 231g may be located on a side of the fourth receiving groove 231g away from the third receiving groove 231f.
  • the through holes on the wall of the fourth receiving groove 231g and the through holes on the wall of the third receiving groove 231f may be substantially symmetrically distributed on both sides of the symmetry plane of the second bracket 231a.
  • the edge of the second bracket 231a may form a through hole 231b.
  • the through hole 231b may be located between the third receiving groove 231f and the fourth receiving groove 231g, and the through hole 231b may be substantially equidistant from the third receiving groove 231f and the fourth receiving groove 231g.
  • the through hole 231 b is used for the locking portion 213 d in the first part 21 to pass through (the description will be continued below).
  • FIG. 18 there may be two second charging elastic pieces 231c and two first charging elastic pieces 231e.
  • a second charging shrapnel 231c and a first charging shrapnel 231e are installed on the groove wall of the third receiving groove 231f, and another second charging shrapnel 231c and another first charging shrapnel 231e are installed On the groove wall of the fourth receiving groove 231g.
  • the second charging elastic piece 231c can be located at a through hole 231z of the third receiving groove 231f, and the contact of the second charging elastic piece 231c can pass through the through hole 231z into the third receiving Groove 231f.
  • the first charging elastic piece 231e can be located at another through hole 231z of the third receiving groove 231f, and the contact of the first charging elastic piece 231e can extend into the third receiving groove 231f through the other through hole 231z.
  • the second charging elastic piece 231c can be located at a through hole 231z of the fourth receiving slot 231g, and the contact of the second charging elastic piece 231c can extend into the fourth receiving slot 231g through the through hole 231z.
  • the first charging elastic piece 231e can be located at another through hole 231z of the fourth receiving groove 231g, and the contact of the first charging elastic piece 231e can extend into the fourth receiving groove 231g through the other through hole 231z.
  • the two second charging elastic pieces 231c and the two first charging elastic pieces 231e can be electrically connected to the first host circuit board assembly 212 through a circuit (such as a flexible circuit board).
  • the second charging elastic piece 231c and the first charging elastic piece 231e in the third receiving groove 231f are respectively used to elastically contact the two electrodes on the first earphone 31, and the second charging elastic piece 231c and the first charging elastic piece in the fourth receiving groove 231g 231e are respectively used to elastically contact two electrodes on the second earphone 32 (to be described further below).
  • the first earphone 31 can be charged through the second charging elastic piece 231c and the first charging elastic piece 231e in the third receiving groove 231f
  • the second earphone 32 can be charged through the second charging elastic piece 231c and the first charging elastic piece 231e in the fourth receiving groove 231g.
  • a charging shrapnel 231e realizes charging.
  • a foreign object detection elastic piece 231d can be installed on the groove wall of the third accommodation groove 231f, and the foreign object detection elastic piece 231d can be located at the through hole 231y of the third accommodation groove 231f, and the foreign object detection elastic piece 231d The contacts of can pass through the through hole 231y.
  • Another foreign object detection elastic piece 231d can be installed on the groove wall of the fourth accommodation groove 231g, and the foreign object detection elastic piece 231d can be located at the through hole 231y of the fourth accommodation groove 231g, and the contact of the foreign object detection elastic piece 231d can pass through the through hole 231y. hole 231y.
  • the foreign object detection elastic piece 231d can be electrically connected to the first host circuit board assembly 212 through a circuit (such as a flexible circuit board).
  • the foreign object detection elastic piece 231d is used to realize foreign object detection (detect whether there is a foreign object entering the third receiving groove 231f and the fourth receiving groove 231g), and the specific principle will be described below.
  • the status detection magnet 231x may be a single magnet.
  • the state detection magnet 231x can have a single magnetic field direction, or have at least two magnetic field directions (ie form a Halbach array).
  • the status detection magnet 231w may be a single magnet.
  • the state detection magnet 231x can have a single magnetic field direction, or at least two magnetic field directions (ie, a Halbach array).
  • the above state detection magnet may be a Halbach array formed by splicing at least two single magnets.
  • the state detection magnet 231x can be fixed to the side of the second support 231a away from the opening of the third accommodation groove 231f, and the state detection magnet 231x can be adjacent to the groove wall of the third accommodation groove 231f, It may also be close to the through hole 231b.
  • the state detection magnet 231w and the state detection magnet 231x are located on the same side of the second bracket 231a, and the state detection magnet 231w may be adjacent to the groove wall of the fourth receiving groove 231g.
  • the second host absorbs the magnet 231v
  • the second host magnet 231v may be a single magnet.
  • the second host magnet 231v can have a single magnetic field direction, or have at least two magnetic field directions (that is, form a Halbach array).
  • the second host magnet 231v can also be a Halbach array formed by splicing at least two single magnets.
  • the structures of the two second host magnets 231v may be identical, for example.
  • the two second host magnets 231v can be fixed on the side of the second bracket 231a away from the opening of the third receiving groove 231f, and one of the second host magnets 231v can be located on the wall of the third receiving groove 231f facing the fourth
  • another second host magnet 231v may be located on the side of the groove wall of the fourth receiving groove 231g facing the third receiving groove 231f.
  • the number and position of the second host magnets 231v can be designed according to product requirements.
  • a second host magnet 231v can be installed on both sides of the wall of the third accommodation groove 231f, and a second host magnet 231v can be installed on both sides of the groove wall of the fourth accommodation groove 231g.
  • the host battery 234 may be fixed on the second bracket 231 a and located on a side of the second bracket 231 a away from the opening of the third receiving groove 231 f.
  • the host battery 234 may be located between the groove wall of the third receiving groove 231f and the groove wall of the fourth receiving groove 231g.
  • the host battery 234 can be electrically connected to the second host circuit board assembly 235 through a line (such as a flexible circuit board), and the second host circuit board assembly 235 can be electrically connected to the first host circuit board assembly 212 through a line (such as a flexible circuit board), Therefore, the host battery 234 can be electrically connected with the first host circuit board assembly 212 .
  • the third main body housing 232 may be roughly in the shape of a ring.
  • the third main body casing 232 may include a peripheral sidewall 232a, an inner platform 232b and an inner platform 232g.
  • the peripheral side wall 232a may be surrounded by a ring shape.
  • Both the inner platform 232b and the inner platform 232g are connected to the inner side of the peripheral side wall 232a, and the inner platform 232b and the inner platform 232g can be arranged at intervals, for example, they can be located at the radial ends of the peripheral side wall 232a respectively.
  • the third main body casing 232 may have a shaft installation space 232f, and the shaft installation space 232f may be a groove formed on the inner platform 232g and passing through the peripheral side wall 232a.
  • the shaft installation space 232f is used for installing the shaft assembly 22 .
  • the inner surface of the rotating shaft installation space 232f may have a limiting groove 232h, and the limiting groove 232h may be opposite to the opening formed on the peripheral side wall 232a of the rotating shaft installation space 232f.
  • the third main body casing 232 can also have an opening key installation space, and the opening key installation space can form a second opening 232c on the inner support platform 232b, and the opening key installation space can also pass through the peripheral side wall 232a and A first opening 232d is formed on the peripheral sidewall 232a.
  • the opening key installation space may be opposite to the rotating shaft installation space 232f, for example, the two may be approximately located at opposite ends of the same diameter of the third main body casing 232 .
  • a groove 232i can be provided on the inner surface opposite to the second opening 232c in the opening key installation space.
  • the groove 232i may be an elongated groove.
  • a guide groove 232j and a groove 232k may be defined on the inner surface of the opening key installation space opposite to the first opening 232d.
  • the guide groove 232j may be a round hole, and there may be two guide grooves 232j.
  • the groove 232k may be racetrack-shaped, and the groove 232k may be located between the two guide grooves 232j.
  • the third main body casing 232 can also have a function key installation through hole 232e, the function key installation through hole 232e can be opened in the peripheral side wall 232a, and can be located in the shaft installation space 232f and the first opening Between 232d.
  • the function key installation through hole 232e is used for installing the function key 24 .
  • the opening key 25 may include a key cap 251 , an elastic member 252 , a key bracket 253 and a feel elastic piece 254 .
  • the keycap 251 can be a one-piece frame structure.
  • the keycap 251 may include a pressing portion 251a, a protruding point 251b, a guiding portion 251c, a bearing portion 251d and a buckle 251e.
  • the pressing portion 251a may be substantially elongated, and its cross-sectional shape may be approximately trapezoidal (the cross-section may be perpendicular to the length direction of the pressing portion 251a).
  • the pressing portion 251a has a surface 251h, which is a surface where the upper base of the trapezoidal cross-section of the pressing portion 251a is located.
  • the protruding point 251b can be disposed on the other surface of the pressing portion 251a and faces away from the surface 251h of the pressing portion 251a.
  • the surface of the bump 251b may be an arc, a plane, or a combination of an arc and a plane.
  • the guide portion 251c may be columnar, such as a cylinder.
  • the guide part 251c can be protruded on the other surface of the pressing part 251a, and the guide part 251c and the protruding point 251b can be located on the same side of the pressing part 251a.
  • the guide portion 251c is used to play a guiding role when the keycap 251 moves.
  • the carrying portion 251d is connected to a side of the pressing portion 251a away from the surface 251h, and the carrying portion 251d is located between the two guiding portions 251c.
  • the carrying portion 251d may be roughly C-shaped, and the two free ends of the C-shaped structure of the carrying portion 251d are connected to the pressing portion 251a, and the carrying portion 251d and the pressing portion 251a may jointly form an open space 251g.
  • the carrying portion 251d is used for carrying the key holder 253 .
  • the buckle 251e may be connected to the carrying portion 251d and located in the open space 251g.
  • the buckle 251e may face the raised point 251b.
  • the buckle 251e may have an assembly guiding slope 251f.
  • the buckle 251e is the lock structure in the opening key 25 mentioned above.
  • the elastic member 252 can be a spring. Alternatively, the elastic member 252 may also be other elastically stretchable components. There can be two elastic members 252 . As shown in FIG. 26 and FIG. 27 , one elastic member 252 can be sleeved on one guide portion 251c, and the other elastic member 252 can be sleeved on the other guide portion 251c.
  • the button bracket 253 may include a bracket body 253 a, and two hanging ears 253 b respectively connected to two sides of the bracket body 253 a.
  • the bracket main body 253a may be flat.
  • the hanging ear 253b may be in the shape of a bent plate.
  • the hanging ear 253b may include a first plate 253c and a second plate 253d, and the first plate 253c and the second plate 253d may generally form a ninety-degree bend.
  • the two first plates 253c of the two hanging ears 253b can be bent back relative to the second plate 253d, for example, in the perspective of the figure, the first plate 253c on the left can be bent to the left relative to the second plate 253d on the left
  • the first plate 253c on the right side can be bent toward the right side relative to the second plate 253d on the right side.
  • the two hanging lugs can also be bent in the same direction.
  • the key bracket 253 can be loaded into the open space 251g of the key cap 251 , and the two hanging ears 253b of the key bracket 253 can be supported on the bearing portion 251d of the key cap 251 .
  • the key bracket 253 is used to fix the feel elastic piece 254 , and can also be used to limit the position of the key cap 251 when the key cap 251 moves to a limit position.
  • the feel elastic piece 254 has elastic deformation properties, can be compressed when a force is applied, and rebound when the pressure disappears.
  • the feel elastic sheet 254 can be, for example, a dome elastic sheet, and the dome elastic sheet can be made of polyethylene terephthalate (polyethylene glycol terephthalate, PET) sheet, metal dome (or button elastic sheet), Adhesive, film and other components.
  • the hand-feeling elastic piece 254 may have an elastic region 254a.
  • the elastic region 254a may be convex when not pressed, concave after being pressed, and return to convex when the pressure disappears.
  • the handle elastic piece 254 can be fixed to the key support 253 , and the elastic area 254 a can face the raised point 251 b.
  • the opening key 25 can be installed in the opening key installation space of the third main body casing 232 .
  • the state of the open key 25 shown in FIG. 30 and FIG. 31 corresponds to the closed state of the host 2 .
  • the pressing portion 251a can be exposed from the first opening 232d of the opening key installation space.
  • a part of the guide portion 251c may be located in the guide groove 232j, but does not touch the bottom surface of the guide groove 232j.
  • a portion of the bearing portion 251d spaced opposite to the pressing portion 251a may be located in the groove 232k.
  • the buckle 251e may be located in the opening key installation space and outside the groove 232k.
  • the keycap 251 can move in the axial direction of the guide part 251c, and the keycap 251 cannot move in other directions basically due to the limiting effect of the first opening 232d on the pressing part 251a.
  • the elastic member 252 is sleeved on the guide portion 251c, and a part of the elastic member 252 can be located in the guide groove 232j.
  • One end of the elastic member 252 contacts the pressing portion 251a, and the other end contacts the bottom surface of the guiding groove 232j.
  • the key bracket 253 can be assembled with the key cap 251 and fixed in the opening key installation space.
  • the bracket body 253a of the key bracket 253 can be located in the open space 251g of the keycap 251 and inserted into the groove 232i, and the bracket body 253a can abut against the side wall of the groove 232i near the first opening 232d.
  • the two hanging ears 253b of the button bracket 253 can be respectively supported (or referred to as overlapping) on both sides of the carrying portion 251d.
  • Each hanging ear 253b can resist a part of the carrying portion 251d that is spaced opposite to the pressing portion 251a, so that the keycap 251 cannot continue to move outside the opening key installation space.
  • Each hanging ear 253b can abut against the top surface of the side wall of the groove 232k (the side wall facing the first opening 232d). Therefore, the sidewalls of the groove 232i and the sidewalls of the groove 232k can limit the key support 253 from opposite directions, so that the key support 253 cannot move along the axial direction of the guide groove 232j.
  • the handle elastic piece 254 can be fixed to the bracket body 253a.
  • the feel elastic piece 254 can be inserted into the groove 232i, or the feel elastic piece 254 can also be located outside the groove 232i.
  • the feel elastic piece 254 is located between the protrusion 251b and the buckle 251e, and the elastic region 254a of the feel elastic piece 254 faces the protrusion 251b. There is a certain distance between the feel elastic piece 254 and the buckle 251e.
  • the keycap 251 when the user presses the keycap 251 from the pressing portion 251a, the keycap 251 will move into the opening key installation space. Wherein, the guide portion 251c will move into the guide groove 232j, and the elastic member 252 will be gradually compressed. The bearing part 251d will slide into the groove 232k relative to the hanging ear 253b, and the buckle 251e will move into the groove 232k. The bump 251b will be close to the feel elastic piece 254. When the bump 251b presses the elastic region 254a and elastically deforms the elastic region 254a, the user can experience the feel feedback.
  • the elastic member 252 will rebound and push the key cap 251 to move out of the opening key installation space.
  • the guide portion 251c will move out of the guide groove 232j, and the elastic member 252 will gradually elongate.
  • the bearing part 251d will slide toward the outside of the groove 232k relative to the hanging ear 253b, and the buckle 251e will move toward the outside of the groove 232k.
  • the convex point 251b will be away from the feel elastic piece 254 .
  • Figure 32 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the assembly of the first main body casing 213, the second main body casing 231, the third main body casing 232 and the opening key 25, wherein the first main body casing 213 is not sectioned in order to clearly show the assembly structure See.
  • FIG. 33 is a partially enlarged schematic view at B in FIG. 32 .
  • the locking part 213d on the first bracket 213b of the first main body casing 213 can pass through the through hole 231b on the second main body casing 231 and enter the third main body casing 232 in the opening key installation space, and the lock part 213d can form a snap connection with the buckle 251e, and the snap connection is a detachable connection.
  • the first main body casing 213 can be kept closed with the third main body casing 232, that is, the first part 21 and the second part 23 of the main body 2 can be connected. closure.
  • the buckle 251e when the user presses the pressing portion 251a, the buckle 251e will move and no longer maintain the buckle connection with the locking portion 213d. At this time, the first main body casing 213 will automatically expand under the drive of the rotating shaft assembly 22 .
  • the lock part 213d can squeeze the buckle 251e until the lock part 213d forms a snap connection with the buckle 251e again , at this moment the first part 21 is locked with the second part 23 .
  • the opening key 25 of this embodiment can realize the opening and locking of the host computer 2 by designing a reciprocatingly movable buckle 251e.
  • By designing the feel shrapnel 254 it is possible to increase the feel feedback during the process of opening the host 2 and improve the user experience.
  • the opening and locking of the main unit can also be realized through unlocking keys with other structures.
  • the buckle can be arranged on the first support of the first main body casing (the buckle corresponds to the above-mentioned buckle 251e), and the lock part is arranged in the opening key (for example, the lock part is arranged on the keycap On the bearing part, the locking part corresponds to the above-mentioned locking part 213d).
  • a torsion spring mechanism can be used to provide a rebound force to the movable keycap, and a buckle (or a buckle part) is designed on the keycap of the opening key, and the buckle (or buckle part) is connected with the first main body casing
  • the cooperation of the lock part (or buckle) on the first bracket realizes the opening and closing of the host.
  • the feel shrapnel can be eliminated.
  • the sealing ring 213 s can seal the gap between the first bracket 213 b and the second main body housing 231 , preventing external water vapor from entering the interior of the main body 2 from the gap.
  • the sealing bracket and the sealing ring can also be installed on the periphery of the second main body casing 231, and the assembly structure of the sealing bracket, the sealing ring and the second main body casing is similar to that described above, and will not be described here. Let me repeat. When the first part 21 and the second part 23 are closed, the sealing ring on the second main body casing 231 abuts against the peripheral edge of the first bracket to seal the gap between the second main body casing 231 and the first bracket 213b.
  • the sealing bracket 213t may not be provided, but only a sealing ring is provided on the first bracket 213b or the second main body casing 231, so that the first bracket 213b can also be The gap with the second main body casing 231 is sealed.
  • the function key 24 may be substantially cylindrical.
  • the function key 24 can be installed in the function key installation through hole 232 e of the third main body casing 232 and is movably connected with the third main body casing 232 .
  • the function key 24 can move in the function key installation through hole 232e along the axis of the function key installation through hole 232e, and/or, the function key 24 can rotate around the axis of the function key installation through hole 232e.
  • the function key 24 is used for the user to press and/or rotate to enable the host 2 to realize corresponding functions, such as selecting, confirming, switching screen displays, and the like.
  • the opening key 25 and the function key 24 can be assembled to the third main body casing 232 , and the third main body casing 232 can be assembled with the second main body casing 231 .
  • the peripheral side wall 232 a of the third main body casing 232 surrounds the outer periphery of the second main body casing 231 and the main body battery 234 .
  • the second opening 232c of the third main body casing 232 can communicate with the through hole 231b of the second bracket 231a.
  • the wall of the second bracket 231 a can avoid the shaft installation space 232 f of the third main body casing 232 so as to install the shaft assembly 22 .
  • the fourth main body casing 233 may be roughly disc-shaped.
  • the fourth main body casing 233 may include a third bracket 233a and a lens 233b.
  • the third bracket 233a may be substantially disc-shaped.
  • the third bracket 233a may have a mounting through hole 233c.
  • the lens 233b is installed on the third bracket 233a and covers the installation through hole 233c.
  • the lens 233b can transmit the light emitted by the photoplethysmography (photoplethysmography, PPG) sensor (to be described below) and the light reflected by the human body.
  • PPG photoplethysmography
  • the second host circuit board assembly 235 may include a circuit board and circuits and devices arranged thereon.
  • the circuit board in the second host circuit board assembly 235 may be, for example, a secondary circuit board of the host 2 .
  • components such as a PPG sensor may be arranged on the secondary circuit board.
  • the second host circuit board assembly 235 may be installed on the fourth host case 233 .
  • the wireless charging coil 236 is used to realize wireless charging.
  • the wireless charging coil 236 may be installed on the fourth main body casing 233 .
  • the wireless charging coil 236 can be electrically connected with the circuit board in the second host circuit board assembly 235 , for example, the pins of the wireless charging coil 236 can be soldered to the circuit board.
  • the wireless charging coil 236 may be located on the outer periphery of the second host circuit board assembly 235 .
  • the fourth main body casing 233 can be assembled and fixed with the third main body casing 232, and the fourth main body casing 233 and the third main body casing 232 jointly connect the second main body casing 231, the main body battery 234 , surrounded by the second host circuit board assembly 235 and the wireless charging coil 236 .
  • the second host circuit board assembly 235 and the wireless charging coil 236 may both be located between the host battery 234 and the fourth host casing 233 .
  • the shaft assembly 22 may include a shaft sleeve 222, a protruding fitting part 227, a driven part 229, a gasket 225, an elastic part 228, The first shaft 221 , the limiting member 226 , the second shaft 223 and the shaft contact member 224 .
  • the shaft sleeve 222 may be approximately a hollow cuboid structure.
  • the sleeve 222 may have a first outer surface 222a and a second outer surface 222f, which are two intersecting outer surfaces on the sleeve 222 .
  • the side where the first outer surface 222a of the sleeve 222 is located can be fixedly connected with the first frame body 213a in the first part 21, and is covered by the first part 21 and cannot be seen (continued description below).
  • the second outer surface 222f can be seen as the exterior surface of the host 2 (the description will be continued below).
  • the inner cavity of the shaft sleeve 222 has a partition 222n, and the partition 222n divides the inner cavity into a first inner cavity 222i and a second inner cavity 222j.
  • the partition 222n is provided with a through hole 222s, and the through hole 222s communicates the first inner cavity 222i and the second inner cavity 222j.
  • the surface of the partition 222n facing the first inner cavity 222i can be provided with a sliding groove 222q and a number of matching grooves 222p, and the sliding groove 222q and all the matching grooves 222p can be connected to form a ring, the circle The ring is located on the periphery of the through hole 222s and may be concentric with the through hole 222s.
  • the matching groove 222p may be in the shape of a "pit", and the inner surface of the matching groove 222p may be an arc surface. All the matching grooves 222p can be arranged along the arc line, and all the matching grooves 222p can be divided into two groups, the two groups are separated, and several matching grooves 222p in each group are connected sequentially. The number of matching grooves 222p in the two groups can be the same, for example, there can be three. In each group, two adjacent fitting grooves 222p have a common sidewall. The sides of the side walls may have rounded corners. The top surface of the side wall can also be sunken relative to the surface where the opening of the matching groove 222p is located (that is, there is a level difference).
  • the chute 222q can be a long strip groove, and the extension track of the chute 222q can be an arc line.
  • the positions of the two chute 222q on the circumference can be symmetrical, and the two central angles corresponding to the two chute 222q (the included angle formed by the two ends of the chute 222q and the center of the circumference) can be opposite to each other. top angle.
  • the two chute 222q and the two sets of matching grooves 222p are alternately arranged along the circumference, that is, the two chute 222q and the two sets of matching grooves 222p are in the order of one chute 222q-one group of matching groove 222p-another chute 222q-another group
  • the arrangement sequence of the matching grooves 222p is distributed on the circumference.
  • One end of each sliding slot 222q is connected to one matching slot 222p in one set of matching slots 222p, and the other end of the sliding slot 222q is connected to one matching slot 222p in another set of matching slots 222p.
  • the slide groove 222q and the matching groove 222p are used to cooperate with the protrusions on the protrusion fitting part 227 (described below).
  • the partition plate 222n may not be provided with the sliding groove 222q and the matching groove 222p, and the rotating shaft may not be provided with the protrusion matching part 227 .
  • the end of the first inner cavity 222i away from the partition plate 222n may pass through the sleeve 222 to form an opening 222h.
  • the inner surface of the first inner cavity 222i may include an arc surface a and two planes b, and the two planes b respectively connect opposite sides of the arc surface a.
  • the arc surface a is closer to the first outer surface 222a, and the plane b is farther away from the first outer surface 222a. That is, the first inner cavity 222i has an approximate arch shape, and the opening 222h has an approximate arch shape.
  • the second inner cavity 222j may include a first area 222c and a second area 222d that are in communication.
  • the first region 222c is located between the partition 222n and the second region 222d.
  • the first region 222c forms an opening 222b on the first outer surface 222a.
  • the second region 222d may be a circular hole whose axis faces the partition 222n.
  • the second area 222d forms an opening 222e on the first outer surface 222a, and an end of the second area 222d away from the partition 222n may pass through the sleeve 222 .
  • the first outer surface 222a of the shaft sleeve 222 can also have a groove 222k and a groove 222m, the groove 222k and the groove 222m are respectively located on opposite sides of the first area 222c, and the groove 222m can also be above the second region 222d.
  • a side of the groove 222k facing the groove 222m communicates with the first region 222c, and a side of the groove 222m facing the groove 222k communicates with the first region 222c.
  • a limiting protrusion 222r is provided on the side of the sleeve 222 opposite to the first outer surface 222a.
  • the structure of the limiting protrusion 222r can be designed according to requirements, which is not limited in this embodiment.
  • the limiting protrusion 222r may be located on the side of the first inner cavity 222i on the sleeve 222 .
  • the position of the limiting protrusion 222r can be flexibly determined according to needs, and is not limited to being located on the side of the partition 222n close to the first inner chamber 222i.
  • the limiting protrusion 222r may not be provided.
  • the surface of the shaft sleeve 222 forming the opening 222h can also define a mounting groove 222g, and the mounting groove 222g can communicate with the first inner cavity 222i.
  • another installation groove 222g may also be defined on the surface of the shaft sleeve 222 at the end opposite to the opening 222h, and the other installation groove 222g may communicate with the second region 222d.
  • the mounting groove 222g is used for mounting the shaft contact piece 24 (to be described further below).
  • the position of the installation groove 222g can be flexibly determined according to needs, and is not limited to the above description.
  • the mounting groove 222g may not be provided.
  • the shape of the bump fitting 227 may be substantially cylindrical.
  • the bottom surface of the bump fitting part 227 may be provided with a bump 227a, and the bump 227a may have a convex arc surface relative to the bottom surface.
  • the number of bumps 227a is at least one, for example, two bumps 227a are shown in FIG. 45 . When the number of bumps 227a is at least two, each bump 227a may be evenly spaced along the circumference.
  • the protruding point 227a is used to cooperate with the slide groove 222q and the matching groove 222p on the partition plate 222n of the bushing 222 (to be further described below).
  • the bump fitting 227 may also have a through hole 227 b, and the through hole 227 b may pass through the bump fitting 227 along the centerline direction of the bump fitting 227 .
  • the inner surface of the through hole 227b may include an arc surface 227c, a plane 227d, and a plane 227e. Both sides of the arc surface 227c are respectively connected to the plane 227d and the plane 227e, and the plane 227d and the plane 227e may form an included angle.
  • the protrusion matching part 227 can be installed on the first shaft 221 , and the through hole 227 b can cooperate with the first shaft 221 .
  • the through hole 227b of the above-mentioned structure can enable the convex fitting part 227 to move along the first axis 221, but cannot rotate relative to the first axis 221 (to be further described below).
  • the rotating shaft may not be provided with the protruding fitting part 227 .
  • the follower 229 may be generally block-shaped or plate-shaped.
  • the follower 229 has a through hole 229g, and the axis of the through hole 229g is substantially along the thickness direction of the follower 229 .
  • the surface on one side in the thickness direction of the follower 229 can be called a shaft matching surface, and the shaft matching surface can form two steps, and the shaft matching surface can include a first inclined surface 229a, a plane 229b and a second inclined surface connected in sequence 229c (in order to highlight these three regions, these three regions are indicated by hatching), the normal of the plane 229b can be along the axis direction of the through hole 229g, the first slope 229a forms an obtuse angle with the plane 229b, and the plane 229b and the second slope 229c Forming an obtuse angle, the first slope 229a and the second slope 229c have a step difference, the side of the first slope 229a away from the plane 229b may be higher than the plane 229b, and the side of the second slope 229c away from the plane 229b may be lower than the plane 229b.
  • the shaft matching surface of the follower 229 may include two first inclined surfaces 229a, two flat surfaces and two second inclined surfaces 229c, the shaft matching surface may form two two-stage steps and may be along the The circumferential direction of the shaft matching surface extends downward step by step.
  • the two two-stage steps may be arranged at intervals, for example, the two two-stage steps may be symmetrical about the center of the through hole 229g.
  • the outer surface of the follower 229 (the normal of the outer surface points to the through hole 229g) may be approximately arched.
  • the outer surface may include an arc surface 229h, an arc surface 229i, a plane 229d, a plane 229e and a plane 229f.
  • the arcuate surface 229h and the arcuate surface 229i may serve as the top of the arch, and the two may be substantially symmetrical about the axis of the through hole 229g.
  • Plane 229e may serve as the base of the arch.
  • the plane 229f may be located between the arc surface 229h and the plane 229e, and one side of the plane 229f may be connected to the arc surface 229h.
  • the plane 229d may be located between the arc surface 229i and the plane 229e, and one side of the plane 229d may be connected to the arc surface 229i.
  • the follower 229 can be installed in the first inner cavity 222i of the shaft sleeve 222, and the outer surface of the follower 229 has the above-mentioned structure, which can make the follower 229 move in the first inner cavity 222i without rotation (hereinafter referred to as to continue).
  • the outer surface of the follower 229 may have other suitable structures, as long as the design requirement that the follower 229 moves in the first inner chamber 222i without rotation can be met.
  • the gasket 225 may be generally sheet-shaped.
  • the gasket 225 can include a first part 225a and a second part 225b, the first part 225a and the second part 225b can be connected (for example, connected into one body), the first part 225a and the second part 225b can form an angle d, for example, the angle d For example, approximately 90°.
  • the first part 225a and the second part 225b may not be in the same plane, and the second part 225b may form an angle e with the plane where the first part 225a is located.
  • the second portion 225b may be upturned compared with the first portion 225a, and form an angle e with the plane where the first portion 225a is located (or form an angle e with the first portion 225a).
  • the first portion 225a of the washer 225 can be fixed in the first cavity 222i of the sleeve 222, and the second portion 225b of the washer 225 can abut against the flat surface 229e of the follower 229 (to be further described below).
  • the first shaft 221 may be a one-piece structure, which may include a first part 221a, a second part 221b and a third part 221c connected in sequence. It can be understood that the first part 221a, the second part 221b and the third part 221c are respectively distinguished by three dotted boxes in FIG. The location does not strictly define the boundary between the first part 221a, the second part 221b and the third part 221c.
  • the first portion 221a may include an end portion 221d and a main body portion 221g, and both the end portion 221d and the main body portion 221g may be substantially cylindrical.
  • the main body portion 221g is connected to the second portion 221b, and the end portion 221d is away from the second portion 221b.
  • a locking groove 221e may be formed between the end portion 221d and the main body portion 221g, and the locking groove 221e may circle around the axis of the end portion 221d.
  • the bottom surface of the locking groove 221e is lower than the outer peripheral surface of the end portion 221d, and is also lower than the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 221g.
  • the end of the main body 221g close to the end 221d can form a recessed space 221f
  • the recessed space 221f can have a plane 221i and a plane 221j
  • the plane 221i can be substantially parallel to the axis of the end 221d
  • the plane 221j can Substantially perpendicular to the axis of end 221d
  • plane 221i may be substantially perpendicular to plane 221j.
  • the plane 221j may connect the outer peripheral surface of the main body part 221g and the plane 221i. Both sides of the plane 221i can be connected to the outer peripheral surface of the connection body part 221g.
  • the recessed space 221f may be formed by cutting the outer peripheral surface of the main body part 221g.
  • the two recessed spaces 221f may have a certain distance.
  • the number of the recessed spaces 221f is not limited to the above, for example, it may be one or more than three.
  • the end of the main body 221g close to the end 221d can cooperate with the through hole 227b of the bump fitting 227, and the surface of this end of the main body 221g can fit with the inner wall of the through hole 227b, so that the bump fitting 227 can It moves along the main body part 221g but cannot rotate (it will be further explained below).
  • the end of the main body 221g close to the end 221d may not form the recessed space 221f.
  • the second portion 221b may have an outer peripheral surface 221h, and the outer peripheral surface 221h may be substantially a cylindrical surface.
  • the second part 221b can be inserted into the first inner cavity 222i of the shaft sleeve 22, and the outer peripheral surface 221h can be rotatably matched with the arc surface a of the first inner cavity 222i.
  • the surface of the second part 221b facing the end 221d can form two steps (the surfaces of the two steps are indicated by hatching in Figure 53), and the two steps are the same as those mentioned above.
  • the structure of the two steps of the follower 229 described above is similar (or roughly profiling).
  • the second part 221b can be assembled with the follower 229 to form a cam mechanism. Cooperate with the surface movement, so that the follower 229 realizes the set movement (continued to be explained below).
  • the structure of the third part 221c can be designed as required, and is not limited to what is shown in Fig. 51-Fig. 53 .
  • the third part 221c is used to be fixed to the inner platform 232g of the third main body casing 232 (to be further described below).
  • the elastic member 228 is a component capable of providing rebound force, such as a spring.
  • the follower 229 , the elastic member 228 and the protrusion fitting 227 can all be located in the first inner chamber 222i of the shaft sleeve 222 .
  • the bump fitting part 227 is close to the partition 222n of the sleeve 222, and the bump 227a of the bump fitting part 227 can face the sliding groove 222q of the partition 222n (or toward the fitting groove 222p).
  • the follower 229 is away from the partition 222n, and the two steps of the follower 229 face away from the partition 222n.
  • the arc surface 229h and the arc surface 229i of the follower 229 can be opposite to and matched with the arc surface a of the first inner chamber 222i, and the plane 229e and the plane 229f of the follower 229 can be matched with the first inner cavity.
  • the planes b of the cavities 222i are opposed and form a fit.
  • the follower 229 can move in the first inner chamber 222i, but cannot rotate relative to the first inner chamber 222i.
  • the above-mentioned matching structure between the follower 229 and the first inner cavity 222i is only an example, and in other embodiments, other suitable matching structures can be designed as required, so that the follower 229 can only be in the first inner cavity.
  • the inner chamber 222i moves, but cannot rotate relative to the first inner chamber 222i (it will be explained below that the follower 229 can follow the shaft sleeve 222 to rotate).
  • the elastic member 228 is located between the driven member 229 and the protrusion matching member 227 , one end of the elastic member 228 can abut against the follower 229 , and the other end can abut against the protrusion engaging member 227 .
  • the main body 221g of the first part 221a of the first shaft 221 and the second part 221b can both be located in the first inner cavity 222i of the sleeve 222 .
  • the end 221d of the first part 221a may be located in the first region 222c of the second inner chamber 222j of the sleeve 222, and part or all of the locking groove 221e of the first part 221a may be located in the first region 222c.
  • the first part 221a can pass through the through hole 229g of the follower 229, the elastic part 228, the through hole 227c of the bump fitting part 227 and the through hole of the partition 222n.
  • the two steps of the second part 221b can face the two steps of the follower 229, and the two steps of the second part 221b can cooperate with the two steps of the follower 229, so that the second part 221b and the follower 229 Form a cam mechanism.
  • the plane 221i of a recessed space 221f of the main body 221g can be opposed to the plane 227d of the through hole 227b of the protrusion fitting 227 and form a fit.
  • the plane 221i of another recessed space 221f of the main body portion 221g can be opposite to the plane 227e of the through hole 227b of the bump fitting part 227 to form a fit.
  • the outer peripheral surface of the main body part 221g can be opposed to and matched with the arc surface 227c of the through hole 227b of the bump fitting part 227 .
  • the protrusion fitting 227 can move along the main body portion 221g in the first inner cavity 222i, but cannot rotate around the main body portion 221g.
  • the third portion 221c of the first shaft 221 can be located outside the sleeve 222 .
  • FIG. 54 can more intuitively show the assembly structure of the first shaft 221 , the follower 229 , the elastic member 228 and the protrusion matching member 227 .
  • the washer 225 can be fixed in the first inner chamber 222i of the sleeve 222 .
  • the first portion 225 a of the spacer 225 may be located between the third portion 221 c of the first shaft 221 and the sleeve 222 .
  • the second portion 225b of the spacer 225 may be located between the follower 229 and the sleeve 222 . During the entire movement process of the follower 229 , the second portion 225b can always abut against the follower 229 .
  • the second part 225b Since the second part 225b is tilted relative to the first part 225a, the second part 225b can press the follower 229 against the inner surface of the first inner chamber 222i of the sleeve 222, so that the follower 229 is in contact with the first inner cavity.
  • the inner surface of the cavity 222i is tightly fitted, which can avoid the follower 229 from shaking during movement due to manufacturing errors.
  • the gasket 225 may not be provided according to actual needs.
  • the limiting member 226 can be basically plate-shaped, and the structure of the limiting member 226 can be designed according to needs, for example, the outline of the limiting member 226 can be consistent with the first area of the second inner cavity 222i of the shaft sleeve 22 The shape of the 222c fits.
  • An opening 226 a may be formed on the limiting member 226 .
  • the limiting member 226 can be located in the first area 222c of the second inner cavity 222i of the sleeve 22 and contact the partition plate 222n of the sleeve 22, the opening 226a of the limiting member 226 The edge can be locked into the locking groove 221e of the first portion 221a of the first shaft 221 .
  • the limiting member 226 can limit the first shaft 221, prevent the first shaft 221 from detaching from the shaft sleeve 22, ensure that the relative position of the first shaft 221 and the shaft sleeve 22 remains unchanged, and then ensure that the driven 229, the elastic member 228 and the protrusion fitting 227 are reliably assembled with the shaft sleeve 22.
  • the second shaft 223 may be a one-piece structure, which may include a first part 223 a , a second part 223 b and a third part 223 c connected in sequence. It can be understood that the first part 223a, the second part 223b and the third part 223c are respectively distinguished by three dotted boxes in FIG. The location does not strictly limit the boundary between the first part 223a, the second part 223b and the third part 223c.
  • both the first part 223a and the second part 223b can be roughly cylindrical.
  • the structure of the third part 223c can be designed according to needs, and what is shown in Fig. 56-Fig. 58 is only a schematic.
  • a channel 223d may be formed on the second shaft 223, and the channel 223d may extend substantially along the axial direction of the first portion 223a.
  • the channel 223d may pass through opposite radial ends of the first portion 223a, and pass through one end of the second portion 223b and the third portion 223c along the radial direction of the second portion 223b.
  • the first part 223a can be divided into two completely disconnected parts by the channel 223d
  • both the second part 223b and the third part 223c can be divided into two connected parts by the channel 223d.
  • the end of the first part 223a away from the second part 223b has a groove 223e, and the groove 223e may be provided on the inner surface of the channel 223d.
  • a flexible circuit board can be mounted on the second shaft 223 . It will be described in detail below.
  • Figure 59, Figure 60 and Figure 61 show the schematic structure of the flexible circuit board 26 after bending and winding (the flexible circuit board 26 will be bent and wound after being installed on the second shaft 223), in fact the flexible circuit board 26 It is in a flattened state before being installed on the second shaft 223 , and in the flattened state the flexible circuit board 26 may be roughly in the shape of a strip.
  • the flexible circuit board 26 may include an electrical connection end 261 and an electrical connection end 263.
  • the electrical connection end 261 and the electrical connection end 263 are respectively Both ends in the direction of extension. Both the electrical connection end 261 and the electrical connection end 263 are used to transmit electrical signals, and both may include connectors.
  • the electrical connection end 261 can be connected with the first host circuit board assembly 212, for example, the connector of the electrical connection end 261 can be connected with the connector on the circuit board 212a of the first host circuit board assembly 212, so that the flexible circuit Board 26 is electrically connected to first host circuit board assembly 212 .
  • the electrical connection end 263 can be electrically balanced with the second host circuit board assembly 235, the flexible circuit board connecting the function key 24 and the motor (schematically, the function key 24 and the motor can share the same flexible circuit board). connect.
  • the flexible circuit board connecting the function key 24 and the motor may be fixed on a side of the second bracket 231a away from the opening of the third receiving groove 231f, for example.
  • a magnetic field sensor (such as a Hall sensor or a magnetometer) can also be arranged on the flexible circuit board. There can be two magnetic field sensors, for example, and the two magnetic field sensors can be close to the groove wall of the third accommodation groove 231f and the fourth accommodation groove respectively. 231g tank walls.
  • the flexible circuit board 26 may further include a connecting portion 264 and a mounting portion 262 , the connecting portion 264 connects the mounting portion 262 with the electrical connection end 261 , and the mounting portion 262 is also connected with the electrical connection end 263 .
  • the connecting portion 264 has a grounding portion 264a and a limiting portion 264b.
  • the grounding portion 264 a may be closer to the electrical connection end 261
  • the limiting portion 264 b may be farther from the electrical connection end 261 , for example.
  • the limiting portion 264b may be in the shape of a lug, for example.
  • the mounting portion 262 is used to cooperate with the second shaft 223 and can be bent and rolled.
  • a part of the installation part 262 can be folded in half to form a stack, so this part can be called a stack part.
  • Another part of the mounting part 262 may be connected to the laminated part and wound into a loop, so this part may be referred to as a wound part.
  • the coiled portion may be located at one end of the laminated portion. It can be understood that, in FIG. 59 , the installation part 262 is marked with a dotted line box, which is only for visually illustrating the approximate location of the installation part 262 , rather than strictly defining the boundary of the installation part 262 .
  • the wiring quantity in the flexible circuit board 26 needs to meet the design requirements, and the width dimension of the flexible circuit board 26 will affect the wiring quantity in the flexible circuit board 26, so the width dimension of the flexible circuit board 26 (such as the minimum width dimension ) need to meet the design requirements.
  • FIG. 62 illustrate the width dimension W1 of the coiled portion of the mounting portion 262 of the flexible circuit board 26 and the folded width dimension W2 of the laminated portion (the unfolded width of the laminated portion is approximately 2*W2), wherein The width dimension W1 of the winding part and the folded width dimension W2 of the laminated part can be designed as required.
  • the flexible circuit board 26 may further include a spacer bracket 266 .
  • the structure of the partition bracket 266 can be designed according to needs, for example, it is roughly flat.
  • the number of partition brackets 266 can be determined according to needs, and can be single or at least two.
  • Spacer brackets 266 are sandwiched between the double-folded layers of the laminated portion, and each layer may be attached (eg, glued) to the spacer brackets 266 .
  • the unfolded width of the laminated part is generally small, and it is difficult to keep the folded shape after the laminated part is folded (the folded layer is easy to warp).
  • the spacer bracket 266 can keep the laminated portion in a folded configuration.
  • the spacer bracket 266 can also limit the bending radius of the laminated part, so as to prevent the laminated part from being damaged due to excessive bending.
  • the separating bracket 266 may not be provided according to product requirements. As shown in FIG. 59 and FIG.
  • the flexible circuit board 26 may further include a protective layer 265 , for example, the protective layer 265 may be attached to the surface of the laminated part, and may be located at an end of the laminated part away from the winding part.
  • the material of the protection layer 265 may be mylar, for example.
  • the position and material of the protective layer 265 can also be designed according to product requirements, and are not limited to the above.
  • the laminated part can be fixed to the third main body casing 232, and the protective layer 265 can separate the laminated part from the third main body casing 232, preventing the laminated part from rubbing against the third main body casing 232 to cause The flexible circuit board 26 is damaged (described further below).
  • the protective layer 265 can also play a certain role in strengthening the structure of the laminated part. In other embodiments, according to product requirements, the protective layer 265 may not be provided.
  • 62 and 63 show the assembled structure of the flexible circuit board 26 and the second shaft 223 .
  • the laminated part of the installation part 262 of the flattened flexible circuit board 26 can be folded in half first, and at this time the winding part of the installation part 262 can continue to maintain the flattened state .
  • the entire installation part 262 is loaded into the channel 223d of the second shaft 223 from the end of the third part 223c of the second shaft 223, so that the winding part of the installation part 262 is positioned at the first The first part 223a of the two shafts 223 .
  • the winding part can be bent to wrap around the outer circumference of the first part 223a, and the number of winding turns can be determined according to actual needs.
  • the winding part After the winding is completed, there is a certain distance between the winding part and the end of the first part 223a away from the second part 223b (that is, the winding part does not cover the end of the first part 223a), which helps to avoid the winding part Being scratched affects the lifespan (will continue to be explained below).
  • Both the electrical connection end 261 and the electrical connection end 263 of the flexible circuit board 26 are located outside the second shaft 223 .
  • the electrical connection end 261 and the electrical connection end 263 can be bent so as to adapt to the internal space of the host 2 .
  • the protective layer 265 and the connecting portion 264 of the flexible circuit board 26 may also be exposed on the second shaft 223 .
  • the inner ring of the coiled part of the flexible circuit board 26 directly contacts the first part 223a of the second shaft 223, and the junction of the coiled part and the stacked part can be fixed to the first part 223a, such as Can be glued.
  • Other areas of the coiled portion may be unsecured and left in a natural coiled state, which may be relaxed to increase the diameter of the portion, or tightened to reduce the diameter of the portion.
  • the width dimension W1 of the winding portion can be ensured by the axial dimension of the first portion 223a. Since the laminated part of the flexible circuit board 26 is accommodated in the channel 223d of the second shaft 223 in a folded state, the second shaft 223 only needs a small space to accommodate the laminated part with an unfolded width of 2*W2, This is beneficial to realize the miniaturization of the second shaft 223 , and further facilitates the miniaturization of the host computer 2 .
  • the second shaft 223 with the above structure, and installing the flexible circuit board 26 on the second shaft 223 in a bending and winding manner, the electrical connection of the host 2 can be realized, and the flexible circuit can also be guaranteed
  • the width dimension of the board 26 meets the design requirements, and is also conducive to realizing the miniaturization of the host computer 2 .
  • the second shaft 223 installed with the flexible circuit board 26 can be installed in the second inner chamber 222j of the shaft sleeve 222 .
  • the first portion 223 a of the second shaft 223 is located in the first area 222 c of the sleeve 222 .
  • the second portion 223b of the second shaft 223 may be located in the second region 222d of the second lumen 222j.
  • the outer peripheral surface of the second part 223b can form a rotational fit with the inner surface of the second region 222d, that is, the outer peripheral surface of the second part 223b can be in contact with the inner surface of the second region 222d or not (with a small gap), the second The inner surface of the region 222d can rotate relative to the outer peripheral surface of the second portion 223b.
  • the third portion 223c of the second shaft 223 is located outside the sleeve 222 .
  • the coiled portion of the flexible circuit board 26 is located in the first area 222c.
  • a part of the laminated portion of the flexible circuit board 26 is located at the first area 222c and the second area 222d , and another portion of the laminated portion is located outside the sleeve 222 .
  • Both the electrical connection end 261 and the electrical connection end 263 of the flexible circuit board 26 are located outside the sleeve 222 .
  • the connecting portion 264 of the flexible circuit board 26 can pass through the opening of the first region 222c, and the grounding portion 264a and the limiting portion 264b of the connecting portion 264 are located outside the sleeve 222.
  • the electrical connection end 261 of the flexible circuit board 26 can be fixed to the first host circuit board assembly 212 , and the electrical connection end 261 can follow the movement of the first part 21 of the host 2 . Therefore, the connection portion 264 connected to the electrical connection end 261 will also follow the movement of the electrical connection end 261 .
  • the connecting part 264 can be clamped by a clamp to limit the connecting part 264. It will be explained below.
  • the clamping member 27 can be roughly in the shape of a sheet, and a gap 27a can be formed on it, and the gap 27a can be basically linear, and one end of the gap 27a penetrates the clamping component 27, and the other end does not penetrate the clamping component 27.
  • the clamping member 27 can be made of a material with good insulation and moisture resistance, such as mylar.
  • the connecting part 264 can pass through the gap 27a of the clamping part 27, the limit part 264b of the connecting part 264 can be clamped on the edge of the gap 27a, and the clamping part 27 can be fixed to the shaft sleeve 222 In the groove 222k and the groove 222m, the clip 27 covers at least a part of the first region 222c.
  • the clamping member 27 can clamp the connecting portion 264 and limit the connecting portion 264 .
  • the design of the limiting portion 264b is also convenient for accurately positioning the clamping member 27 and the flexible circuit board 26 during assembly on the production line, thereby ensuring assembly yield.
  • the design of clamping the connecting portion 264 by the clamping member 27 can be omitted.
  • FIG. 67 shows a cross-sectional assembly structure of the shaft assembly 22, the flexible circuit board 26 and the clamping member 27, wherein the flexible circuit board 26 is not cut in order to clearly show the flexible circuit board 26.
  • the assembly relationship between the first shaft 221, the driven part 229, the elastic part 228, the protruding fitting part 227, the shaft sleeve 222, and the second shaft 223, the flexible circuit board 26, the clamping part 27 , and the assembly relationship between the shaft sleeve 222 have been described above and will not be repeated here.
  • the end of the first part 223a of the second shaft 223 is not covered by the coiled part of the flexible circuit board 26, which facilitates the insertion of the end 221d of the first shaft 221 into the end of the first part 223a of the second shaft 223.
  • the groove 223e There may be a certain gap between the end portion 221d and the winding portion in the axial direction of the first shaft 221, so as to prevent the end portion 221d from interfering with the winding portion.
  • a shaft contact piece 224 can be fixed in the installation groove 222g of the shaft sleeve 222 close to the second part 221b of the first shaft 221, and the shaft contact piece 224 is in contact with the second part 221b.
  • another shaft contact piece 224 can be fixed in the groove of the second part 223b of the shaft sleeve 222 near the second shaft 223, and the shaft contact piece 224 is in contact with the second part 223b (due to the viewing angle, it is assembled in the shaft sleeve 222 The groove adjacent to the second portion 223b, and the shaft contact 224 in the groove are not shown).
  • the shaft contact 224 may be a conductor, such as a metal shrapnel.
  • the assembly structure of the shaft assembly 22 , the flexible circuit board 26 , the first part 21 and the second part 23 of the host 2 will be described step by step below.
  • both the third portion 221c of the first shaft 221 and the third portion 223c of the second shaft 223 can be fixed to the inner platform 232g of the third main body casing 232 .
  • the shaft sleeve 222 can be located in the shaft installation space 232f of the third main body casing 232, and the shaft sleeve 222 can rotate in the shaft installation space 232f.
  • the second outer surface 222f of the shaft sleeve 222 may face the outer side of the peripheral side wall 232a of the third main body casing 232 .
  • the electrical connection terminal 261 of the flexible circuit board 26 may be located inside the peripheral side wall 232a.
  • the electrical connection end 263 of the flexible circuit board 26 can be located on the inner side of the peripheral side wall 232 a and fixed to the inner platform 232 g.
  • the electrical connection end 263 may have glue, and the electrical connection end 263 may be bonded to the inner platform 232g.
  • the protective layer 265 of the flexible circuit board 26 can be located on the inner side of the peripheral side wall 232a, and between the peripheral side wall 232a and the laminated part of the flexible circuit board 26 to prevent lamination. Part of it is in direct contact with the peripheral side wall 232a to generate friction, so as to avoid damage to the flexible circuit board 26 due to friction.
  • the second bracket 231 a of the second main body casing 231 can be assembled and fixed with the third main body casing 232 , and the second main body casing 231 can be located inside the peripheral side wall 232 a.
  • the opening of the third receiving groove 231f and the opening of the fourth receiving groove 231g on the second bracket 231a face upward.
  • the second bracket 231 a covers both the third portion 221 c of the first shaft 221 and the third portion 223 c of the second shaft 223 .
  • the through hole 231b of the second bracket 231a and the bushing 222 may be respectively located at opposite ends of the same diameter of the peripheral sidewall 232a. As shown in conjunction with FIG. 69 and FIG. 68 , the through hole 231 b can communicate with the second opening 232 c of the third main body casing 232 .
  • the first main body casing 213 can cover the second main body casing 231 and the third main body casing 232 .
  • the opening of the first receiving groove 213y and the opening of the second receiving groove 213x of the first bracket 213b of the first main body casing 213 may face downward.
  • the opening of the first receiving groove 213y may face the opening of the third receiving groove 231f, and the opening of the first receiving groove 213y and the opening of the third receiving groove 231f may be aligned.
  • the opening of the second receiving groove 213x may face the opening of the fourth receiving groove 231g, and the opening of the second receiving groove 213x and the opening of the fourth receiving groove 231g may be aligned.
  • the first frame body 213a in the first main body casing 213 can be fixedly connected to the side of the shaft sleeve 222 having the first outer surface 222a, and the first frame body 213a can cover the first outer surface A part of the area of 222a and a part of the area of the clip 27.
  • Another partial area of the first outer surface 222a and another partial area of the clamping member 27 can be exposed from the through hole 213z of the first frame body 213a.
  • the electrical connection end 261 and the connection portion 264 of the flexible circuit board 26 can pass through the through hole 213z of the first frame body 213a.
  • the electrical connection end 261 can be connected with the circuit board of the first host circuit board assembly 212 , so that the flexible circuit board 26 is electrically connected with the first host circuit board assembly 212 .
  • the grounding portion 264a of the connection portion 264 can pass through the through hole 213z and be connected to the first frame body 213a through a conductor, such as conductive foam or conductive glue. In this way, the flexible circuit board 26 can be grounded, thereby avoiding interference to the antenna radiation performance of the host 2 (it will be further explained below).
  • the limiting portion 264b of the connecting portion 264 is located in the through hole 213z.
  • the through hole 213z of the first frame body 213a can be filled with sealing material (indicated by hatching), and the sealing material can fill up the through hole 213z and cover the first outer surface 222a and the clamping member 27. surface, and the sealing material surrounds the connecting portion 264 of the flexible circuit board 26 .
  • the sealing material can be, for example, a sealant.
  • the sealing material has a sealing effect and can prevent moisture from invading the electrical connection end 261 and the first host circuit board assembly 212 through the through hole 213z of the first frame body 213a.
  • the moisture may come from the outside, and the moisture from the outside may enter the through hole through the assembly gap between the shaft sleeve 222 and the peripheral side wall 232a.
  • the moisture may also come from the inside of the host 2, and the moisture inside the host 2 may enter the through hole through the assembly gap between the shaft sleeve 222 and the second bracket 231a.
  • the structural design can be adjusted (such as adjusting the position and/or size of the through hole of the first frame body 213a), so that only a part of the clip 27 can be exposed from the through hole 213z of the first frame body 213a , the first outer surface 222a of the sleeve 222 is completely covered by the first frame body 213a.
  • the sealing material in the through hole 213z only covers the surface of the clamping member 27 .
  • the first frame body 213a may not have a through hole 213z, and may not be filled with a sealing material for sealing.
  • the display screen 211 is installed on the first main body casing 213 .
  • the display screen 211 can cover the first bracket 213b of the first host housing 213, the first host circuit board assembly 212, and the electrical connection end 261 and the connection portion 264 of the flexible circuit board 26. , and a part of the first frame body 213a of the first host casing 213 , the periphery of the first frame body 213a may surround the periphery of the display screen 211 .
  • FIG. 72 illustrates the closed state of the host 2 , and the second outer surface 222f of the shaft sleeve 222 can be seen as the appearance surface of the host 2 .
  • the shaft sleeve 222 of the shaft assembly 22 is fixedly connected to the first part 21, the first shaft 221 and the second shaft 223 of the shaft assembly 22 are both fixedly connected to the second part 23, and the first part 21 can be
  • the coaxial sleeve 222 rotates around the first shaft 221 and the second shaft 223 together.
  • FIG. 73 is a schematic side view of the host 2 in a closed state
  • FIG. 74 is a schematic top view of the shaft assembly 22 of the host 2 in FIG. 73
  • the shaft sleeve 222 is cut and displayed. It should be noted that the section of the shaft sleeve 222 in FIG. 73 and the section of the shaft sleeve 222 in FIG. 74 are perpendicular to each other.
  • FIG. 75 is a partially enlarged schematic view at B in FIG. 74 .
  • the locking part 213d in the first part 21 forms a snap connection with the buckle 251e of the opening key 25, so that the first part 21 is locked by the second part 23 .
  • the top of the first slope 229a of the follower 229 (that is, the end of the first slope 229a away from the plane 229b) can be connected with the top of the slope 221k of the second part 221b of the first shaft 221 (that is, the end of the slope 221k that is close to the plane 221m)
  • the flat surface 229b of the follower 229 has a gap with the flat surface 221m of the second part 221b.
  • the force exerted by the inclined surface 221k on the first inclined surface 229a can make the follower 229 have a tendency to rotate along the opening direction, and the first part 21 of the main machine 2 can rotate along the opening direction to open relative to the second part 23 .
  • the sleeve 222 As shown in FIG. 75 , due to the cooperation between the follower 229 and the sleeve 222 , when the follower 229 has a tendency to rotate clockwise, the sleeve 222 also has a tendency to rotate in an opening direction.
  • the sleeve 222 is fixedly connected with the first part 21, so the first part 21 also has a tendency to rotate along the opening direction. However, since the first part 21 is locked by the second part 23, the first part 21 cannot actually rotate in the opening direction.
  • the other end of the elastic member 228 presses against the bump fitting 227 so that the bump fitting 227 abuts against the partition 222n.
  • Fig. 76 is a schematic diagram of the cross-sectional structure of A-A in Fig. 75.
  • Fig. 76 shows the cross-sectional mating structure of the bump fitting 227 and the partition 222n when the host 2 is in the closed state, wherein the bump 227a on the bump fitting 227 is represented by a dotted line. hint.
  • the protruding point 227a is located in the slide groove 222q on the partition 222n, and there is a certain distance between the protruding point 227a and the matching groove 222p.
  • the buckle 251 e of the opening key 25 and the locking portion 213 d of the first part 21 will no longer form a snap connection, and the first part 21 will no longer be locked by the second part 23 . At this time, the first part 21 will start the first section of rotation stroke.
  • the angle a may be about 15°, for example. It is easy to understand that in the first rotation stroke, the first part 21 is driven to rotate by the bushing 222 , so the first part 21 is automatically rotated without external force applied by the user.
  • the convex point 227a In the first section of the rotation stroke, the convex point 227a always slides smoothly in the slide groove 222q, and there will be no displacement (or jolting) along the rotation axis direction of the shaft sleeve 222 between the convex point matching part 227 and the shaft sleeve 222.
  • the bump fitting 227 will not impact the sleeve 222 . Therefore, when the user touches the first part 21, the user experiences no tactile feedback.
  • the convex point 227a can enter the matching groove 222p, and when the convex point 227a enters the first matching groove 222p from the sliding groove 222q, the convex point matching part 227 and Displacement along the axis of rotation of the shaft sleeves 222 will occur between the shaft sleeves 222 , and the protrusion fittings 227 will impact the shaft sleeves 222 . Therefore, if the user touches the first part 21, the user can experience tactile feedback.
  • the plane 229b contacts the plane 221m, and the force exerted by the elastic member 228 and the first shaft 221 on the follower 229 is along the axis of the main body 221g.
  • the resulting force is zero, so only relying on the elastic member 228 and the first shaft 221 cannot continue to drive the driven member 229 to rotate, that is, the first part 21 cannot continue to rotate automatically.
  • the user can turn the first part 21 in the opening direction.
  • the first part 21 can drive the shaft sleeve 222 to rotate in the opening direction, and the shaft sleeve 222 can drive the follower 229 to rotate in the opening direction.
  • the plane 229b is in sliding contact with the plane 221m, so the follower 229 only rotates without displacement in the axial direction of the main body 221g.
  • the first part 21 can complete the second stroke.
  • the first part 21 will open an angle b relative to the second part 23 , and the angle b may be about 75°, for example.
  • the first part 21 needs to be manually rotated by the user.
  • the protruding points 227a will enter each matching groove 222p sequentially. At the end of the second rotation stroke, the protruding point 227a can slide out from a matching groove 222p and enter into the sliding groove 222q.
  • a displacement along the axis of rotation of the sleeve 222 will occur between the bump fitting 227 and the shaft sleeve 222, and the bump fitting 227 will move against the shaft sleeve. 222 makes a shock. Therefore, the user can experience tactile feedback.
  • the first part 21 when the first part 21 opens an angle b relative to the second part 23, the first part 21 can start to enter the third stroke.
  • the rotation characteristic of the first part 21 in the third stroke is similar to the rotation characteristic in the first stroke, and the first part 21 is also automatically rotated in the third stroke. Details will be given below.
  • the top end of the second inclined surface 229c is in contact with the top end of the inclined surface 221k.
  • the driven member 229 will perform a compound movement.
  • the follower 229 will rotate in the opening direction and move towards the second portion 221b until the root of the second slope 229c (ie the end of the second slope 229c facing away from the plane 229b) contacts the top of the slope 221k.
  • the follower 229 moves, the sleeve 222 and the first part 21 will also rotate around the second part 221b along the opening direction.
  • the limiting protrusion 222r on the shaft sleeve 222 can enter the limiting groove 232h of the third main body casing 232, and the limiting protrusion 222r is against the inner wall of the limiting groove 232h , at this time the sleeve 222 cannot continue to rotate in the opening direction, so the first part 21 also stops rotating.
  • the first part 21 When the follower 229, the shaft sleeve 222 and the first part 21 stop rotating, the first part 21 will complete the third section of the rotation stroke. As shown in FIG. For example, it may be about 90°. It is easy to understand that in the third stroke, the first part 21 is driven to rotate by the bushing 222 , so the first part 21 is automatically rotated without external force applied by the user.
  • the movement of the first part 21 can be limited by the third main body casing 232 by using the cooperation of the limiting groove 232h and the limiting protrusion 222r. Since the third main body casing 232 has a larger volume (compared to the shaft assembly 22) and better structural strength, the assembly reliability of the stop groove 232h and the stop protrusion 222r is high, which is beneficial to ensure The cooperation reliability of host 2. It can be understood that, according to actual needs, in other embodiments, the cooperation between the two steps of the follower and the two steps of the first shaft 221 can be used to stop the rotation of the first part 21 when it reaches the end of the third stroke. There is no need to design a limiting protrusion 222r on the shaft sleeve, and it is not necessary to provide a limiting groove 232h on the third main body casing 232 .
  • the electrical connection end 261 of the flexible circuit board 26 will rotate with the first part 21, and the winding part of the flexible circuit board 26 can be gradually loosened.
  • the diameter of the winding portion may gradually increase.
  • the whole process of closing the opened first part 21 requires manual rotation of the first part 21 in the opposite direction of the opening direction until the first part 21 is locked with the unlocking key.
  • the protrusions 227a slide in and out of each matching groove 222p in sequence, the protrusion fittings 227 will impact the shaft sleeve 222, so There is tactile feedback.
  • the convex point 227a slides smoothly in the slide groove 222q, the convex point matching part 227 will not impact the shaft sleeve 222, so there is no hand feeling feedback.
  • the electrical connection end 261 of the flexible circuit board 26 will rotate with the first part 21, the winding part of the flexible circuit board 26 can be gradually tightened, and the diameter of the winding part can be gradually reduced. Small.
  • the assembly structure of the first shaft 221 , the follower 229 , the elastic member 228 and the sleeve 222 in the shaft assembly 22 is used to construct the cam mechanism and realize the opening and closing of the host machine 2 .
  • the second shaft 223 in the shaft assembly 22 is used for mounting and winding the flexible circuit board 26 .
  • the first shaft 221 and the second shaft 223 are respectively designed to facilitate the assembly of the flexible circuit board 26 to the second shaft 223 and the shaft sleeve 222 .
  • the first shaft 221 and the second shaft 223 may not be centered after assembly (the axis of the first shaft 221 and the axis of the second shaft 223 do not coincide). Stress is generated when the mechanism moves, which reduces the reliability of the rotating shaft assembly 22 and may also cause abnormal noise.
  • the assembly tolerance can be absorbed, thereby reducing or avoiding the stress caused by misalignment.
  • first shaft and the second shaft may not be connected, and the end of the second shaft may not be provided with a groove for accommodating the end of the first shaft.
  • there may be no flexible circuit board wound around the shaft and an integrated single shaft may be used instead of the first shaft 221 and the second shaft 223 .
  • the limiting member 226 can be canceled.
  • the assembly structure of the elastic part 228 , the protruding fitting part 227 and the bushing 222 in the shaft assembly 22 is used to realize the tactile feedback during the opening and closing process of the host 2 .
  • the tactile feedback design can be eliminated, that is, the sliding groove 222q and the matching groove 222p on the convex fitting part 227 and the partition plate 222n of the sleeve 222 can be eliminated.
  • the elastic member may directly abut against the partition plate 222n.
  • the shaft contact piece 224 installed on the shaft sleeve 222 rotates together with the shaft sleeve 222, while the shaft contact piece 224 keeps in contact with the first shaft 221 and the second shaft 223, that is, The shaft contact 224 is in sliding contact with the first shaft 221 and the second shaft 223 .
  • both the first frame body 213 a and the third host casing 232 of the host 2 can serve as antennas in the antenna system of the host 2 .
  • Two feeding paths of the antenna system of the host computer 2 will be explained below.
  • the first frame body 213a can be in contact with the feeding spring 212f of the first host circuit board assembly 212, so that radio frequency signals can be fed into the first frame body 213a through the feeding spring 212f.
  • the first frame body 213a can be in contact with the ground elastic pieces 212b, 212c, 212d, and 212e of the first host circuit board assembly 212, so that the first frame body 213a can be grounded. Therefore, the first housing 213a can serve as an antenna.
  • the first frame body 213a is connected to the shaft sleeve 222, and the shaft contact piece 224 on the shaft sleeve 222 is in contact with the first shaft 221 and the second shaft 223, and both the first shaft 221 and the second shaft 223 are in contact with the shaft sleeve 222.
  • the third host case 232 is connected. Therefore, the radio frequency signal can be transmitted from the first frame body 213 a to the third host casing 232 through the shaft sleeve 222 , the shaft contact 224 , the first shaft 221 and the second shaft 223 . Therefore, the third main body casing 232 can also serve as an antenna.
  • the first feeding path of the antenna system is formed.
  • the first frame body 213a can feed power to the third main body casing 232 through coupling, so that the third main body casing 232 can be used as an antenna.
  • the second feeding path of the antenna system is formed.
  • the radiation of the third host casing 232 in the second feeding path is strong, and the host 2 guarantees the antenna performance through the third host casing 232 and the first frame body 213a.
  • the radiation of the third host casing 232 in the second feeding path is relatively weak, and at this time, the radiation of the first frame body 213a is mainly relied on to ensure the performance of the antenna.
  • the radiation direction of the antenna system changes when the host 2 is in the open state, which can meet the communication requirements of the host 2 in the open state. Therefore, in this embodiment, by designing the feeding paths of the two antenna systems, different communication requirements of the host 2 in the open state and in the closed state can be met, and the antenna performance of the host 2 in different states can be guaranteed.
  • the flexible circuit board 26 may cause interference to the radiation performance of the first frame body 213 a and the third host housing 232 , especially the greater the length of the flexible circuit board 26 , the more serious the interference will be.
  • the ground portion 264a of the flexible circuit board 26 can be connected to the first frame body 213a through a conductor, so that the flexible circuit board 26 can be grounded, thereby avoiding the interference of the flexible circuit board 26 on the antenna radiation performance of the host 2 .
  • the above-mentioned grounding design for the flexible circuit board 26 may not be performed.
  • the structures of the first earphone 31 and the second earphone 32 may be completely consistent.
  • the following will take the first earphone 31 as an example for description.
  • the first earphone 31 may include an earplug 311 , an earplug holder assembly 316 , a first electrode 312 , an earphone front shell assembly 313 , a second electrode 314 , an earphone rear shell assembly 315 and an electronic assembly 317 .
  • both the earbud bracket assembly 316 and the first electrode 312 can be installed at one end of the earphone front shell assembly 313
  • both the second electrode 314 and the earphone rear shell assembly 315 can be installed at the other end of the earphone front shell assembly 313 .
  • the earplug 311 and the earplug bracket assembly 316 are located at the same end of the earphone front shell assembly 313 , and the earplug 311 is mounted on the end of the earplug bracket assembly 316 away from the earphone front shell assembly 313 .
  • the electronic component 317 can be installed in the space surrounded by the earbud bracket component 316 , the first electrode 312 , the earphone front shell component 313 , the second electrode 314 and the earphone rear shell component 315 .
  • the structure and assembly of the earplug 311, the earplug bracket assembly 316, the first electrode 312, the earphone front shell assembly 313, the second electrode 314, and the earphone rear shell assembly 315 in the first earphone 31 will be described below, and then the structure of the electronic assembly 317 will be described. with assembly.
  • the first electrode 312, the earphone front shell assembly 313, the second electrode 314, and the earphone rear shell assembly 315 can roughly form an octahedron appearance, and the outer peripheral surface of the octahedron can include a plane. Connected with the arc surface, the plane is connected with the arc surface and arranged alternately to form a circle (that is, each plane is connected between two arc surfaces, and each arc surface is connected between two planes).
  • the octahedral shape of the first earphone 31 is a centrally symmetrical shape. In other embodiments, the first earphone may also have other centrally symmetrical shapes, for example, the first earphone is roughly cylindrical or tetrahedral.
  • the radial dimension of the first earphone 31 may be greater than the depth of the first receiving groove 213y, for example, the radial dimension of the first earphone 31 may be at least twice the depth of the first receiving groove 213y. Wherein, the radial dimension may be the distance between two facing planes on the first earphone 31 .
  • the earphone front case assembly 313 may include an earphone front case 313z, a noise reduction microphone mesh 313j and an earphone magnet 313g.
  • the earphone front shell 313z may be a hollow cylindrical structure with openings at both ends.
  • the earphone front shell 313z may include a first part 313a, a second part 313b and a third part 313c which are sequentially connected.
  • the circumferential length of the first portion 313a may be smaller than that of the second portion 313b, and the circumferential length of the second portion 313b may be smaller than that of the third portion 313c.
  • the circumferential length refers to the dimension in the direction of the centerline of the cylindrical structure surrounding the earphone front shell 313z.
  • the third part 313c can be substantially an octahedron cylindrical structure, and the wall of the third part 313c can include a flat portion and an arc portion, and the flat portion and the arc portion are connected and alternately arranged to form a circle (that is, each flat portion is connected between two arcuate portions, each arcuate portion is connected between two flat portions).
  • an installation groove 313f may be formed at the end of the first part 313a away from the second part 313b, and the installation groove 313f may surround a circle.
  • a sound pickup channel 313e may also be provided in the wall of the earphone front shell 313z, and the sound pickup channel 313e may extend substantially along a straight line. One end of the sound pickup channel 313e passes through the bottom surface of the mounting groove 313f, and the other end of the sound pickup channel 313e communicates with the inner cavity of the earphone front shell 313z.
  • a through hole 313d may be provided on the second part 313b, and the through hole 313d communicates with the inner cavity of the earphone front shell 313z.
  • the noise-canceling microphone net 313j may be roughly in the shape of a sheet, which may include several layers of materials, such as acoustic mesh, glue layers, and the like. As shown in Figure 89 and Figure 90, the noise reduction microphone net 313j can be fixed in the earphone front shell 313z, and cover the end of the sound pickup channel 313e away from the installation groove 313f, the sound in the sound pickup channel 313e can pass through the noise reduction microphone Net 313j.
  • the earphone magnet 313g of this embodiment may be a single magnet.
  • the earphone magnet 313g may have a single magnetic field direction.
  • the earphone magnet 313g may have at least two magnetic field directions, and the earphone magnet 313g may form a Halbach array (which may be obtained by magnetizing different regions of a physically single magnet in different directions).
  • the earphone magnet 313g is a Halbach array with two different magnetic field directions.
  • the earphone magnet can be spliced by at least two single magnets.
  • the earphone magnet may have at least two magnetic field directions, the earphone magnet forming a Halbach array.
  • the earphone magnet 313 g of this embodiment may be roughly a bent plate-shaped structure, and the bent plate-shaped structure may be bent in a direction around the centerline of the first earphone 31 .
  • the shape of the earphone magnet 313g may match the shape of the inner wall of the third portion 313c of the earphone front shell 313z.
  • the earphone magnet 313g may be fixed to the inner wall of the third portion 313c of the earphone front shell 313z, for example, fixed to the inner wall of the arc portion of the third portion 313c.
  • the specifications of the four earphone magnets 313g can be the same, and the directions of the magnetic fields of the four earphone magnets 313g can be consistent.
  • the number of earphone magnets can be designed according to product requirements. For example, there may be only one earphone magnet, and the earphone magnet may form a closed ring structure, and the shape of the earphone magnet may match the shape of the inner wall of the third part 313c.
  • the earphone magnet can form a Halbach array, and the four regions of the earphone magnet that correspond one-to-one to the four arc portions of the third part 313c can have different magnetic field directions respectively.
  • each earphone magnet may be a curved structure surrounding the center line of the first earphone, and the 3 earphone magnets may be distributed on the inner wall of the third part of the earphone front shell at intervals, wherein 3 The earphone magnets can be evenly spaced or unevenly spaced.
  • the third part of the front shell of the earphone can be roughly octahedral or roughly cylindrical.
  • an assembly jig can be used to assist the installation of the earphone magnet 313g.
  • the earphone magnet 313g and the earphone front shell 313z can be directly assembled, and the assembly jig can be customized accordingly.
  • the earphone holder assembly 316 and the first electrode 312 etc. can also be installed on the earphone front shell 313z to form the intermediate assembly 200 first, and then the earphone magnet 313g is installed on the earphone front shell 313z of the intermediate assembly 200 Inside. Assembly jigs can be customized accordingly. The following assembly method will be described as an example.
  • the intermediate assembly 200 may include a pre-assembled earplug support assembly 316, a first electrode 312, and an earphone front shell 313z (the assembly structure of the earplug support assembly 316, the first electrode 312, and the earphone front shell 313z will be described in detail below. ).
  • a clamp 300 may be sleeved on the outer periphery of the earphone front shell 313z in the intermediate assembly 200 .
  • the clamp 300 may be in the shape of a hoop, and the clamp 300 wraps around and tightens the earphone front shell 313z.
  • the jig 300 can also be used in other assembly processes of the first earphone 31 .
  • the assembly jig 100 of this embodiment may include a base 120 , a jig magnet 130 and an upper cover 110 .
  • the base 120 may include a bottom plate 121 and a base magnet 122 fixed on the bottom plate 121 .
  • the bottom plate 121 may be provided with upper cover positioning holes 121a, for example, there are two upper cover positioning holes 121a, and the two upper cover positioning holes 121a are respectively located at two ends of the bottom plate 121 .
  • a region on the bottom plate 121 (for example, the right end region in the perspective of FIG. 93 ) can also be provided with a workpiece positioning groove 121c, a jig magnet installation groove 121b and a jig accommodating groove 121e.
  • the inner surface of the bottom of the workpiece positioning groove 121 c can conform to the outer surface of the first electrode 312 .
  • the bottom wall of the workpiece positioning groove 121c may define a through hole 121d, and the through hole 121d is used for passing the earphone front shell 313z and the earplug bracket assembly 316 through.
  • the jig magnet mounting groove 121b can be located outside the workpiece positioning groove 121c and can communicate with the workpiece positioning groove 121c. It can be considered that the jig magnet mounting groove 121b penetrates the side wall of the workpiece positioning groove 121c.
  • the number of jig magnet installation slots 121b may be consistent with the number of jig magnets 130, for example, there are four jig magnet installation slots 121b.
  • the four jig magnet mounting grooves 121b may be distributed at equal intervals around the workpiece positioning groove 121c.
  • a jig magnet 130 can be installed in each jig magnet installation groove 121b.
  • a jig magnet 130 may only include a single magnet, or may be formed by connecting at least two single magnets.
  • the jig accommodating groove 121e may be located on the outer periphery of the workpiece positioning groove 121c, and may communicate with the workpiece positioning groove 121c.
  • the jig receiving groove 121e may be located between the two jig magnet mounting grooves 121b.
  • another area of the bottom plate 121 (for example, the left end area in the perspective of FIG. 93 ) can also be provided with the same workpiece positioning groove 121c, through hole 121d, fixture magnet mounting groove 121b and fixture receiving groove 121e.
  • This design enables the assembly jig 100 to assemble two intermediate components 200 at the same time.
  • the positioning groove 121c, the through hole 121d, the fixture magnet mounting groove 121b and the fixture receiving groove 121e in the two regions of the bottom plate 121 may be located between the two upper cover positioning holes 121a.
  • the upper cover 110 may include a cover plate 111 , an upper cover positioning post 113 , an upper cover limiting post 112 and an upper cover magnet 114 .
  • the two upper cover positioning posts 113 there may be two upper cover positioning posts 113 , and the two upper cover positioning posts 113 are respectively located at two ends of the cover plate 111 .
  • a region of the cover plate 111 (for example, the right region in the perspective of FIG. 95 ) can be provided with magnet placement through holes 111a.
  • the number of magnet placement through holes 111a can be consistent with the number of earphone magnets 313g.
  • the number of magnet placement through holes 111a is also four. indivual.
  • the four magnet placement through holes 111a may roughly form a 2*2 matrix.
  • the upper cover limit post 112 is disposed on one side of the cover plate 111 in the thickness direction, and the center of the upper cover limit post 112 may be roughly located between the four magnet placement through holes 111a. And, for each magnet placement through hole 111a and the upper cover limit post 112, a part of the projection of the upper cover limit post 112 on the axis direction of the magnet placement through hole 111a will fall on the magnet placement through hole 111a is within the projection in the axial direction of the magnet placement through hole 111a. That is, from the perspective of FIG. 95 , each magnet placement through hole 111 a has a part of the upper cover limit post 112 , which can be called a limit portion. It is easy to understand that the number of the limiting parts is the same as the number of the earphone magnets 313g.
  • the shape of the upper cover limiting column 112 can be adapted to the shape of the inner cavity of the earphone front shell 313z.
  • the upper cover magnet 114 can be fixed to the cover plate 111 , and can be located on the same side of the cover plate 111 as the upper cover limit post 112 .
  • another area of the cover plate 111 (for example, the left area in the view of FIG. 95 ) can also be designed with the same magnet placement through hole 111 a and upper cover limiting post 112 .
  • This design enables the assembly jig 100 to assemble two intermediate components 200 at the same time.
  • the magnet placement through hole 111 a and the upper cover limiting post 112 in the two regions of the cover plate 111 may be located between the two upper cover positioning posts 113 .
  • each fixture magnet 130 can correspond to an installation position for installing the earphone magnet 313g in the earphone front shell 313z.
  • the upper cover 110 is installed on the base 120, so that the cover plate 111 contacts the base 120, so that the upper cover positioning post 113 is inserted into the upper cover positioning hole 121a, so that the upper cover magnet 114 and The base magnet 122 is magnetically attracted.
  • the upper cover limit post 112 in the upper cover 110 will be inserted into the inner cavity of the earphone front shell 313z.
  • each magnet placement through hole 111a has a part of the workpiece positioning groove 121c, that is, the projections of different regions of the workpiece positioning groove 121c on the axis direction of the magnet placement through hole 111a fall respectively. into each magnet placement through hole 111a.
  • each magnet placement through hole 111a of the upper cover 110 has a part of the earphone front shell 313z, that is, different areas of the earphone front shell 313z are in the axial direction of the magnet placement through hole 111a The projections of respectively fall into each magnet placement through hole 111a.
  • a gap B is formed between each limiting portion of the upper cover limiting column 112 and the inner wall of the earphone front shell 313z (only one gap B is marked in the figure for brevity).
  • Each gap B is used to accommodate an earphone magnet 313g.
  • each earphone magnet 313g is respectively installed into four gaps B from the four magnet placement through holes 111a, so that there is an earphone magnet 313g in each gap B, and each earphone magnet 313g is positioned to the mounting position in the earphone front shell 313z.
  • the fixture magnet 130 near each gap B can be magnetically attracted to the earphone magnet 313g in the gap B, so that the earphone magnet 313g can be kept at the installation position in the earphone front shell 313z. Thereby, pre-positioning of the earphone magnet 313g can be completed.
  • the upper cover 110 may be removed to expose the middle assembly 200 and the earphone magnet 313g predetermined therein.
  • the earphone magnet 313g can be fixed on the inner wall of the earphone front shell 313z by using a suitable process.
  • the earphone magnet 313g may be bonded to the inner wall of the earphone front shell 313z by using a dispensing process.
  • the adhesive used in the dispensing process may be, for example, quick-drying adhesive.
  • the base 120 can position the intermediate assembly 200 well, the matching structure of the upper cover 110 and the base 120 can accurately define the installation space of the earphone magnet 313g, and the jig magnet 130 can be used conveniently and reliably.
  • the earphone magnet 313g remains in place within the earphone front case 313z. Therefore, using the assembly jig 100 can greatly improve the assembly accuracy and reliability of the earphone magnet 313g, and make the assembly process simple and mass-producible.
  • the first electrode 312 may include an electrode body 312a and a conducting portion 312b.
  • the electrode main body 312a may be roughly a ring structure surrounding the center line of the first earphone 31 .
  • the conduction portion 312b may be approximately columnar, and the conduction portion 312b may be protruded from the inner surface of the electrode body 312a.
  • the first electrode 312 can be made of conductive material, such as metal material.
  • the first electrode 312 can be mounted on the earphone front shell 313z.
  • the electrode main body 312a of the first electrode 312 cooperates with the second part 313b of the earphone front shell 313z.
  • the conduction portion 312b of the first electrode 312 can pass through the through hole 313d of the earphone front shell 313z, and be electrically connected with the circuit board (described below) of the first earphone circuit board assembly located in the inner cavity of the earphone front shell 313z , so that the first electrode 312 serves as a charging electrode.
  • the detailed assembly structure will be described below.
  • the earbud holder assembly 316 may include an earbud holder 316b, a front vent acoustic mesh 316a, and a speaker mesh 316c.
  • the earbud holder 316b may include a holder body 316u, a first skirt 316v, and a second skirt 316w.
  • the bracket main body 316u may be roughly in the shape of a hollow cylindrical structure with two ends open.
  • Both the first skirt 316v and the second skirt 316w can be bosses protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the bracket body 316u, and both the first skirt 316v and the second skirt 316w can surround the bracket body 316u for a week.
  • Both the first skirt 316v and the second skirt 316w can be located between two ends of the bracket main body 316u. There is a certain distance between the first skirt 316v and the second skirt 316w.
  • the end of the bracket body 316u near the second skirt 316w may have a gap and generally form a C-shaped structure.
  • This end of the bracket body 316u may also have a front drain hole 316x, and the front drain hole 316x penetrates the wall of the bracket body 316u.
  • the opening of the front drain hole 316x on the outer peripheral surface of the bracket body 316u may be located on a side of the second skirt 316w facing the first skirt 316v, and the opening may be connected with the second skirt 316w.
  • an installation groove 316t can be formed at the end of the bracket body 316u close to the first skirt 316v, and a through hole is provided on the bottom wall of the installation groove 316t, and the through hole communicates with the inner cavity of the bracket body 316u.
  • all of the earplug support 316b can be made of conductive material, or only a part of it can be made of conductive material.
  • the conductive material is, for example, metal.
  • the earbud holder 316b can accommodate the speaker in the electronic assembly 317 (to be described below), so the earbud holder 316b can also be called a sound outlet.
  • the front drain acoustic mesh 316a may generally be in the form of a sheet, which may include several layers of materials, such as acoustic mesh, glue layers, and the like. The figure shows the front drain acoustic mesh 316a after bending. As shown in FIG. 105, the front drain acoustic mesh 316a may include a fixed region 316z and a occluded region 316y.
  • the fixing area 316z may be in the shape of a ring.
  • the shielding area 316y may be in the shape of a rectangular strip, and the shielding area 316y may be connected to the inner side of the fixing area 316z.
  • the occluded area 316y allows air and sound waves to pass through.
  • the front drain acoustic mesh 316a may be mounted to the earbud holder 316b.
  • the fixing area 316z can be installed on the side of the second skirt 316w away from the first skirt 316v, for example, the adhesive layer in the fixing area 316z can be bonded to this side of the second skirt 316w.
  • the shielding area 316y can be bent into the inner cavity of the bracket body 316u and abut against the inner wall of the bracket body 316u.
  • the adhesive layer in the shielding area 316y can be bonded to the inner wall of the bracket body 316u.
  • the shielding area 316y can shield the front drain hole 316x.
  • the earplug bracket 316b can be installed in the installation groove 313f of the earphone front shell 313z.
  • the earplug support 316b can be adhered to the bottom surface of the installation groove 313f through the adhesive layer in the fixing area 316z. The detailed assembly structure will be described further below.
  • the speaker mesh 316 c may be roughly in the shape of a sheet, which may include several layers of materials, such as acoustic mesh, adhesive layer, PET sheet, and the like. A plurality of sound outlets can be provided on the speaker net 316c.
  • the speaker mesh 316c can be installed into the installation groove 316t of the bracket body 316u.
  • the sound in the cavity of the bracket body 316u (from the speaker, which will be described later) will enter the human ear through the speaker mesh 316c.
  • the earplug holder may also have other suitable structures, which are not limited to the above.
  • the front drain hole may not be provided on the earbud holder, but may be provided on the earphone front shell 313z, for example, the front drain hole is opened on the first part 313a of the earphone front shell 313z, and communicates with the sound pickup channel 313e.
  • the diameter of the front drain hole may be small (for example, less than 0.22mm), and in this case, the front drain hole acoustic mesh 316a may be omitted.
  • the earplug 311 may include an earplug inner cover 311a and an earplug outer cover 311b, which may be fixedly connected.
  • the earplug inner cover 311 a can be roughly a hollow structure of revolution with two ends open.
  • One axial end of the earplug inner cover 311a may form several sound output through holes 311d, and these sound output through holes 311d are all communicated with the inner cavity of the earplug inner cover 311a.
  • These sound output through holes 311d are spaced apart from each other and can be arranged according to a certain rule.
  • these sound output through holes 311d may be arranged side by side.
  • the shapes of the sound output holes 311d may be consistent or similar, for example, each sound output hole 311d may be a racetrack-shaped hole.
  • the shape and arrangement of each sound outlet hole 311d can be designed according to product needs.
  • FIG. 110 shows the shape and arrangement of four sound outlet holes 311d.
  • the inner cavity of the earplug inner cover 311a is equipped with a speaker, and the sound outlet hole 311d can allow the sound of the speaker to pass through so as to enter the human ear (continued description below).
  • One end of the earplug inner cover 311a forming the sound outlet hole 311d can be used as an earwax-proof structure, which can reduce or prevent earwax from entering the speaker.
  • the inner wall of the earplug inner cover 311a can also form a card slot 311g, the card slot 311g surrounds a circle, and the card slot 311g can be far away from the sound outlet hole 311d.
  • the slot 311g is used to cooperate with the first skirt 316v of the earplug holder 316b, so that the earplug inner cover 311a is mounted on the earplug holder 316b (the detailed assembly structure will be described below).
  • the surface of the end of the earplug inner cover 311a facing away from the sound outlet hole 311d may be provided with several second bumps 311c, and these second bumps 311c may be spaced apart from each other and circle around.
  • the earplug housing 311b can be roughly a hollow rotating body with two ends open. One axial end of the earplug outer cover 311b can be fixedly connected with one end of the earplug inner cover 311a forming the sound outlet hole 311d.
  • the earplug outer cover 311b may surround the outer periphery of the earplug inner cover 311a.
  • the inner wall of the other axial end of the earplug housing 311b may be provided with several first protrusions 311f. These second bumps 311c may be spaced apart from each other and circle around.
  • the earplug inner cover 311a can be made of relatively hard and non-deformable material, so as to form a reliable connection with the earplug holder 316b, and play a role of accommodating and protecting the earplug holder 316b.
  • the earplug cover 311b can be made of a soft and deformable material so as to fit and adapt to the ear canal.
  • the second electrode 314 may include an electrode body 314a, an inner platform 314b and a conducting portion 314c.
  • the electrode main body 314a may be roughly a ring structure surrounding the center line of the first earphone 31 .
  • the inner platform 314b is located inside the electrode body 314a, and the inner platform 314b can surround the electrode body 314a for a week.
  • the conduction portion 314c may be substantially columnar, and the conduction portion 314c may be located inside the electrode body 314a, and may be protruded on the inner platform 314b.
  • the second electrode 314 can be made of conductive material, such as metal material.
  • the second electrode 314 can be connected to the earphone front shell 313z.
  • the electrode main body 314a of the second electrode 314 cooperates with the third part 313c of the earphone front shell 313z.
  • the conduction portion 314c of the second electrode 314 can be electrically connected to a circuit board (described below) in the second earphone circuit board assembly 317g inside the second electrode 314, so that the second electrode 314 serves as another charging electrode.
  • a circuit board described below
  • the earphone rear case assembly 315 may include an earphone rear case 315a, a first primary microphone mesh 315g, an antenna 315f, a rear case support 315d, and a second primary microphone mesh 315e.
  • the first main microphone net 315g, the antenna 315f, the rear case bracket 315d and the second main microphone net 315e can all be accommodated inside the earphone rear case 315a.
  • the earphone rear case 315a may be roughly bowl-shaped.
  • the earphone rear case 315a may include a bottom wall 315h, and a peripheral sidewall 315i surrounding the periphery of the bottom wall 315h, and the peripheral sidewall 315i and the bottom wall 315h enclose an open cavity.
  • a sound pickup hole 315c may be provided on the bottom wall 315h, and the sound pickup hole 315c communicates with the inner cavity of the earphone rear case 315a.
  • a number of wind noise prevention through holes 315b may be provided on the peripheral side wall 315i, and the wind noise prevention through holes 315b communicate with the inner cavity of the earphone rear case 315a.
  • the wind noise prevention through holes 315b may be substantially symmetrically distributed on both sides of the sound pickup through hole 315c.
  • the number of wind noise prevention through holes 315b may be greater than or equal to 2, such as 3, 4, etc., and these wind noise prevention through holes 315b may be arranged at intervals from each other.
  • the antenna 315f may be a common-mode antenna, which may include two antenna branches that are physically separated but capable of coupling. The two antenna branches are coupled to enable the antenna 315f to work in a set frequency band.
  • the antenna 315f may be, for example, a Bluetooth antenna, and the set frequency band may be, for example, 2.4GHz.
  • the antenna 315f may include a first antenna branch 315z and a second antenna branch 315y. Both the first antenna branch 315z and the second antenna branch 315y can be substantially bent narrow strip structures.
  • the first antenna branch 315z may include a first section 315z3 and a second section 315z4 , and the first section 315z3 and the second section 315z4 are bent and connected, for example, the two may be substantially perpendicular.
  • the end of the first section 315z3 away from the second section 315z4 is called the feed end 315z1
  • the end of the second section 315z4 away from the first section 315z3 is called the end 315z2, that is, the feed end 315z1 and the end 315z2 are the opposite sides of the first antenna branch 315z respectively. ends.
  • the first section 315z3 may be substantially straight, and the second section 315z4 may be curved.
  • the second antenna branch 315y may include a third section 315y3 and a fourth section 315y4 , and the third section 315y3 and the fourth section 315y4 are connected by bending, for example, the two may be substantially perpendicular.
  • the end of the third segment 315y3 away from the fourth segment 315y4 is called the feed end 315y1
  • the end of the fourth segment 315y4 away from the third segment 315y3 is called the end 315y2, that is, the feed end 315y1 and the end 315y2 are the opposite ends of the second antenna branch 315y. ends.
  • the third segment 315y3 may be substantially linear, and the fourth segment 315y4 may be curved. As shown in FIG.
  • the first antenna branch 315z and the second antenna branch 315y can be basically center-symmetrical, that is, the first antenna branch 315z is rotated 180° around a center and basically coincides with the second antenna branch 315y.
  • the first antenna branch 315z bends and extends along a path from outside to inside ( For example, in the viewing angle of FIG.
  • the first antenna branch 315z is bent clockwise; from the feed end 315y1 and the end 315y2 of the second antenna branch 315y, the second antenna branch 315y bends and extends along a path from outside to inside ( For example, in the viewing angle of FIG. 116, the second antenna branch 315y is bent in a clockwise direction).
  • the feeding end 315z1 and the feeding end 315y1 are outside, and the feeding end 315z1 and the feeding end 315y1 are far apart.
  • Both the terminal 315z2 and the terminal 315y2 are located between the feeder 315z1 and the feeder 315y1, the distance between the terminal 315z2 and the terminal 315y2 is close, and the coupling between the terminal 315z2 and the terminal 315y2 makes the antenna 315f work in the 2.4G frequency band.
  • both the feed end 315z1 and the feed end 315y1 are connected to a feed point on the circuit board of the third earphone circuit board assembly 317h in the electronic assembly 317, so that both the first antenna stub 315z and the second antenna stub 315y can Send and receive signals.
  • the two feeding points may be symmetrical about the center line of the first earphone 31 .
  • the antenna 315f in the first embodiment can be arranged on the inner wall of the earphone rear shell 315a, and the feeding end 315z1 and the feeding end 315y1 can be located in the inner wall 315i of the earphone rear shell 315a. Both the end 315z2 and the end 315y2 can be located on the inner surface of the bottom wall 315h of the earphone rear shell 315a.
  • the second segment 315z4 of the first antenna stub 315z may extend approximately along the direction from the peripheral sidewall 315i to the bottom wall 315h.
  • the fourth section 315y4 of the second antenna stub 315y may also extend approximately along the direction from the peripheral side wall 315i to the bottom wall 315h.
  • the antenna 315f may, for example, be formed on the inner wall of the earphone rear case 315a by laser direct structuring (LDS) process, that is, the antenna 315f may be, for example, an LDS antenna.
  • LDS laser direct structuring
  • first antenna branch 315z Different wearing angles of the first earphone 31 in the ear canal will cause the first antenna branch 315z to be closer to the human body, or the second antenna branch 315y to be closer to the human body.
  • the antenna performance of the antenna stub closer to the human body will be reduced (eg, the antenna efficiency is lower), and the signal quality of the antenna will be deteriorated.
  • the first earphone 31 can detect which antenna branch in the antenna 315f has better signal quality, and select the antenna branch with better signal quality (the antenna branch farther away from the human body) As the feeding end, another line stub is used as the grounding end. Schematically, a received signal strength indicator (RSSI) value may be detected to determine the signal quality of the antenna stub.
  • the first earphone 31 can have a built-in controller and a switch circuit. The controller is used to determine the antenna branch with better signal quality, and switch the antenna branch to the feeder through the switch circuit, and switch the antenna branch with poor signal quality. for the ground terminal.
  • the controller may be arranged on a circuit board in the second earphone circuit board assembly 317g (described below).
  • the switching circuit may be arranged, for example, on a circuit board in the third earphone circuit board assembly 317h (to be described later). It can be understood that the positions of the controller and the switch circuit can be designed according to needs, and are not limited to the above description.
  • the second antenna branch 315y is further away from the human body.
  • the first earphone 31 can detect that the signal quality of the second antenna stub 315y is good, and select the second antenna stub 315y as the feeding terminal, and use the first antenna stub 315z as the grounding terminal.
  • the first antenna branch 315z is further away from the human body.
  • the first earphone 31 can detect that the signal quality of the first antenna stub 315z is good, and select the first antenna stub 315z as the feeding end, and use the second antenna stub 315y as the grounding end.
  • the antenna 315f of this embodiment can ensure the antenna performance of the first earphone 31 when the user wears the first earphone 31 at different wearing angles by designing two antenna branches that are symmetrically distributed and coupled to the center, thereby ensuring The communication quality of the first headset 31 ensures user experience.
  • the antenna 315f may include a first antenna branch 315x and a second antenna branch 315w. Both the first antenna branch 315x and the second antenna branch 315w can be substantially bent narrow strip structures.
  • the first antenna branch 315x may include a first section 315x3 and a second section 315x4, and the first section 315x3 and the second section 315x4 are bent and connected, for example, the two may be substantially perpendicular.
  • the end of the first segment 315x3 away from the second segment 315x4 is called the feed end 315x1
  • the end of the second segment 315x4 away from the first segment 315x3 is called the end 315x2, that is, the feed end 315x1 and the end 315x2 are opposite to the first antenna branch 315x respectively. ends.
  • the first section 315x3 may be substantially straight, and the second section 315x4 may be curved.
  • the second antenna branch 315w may include a third section 315w3 and a fourth section 315w4 , and the third section 315w3 and the fourth section 315w4 are connected by bending, for example, the two may be substantially perpendicular.
  • the end of the third segment 315w3 away from the fourth segment 315w4 is called the feeder end 315w1
  • the end of the fourth segment 315w4 away from the third segment 315w3 is called the end 315w2, that is, the feeder end 315w1 and the end 315w2 are opposite to the second antenna branch 315w respectively. ends.
  • the third segment 315w3 may be substantially straight, and the fourth segment 315w4 may be curved.
  • the first antenna stub 315x and the second antenna stub 315w may be substantially center-symmetric.
  • the first The antenna branch 315x bends and extends along the path from inside to outside (for example, in the perspective of FIG. 117, the first antenna branch 315x bends in the counterclockwise direction);
  • the antenna stub 315w bends and extends along a path from the inside to the outside (for example, in the perspective of FIG. 117 , the second antenna stub 315w bends in the counterclockwise direction).
  • the feeding end 315x1 , the end 315x2 , the feeding end 315w1 and the end 315w2 are all outside.
  • the feeder 315x1 is close to the feeder 315w1 and couples to make the antenna 315f work in the 2.4G frequency band.
  • the antenna 315f in Embodiment 2 may be provided on the inner wall of the earphone rear shell 315a.
  • Both the feed end 315x1 and the feed end 315w1 can be located on the inner surface of the peripheral side wall 315i of the earphone rear shell 315a.
  • Both the end 315x2 and the end 315w2 can be located on the inner surface of the bottom wall 315h of the earphone rear shell 315a, and both can be close to the peripheral side wall 315i.
  • the second segment 315x4 of the first antenna branch 315x may extend approximately along the direction from the bottom wall 315h to the peripheral side wall 315i .
  • the fourth section 315w4 of the second antenna stub 315w may also generally extend along the direction from the bottom wall 315h to the peripheral side wall 315i.
  • the second embodiment provides another topology structure of the antenna 315f, which can meet the antenna design requirements of the first earphone 31 .
  • the antenna 315f may include a first antenna branch 315u and a second antenna branch 315v. Both the first antenna branch 315u and the second antenna branch 315v can be substantially bent narrow strip structures.
  • the first antenna branch 315u may include a first segment 315u3 and a second segment 315u4 , and the first segment 315u3 and the second segment 315u4 are bent and connected, for example, the two may be substantially perpendicular.
  • the end of the first section 315u3 away from the second section 315u4 is called the feed end 315u1
  • the end of the second section 315u4 far away from the first section 315u3 is called the end 315u2, that is, the feed end 315u1 and the end 315u2 are opposite to the first antenna branch 315u respectively. ends.
  • the first segment 315u3 may be substantially straight, and the second segment 315u4 may be bent.
  • the second antenna branch 315v may include a third segment 315v3 and a fourth segment 315v4 , and the third segment 315v3 and the fourth segment 315v4 are bent and connected, for example, the two may be substantially perpendicular.
  • the end of the third segment 315v3 away from the fourth segment 315v4 is called the feed end 315v1
  • the end of the fourth segment 315v4 far from the third segment 315v3 is called the end 315v2, that is, the feed end 315v1 and the end 315v2 are the opposite ends of the second antenna branch 315v. ends.
  • the third segment 315v3 may be substantially straight, and the fourth segment 315v4 may be curved.
  • the first The antenna branch 315u bends and extends along the path from outside to inside (for example, in the perspective of FIG. 118, the first antenna branch 315u bends clockwise);
  • the antenna stub 315v bends and extends along a path from inside to outside (for example, in the perspective of FIG. 118 , the second antenna stub 315v bends in a counterclockwise direction).
  • the feed end 315u1 , the feed end 315v1 and the end 315v2 are all on the outside, and the end 315u2 is on the inside.
  • the distance between the end 315u2 and the feed end 315v1 is relatively close to generate coupling, so that the antenna 315f works in the 2.4G frequency band.
  • the antenna 315f in Embodiment 3 may be provided on the inner wall of the earphone rear case 315a. Both the feed end 315u1 and the feed end 315v1 can be located on the inner surface of the peripheral side wall 315i of the earphone rear shell 315a. Both the end 315u2 and the end 315v2 can be located on the inner surface of the bottom wall 315h of the earphone rear shell 315a, and the end 315v2 can also be close to the peripheral side wall 315i.
  • the second section 315u4 of the first antenna branch 315u may extend approximately along the direction from the peripheral side wall 315i to the bottom wall 315h.
  • the fourth segment 315v4 of the second antenna stub 315v may also generally extend along the direction from the bottom wall 315h to the peripheral side wall 315i.
  • the third embodiment provides another topology structure of the antenna 315f, which can meet the antenna design requirements of the first earphone 31 .
  • the above embodiments schematically enumerate three topological structures and three coupling modes of the antenna 315f.
  • the embodiment of the present application is actually not limited thereto, and other topological structures and coupling modes of the antenna 315f can also be designed according to product requirements.
  • the second section may generally extend along the direction from the bottom wall 315h to the peripheral sidewall 315i
  • the fourth section may generally extend along the direction from the peripheral sidewall 315i to the bottom wall 315h.
  • the feed end of the first antenna branch can be coupled with the end of the second antenna branch, so that the antenna 315f works in a set frequency band.
  • the specific structure of the antenna 315f can be designed according to product requirements, and is not limited to the above description.
  • the following content related to the antenna 315f is described by taking the antenna 315f in the first embodiment as an example.
  • the first main microphone network 315g is The first main microphone network 315g.
  • the first main microphone mesh 315g may be roughly in the shape of a disc, which may include several layers of materials, such as acoustic mesh, glue layers, and the like. As shown in FIG. 112 and FIG. 115 , the first main microphone net 315g can be fixedly connected to the bottom wall 315h of the earphone rear shell 315a, for example, the adhesive layer in the first main microphone net 315g can be bonded to the bottom wall 315h. Moreover, the first main microphone net 315g covers the sound pickup hole 315c, and the sound entering the sound pickup hole 315c can pass through the first main microphone net 315g and enter the inner cavity of the earphone rear case 315a.
  • the rear shell support 315d may be generally in the shape of a cover.
  • a through hole 315j may be defined on the rear case bracket 315d.
  • the second main microphone net 315e may be roughly in the shape of a disc, which may include several layers of materials, such as acoustic mesh, foam, glue layers, and the like. As shown in FIG. 112 and FIG. 119 , the second main microphone net 315e can be fixed on one side of the rear case support 315d, for example, the adhesive layer in the second main microphone net 315e can be bonded to the side of the rear case support 315d. Moreover, the second main microphone net 315e covers the through hole 315j, and the sound entering the through hole 315j can pass through the second main microphone net 315e.
  • FIG. 120 is a B-B sectional view of the earphone rear shell assembly 315 in FIG. 113 , and FIG. 120 may represent the assembly structure of the earphone rear shell assembly 315 .
  • the first primary microphone mesh 315g may be fixed to the inner surface of the bottom wall 315h of the earphone rear shell 315a.
  • the first main microphone net 315g covers the sound pickup hole 315c (due to the position of the section plane in FIG. 113 , the sound pickup hole 315c is not shown in FIG. 120 ).
  • the rear shell support 315d is installed in the inner cavity of the earphone rear shell 315a, and there is a certain distance between the rear shell support 315d and the bottom wall 315h and the first main microphone net 315g, so that the rear shell support 315d and the earphone rear shell 315a enclose a windproof noise chamber 315k .
  • the wind-noise-proof through hole 315b communicates with the wind-noise-proof cavity 315k.
  • the second main microphone network 315e is located in the inner cavity of the earphone rear shell 315a, the second main microphone network 315e can be fixed to the side of the rear shell support 315d away from the bottom wall 315h, and the second main microphone network 315e Cover the through hole 315j of the rear case bracket 315d.
  • the structure of the earplug 311, the earplug bracket assembly 316, the first electrode 312, the earphone front shell assembly 313, the second electrode 314 and the earphone rear shell assembly 315 in the first earphone 31 has been described in detail above. Overall assembly structure.
  • FIG. 121 is a schematic cross-sectional structure diagram of the first earphone 31 . Among them, due to the position selection of the cross section, some structures cannot be displayed.
  • FIG. 122 is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of A in FIG. 121 .
  • the first electrode 312 may cooperate with the second portion 313b of the earphone front shell 313z. As shown in FIG. 102 and FIG. 87 , the conductive part 312b of the first electrode 312 can pass through the through hole 313d on the second part 313b, and extend into the inner cavity of the earphone front shell 313z.
  • the earplug holder 316b can cooperate with the first part 313a of the earphone front shell 313z.
  • the second skirt 316w of the earplug holder 316b can be bonded to the installation groove 313f of the first part 313a through the fixing area 316z of the acoustic mesh cloth 316a of the front drain hole.
  • the bracket body 316u of the earplug bracket 316b can extend into the inner cavity of the earphone front shell 313z.
  • the front leak hole 316x on the earplug holder 316b can be close to the sound pickup channel 313e on the earphone front shell 313z, and the shielding area 316y of the front leak hole acoustic mesh 316a is located between the front leak hole 316x and the sound pickup channel. Between 313e.
  • the earplug inner cover 311a can be sleeved on the outer periphery of the earplug holder 316b.
  • the slot 311g of the earplug inner cover 311a can cooperate with the first skirt 316v of the earplug holder 316b, and the end of the earplug inner cover 311a provided with the sound outlet hole 311d can be connected with the earplug holder 316b.
  • the speaker nets 316c on the top have a certain spacing.
  • the second bump 311c on the earplug inner cover 311a can contact the second skirt 316w of the earplug holder 316b, so that there is a gap between the earplug inner cover 311a and the second skirt 316w, preventing the earplug inner cover 311a from pushing the second skirt 316b Front drain hole 316x near 316w is plugged. It can be understood that the second bump 311c can be misaligned with the front drain hole 316x, so as to prevent the second bump 311c from blocking the front drain hole 316x.
  • the earplug outer cover 311b surrounds the outer circumference of the earplug inner cover 311a
  • the lower end of the earplug outer cover 311b can surround the outer circumference of the first part 313a of the earphone front shell 313z
  • the first bump 311f on the inner wall of the earplug outer cover 311b also It may wrap around the outer periphery of the first portion 313a. Designing the first convex point 311f can increase the structural strength of the earplug housing 311b, so that when the first earphone 31 is worn by the user, the shaking or vibration of the earplug housing 311b is reduced, thereby reducing the "stethoscope effect".
  • the second electrode 314 is connected to the third portion 313c of the earphone front shell 313z and the earphone rear shell 315a.
  • the earbud bracket assembly 316 , the earphone front shell assembly 313 , the second electrode 314 and the earphone rear shell assembly 315 can enclose the inner cavity of the first earphone 31 , and the electronic component 317 is accommodated in the inner cavity.
  • the first electrode 312 when the first earphone 31 is placed in place in the third receiving groove 231f, the first electrode 312 can be in contact with the first charging shrapnel 231e in the third receiving groove 231f, and the second electrode 314 can be in contact with the second charging elastic piece 231e.
  • the elastic pieces 231c are in contact, thereby realizing the charging of the first earphone 31 by the host 2 . Since the first electrode 312 and the second electrode 314 are both 360-degree closed ring structures, when the first earphone 31 is placed in the third receiving groove 231f at any angle, the first electrode 312 can always be connected to the first charging port.
  • the elastic piece 231e is in contact, and the second electrode 314 can always be in contact with the second charging elastic piece 231c, both of which can ensure that the host 2 can charge the first earphone 31 .
  • the structure of the first electrode 312 and the second electrode 314 enables the user to put the first earphone 31 into the third receiving groove 231f at will, which can improve user experience.
  • one of the first electrode and the second electrode has a 360-degree closed ring structure, and the other is not a 360-degree closed ring structure, but forms an open ring structure, which can also be used at a certain angle Within the range, ensure that the first earphone can be placed at will on the premise that it can be charged.
  • the first electrode 411 still has a 360-degree closed ring structure, but there are two or more second electrodes 412, and the second electrodes 412 are spaced apart from each other.
  • the two electrodes 412 may be distributed on the same circumference.
  • Each second electrode 412 can be an open ring structure.
  • the number of the second electrode 412 is single, and the second electrode 412 is an open ring structure with a gap, for example, the angle it surrounds can be 120 degrees, 180 degrees, 270 degrees (but less than 360 degrees). degree), etc.
  • neither the first electrode nor the second electrode is 360-degree closed, and both are a single open ring structure with a gap.
  • one of the first electrode and the second electrode is a single open ring structure with a gap, and the other is at least two in number and spaced apart from each other and distributed on the same circumference.
  • there are at least two first electrodes and the second electrodes are arranged at intervals and distributed on the same circumference. The above design can also ensure that the first earphone can be placed freely within a certain angle range under the premise that it can be charged.
  • the electrical connection between the first electrode 312 and the first charging elastic piece 231e, or the electrical connection between the second electrode 314 and the second charging elastic piece 231c can also be used to realize the communication between the first earphone 31 and the host 2 . That is, the first electrode 312 or the second electrode 314 can also be multiplexed as a communication electrode of the first earphone 31 , so as to realize the communication between the first earphone 31 and the host 2 .
  • the first earphone 51 may have a first electrode 512 and a second electrode 512, and the first electrode 512 and the second electrode 512 are dedicated to realize host pairing. Charging of the first earphone 51 .
  • the first earphone 51 also has a communication electrode 513 dedicated to communication with the host. It can be understood that the first electrode 512, the second electrode 512 and the communication electrode 513 shown in FIG. 124 are all 360-degree closed ring structures, which is just an example. In fact, the structure, quantity and distribution of the first electrodes 512, the second electrodes 512 and the communication electrodes 513 can be designed according to product requirements.
  • 125 and 126 show a schematic structure of the electronic module 317 of this embodiment. It can be understood that the structure of the electronic component 317 to be described below is only an example, and is not intended to limit the embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic assembly 317 may include a first earphone circuit board assembly 317e, a second earphone circuit board assembly 317g, a third earphone circuit board assembly 317h, a flexible circuit board 317j, a loudspeaker 317a, and a wearing detection plate 317b, secondary microphone 317k, earphone battery 317f and primary microphone 317i.
  • first earphone circuit board assembly 317e, the second earphone circuit board assembly 317g and the third earphone circuit board assembly 317h are sequentially stacked and arranged at intervals, and the three can be electrically connected through the flexible circuit board 317j.
  • the first earphone circuit board assembly 317e, the second earphone circuit board assembly 317g and the third earphone circuit board assembly 317h may each include a circuit board and circuits and components arranged on the circuit board.
  • a wearing detection sensor may be arranged on the circuit board of the first earphone circuit board assembly 317e, and the wearing detection sensor is used to realize the wearing detection of the first earphone 31.
  • the wearing detection sensor may include, for example, a gravity sensor (gravity sensor, G-sensor), an inertial measurement unit (inertial measurement unit, IMU) sensor, a bone conduction sensor, an infrared (infrared radiation, IR) sensor, a voice acceleration sensor (voice accelerometer, VACC ), at least one of the pickup unit (voice pick-up unit, VPU) and the like.
  • a magnetic field sensor can also be arranged on the circuit board of the first earphone circuit board assembly 317e, and the magnetic field sensor is used to detect the variation of the magnetic flux of the main body magnet, so as to realize the box entry and exit detection of the first earphone 31 (the following will continue to explain the box entry and exit detection) principle).
  • the magnetic field sensor is, for example, a Hall sensor or a magnetometer.
  • a charging circuit and a discharging circuit may be arranged on the circuit board of the second earphone circuit board assembly 317g.
  • a radio frequency circuit may be arranged on the circuit board of the third earphone circuit board assembly 317h.
  • the speaker 317a may be electrically connected to the circuit board of the first earphone circuit board assembly 317e.
  • the speaker 317a may be located on a side of the first earphone circuit board assembly 317e away from the second earphone circuit board assembly 317g.
  • the wearing detection pole plate 317b may include a connected pole plate 317c and a connecting pin 317d, and the connecting pin 317d is drawn out from the pole plate 317c, and can be connected with the circuit board of the first earphone circuit board assembly 317e electrical connection (eg soldering).
  • the pole plate 317c may be located on the same side of the first earphone circuit board assembly 317e as the speaker 317a.
  • the wearing detection electrode plate 317b can conduct electricity, for example, it can be made of metal material. When wearing the detection pole plate 317b close to the human body, coupling capacitance can be generated.
  • the coupling capacitance value When the distance between the wearing detection pole plate 317b and the human body changes, the coupling capacitance value will change. By detecting and processing the coupling capacitance value of the wearing detection pole plate 317b, it can realize Wearing detection of the first earphone 31 .
  • the secondary microphone 317k is located on the side of the first earphone circuit board assembly 317e away from the speaker 317a, and can be electrically connected to the circuit board of the first earphone circuit board assembly 317e.
  • the sub microphone 317k may be disposed on the circuit board of the first earphone circuit board assembly 317e.
  • a through hole can be opened on the circuit board of the first earphone circuit board assembly 317e corresponding to the secondary microphone 317k, and sound can be picked up by the secondary microphone 317k through the through hole.
  • the secondary microphone 317k is used for noise reduction and can also be used for wearing detection.
  • the earphone battery 317f may be located between the first earphone circuit board assembly 317e and the second earphone circuit board assembly 317g.
  • the electrode pins of the earphone battery 317f can be electrically connected with the circuit board in the first earphone circuit board assembly 317e.
  • the main microphone 317i can be located between the second earphone circuit board assembly 317g and the third earphone circuit board assembly 317h, and can be electrically connected to the circuit board of the third earphone circuit board assembly 317h.
  • the main microphone 317i may be arranged on the circuit board of the third earphone circuit board assembly 317h.
  • a through hole can be opened on the circuit board of the third earphone circuit board assembly 317h corresponding to the position of the main microphone 317i, and the human voice can be picked up by the main microphone 317i through the through hole.
  • FIG. 127 shows the assembly structure of the electronic component 317 and other components of the first earphone 31 .
  • FIG. 128 is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of A in FIG. 127
  • FIG. 129 is a partially enlarged schematic diagram of B in FIG. 127 .
  • the electronic component 317 can be housed in an inner cavity surrounded by the earplug holder component 316 , the earphone front shell component 313 , the second electrode 314 and the earphone rear shell component 315 .
  • the speaker 317a may be located within the inner cavity of the earbud holder 316b.
  • the sound waves emitted by the speaker 317a can pass through the speaker net 316c and the sound output hole 311d, and enter the ear canal. Due to the existence of the front leak hole 316x, the air pressure in the inner cavity of the earplug holder 316b is balanced with the outside air pressure, ensuring that the speaker 317a can work normally.
  • the opening of the front leak hole 316x can also improve the noise reduction depth of the auxiliary microphone 317k.
  • the pole plate 317c of the wearing detection pole plate 317b can be fixedly connected (for example, welded) with the end of the earplug support 316b away from the speaker net 316c, and the wearing detection pole plate 317b and the earplug support 316b can be connected into one Conductors with larger areas. Therefore, both the wearing detection electrode plate 317b and the earplug holder 316b can generate coupling capacitance, so that both can be used for wearing detection. That is to say, in addition to supporting and accommodating the earplug bracket 316b, it can also be reused as a detection electrode plate for wearing detection.
  • the assembly structure of the wearing detection electrode plate and the earplug holder can also be in other forms, which are not limited to the above.
  • the wearing detection pole plate can be fixedly connected with this part of the earbud holder, and the assembly structure of the wearing detection pole plate and the earbud holder can be determined according to the respective structures of the two and the inside of the first earphone. space to design.
  • the wearing detection electrode plate 317b and the earplug holder 316b together as the detection electrode plate for wearing detection the area of the detection electrode plate can be increased, which is beneficial to ensure the consistency and reliability of wearing detection. Since the earplug holder 316b is closer to the inside of the ear canal than the wearing detection electrode plate 317b, the capacitance detection data of the earplug holder 316b is more accurate and reliable, which is conducive to improving the reliability of the wearing detection as a whole. At the same time, reusing the earbud bracket 316b as a detection plate for wearing detection will not affect the overall size of the first earphone 31 , and can also save the stacking space inside the first earphone 31 .
  • the wall thickness and the overall structural size of the earplug holder 316b can be smaller under the premise of ensuring that the structural strength of the earplug holder 316b meets the requirements, which can make the earplug outer cover 311b has sufficient space for compression and deformation, which is conducive to ensuring the wearing comfort of the user.
  • the wearing detection sensor, the wearing detection electrode plate 317b and the earplug holder 316b can be used to realize the wearing detection at the same time.
  • This design can greatly increase the consistency and reliability of the wearing detection and reduce false detections. The probability.
  • any one or any two of the wearing detection sensor, the wearing detection pole plate 317b, and the earplug holder 316b may be used to realize the wearing detection.
  • the first earphone circuit board assembly 317e may be located in the earphone front housing 313z.
  • the conductive portion 312b of the first electrode 312 can pass through the through hole 313d of the earphone front shell 313z, and be electrically connected to the circuit board of the first earphone circuit board assembly 317e (such as welding), so that the first electrode 312 serves as a charging electrode.
  • one side of the circuit board of the first earphone circuit board assembly 317e can be attached to the noise reduction microphone net 313j.
  • the secondary microphone 317k is located on the other side of the circuit board, and the secondary microphone 317k may correspond to the noise reduction microphone network 313j.
  • the noise in the ear canal can pass through the speaker mesh 316c, sound pickup channel 313e, noise-canceling microphone mesh 313j, and the through hole corresponding to the secondary microphone 317k on the circuit board of the first earphone circuit board assembly 317e, and is picked up by the secondary microphone 317k.
  • the loudspeaker 317a can generate an anti-phase signal that is opposite in phase to the noise signal, and the anti-phase signal can cancel the noise signal.
  • the first earphone 31 can realize active noise reduction.
  • the sound of the speaker 317a and the noise in the ear canal will pass through the acoustic mesh cloth 316a of the front leak hole and leak to the outside from the front leak hole 316x.
  • This can balance the pressure inside and outside the ear canal, thereby improving the user's wearing comfort.
  • the front drain hole acoustic mesh 316a that blocks the front drain hole 316x can also be removed.
  • the front drain hole 316x can be made smaller, for example, the diameter of the front drain hole 316x is less than 0.22mm.
  • the secondary microphone 317k can also be used for wearing detection, the principle is that the speaker 317a can emit a sound wave signal of a specific frequency. If the first earphone 31 is not worn by the user, a large amount of the sound wave signal may leak to the outside through the front leak hole 316x, and the signal strength of the sound wave signal picked up by the secondary microphone 317k is relatively small. If the first earphone 31 is worn by the user, since the front leak hole 316x is blocked to a certain extent or completely, the secondary microphone 317k can pick up more of the sound wave signal, so that the signal of the sound wave signal picked up by the secondary microphone 317k Stronger. Therefore, by detecting the signal strength of the signal picked up by the secondary microphone 317k, it can be determined whether the first earphone 31 is worn by the user.
  • the second earphone circuit board assembly 317g may be located inside the second electrode 314 .
  • the conduction portion 314c of the second electrode 314 can be electrically connected (for example, welded) to the circuit board of the second earphone circuit board assembly 317g, so that the second electrode 314 serves as a charging electrode.
  • the third earphone circuit board assembly 317h can be carried on the rear case support 315d. As shown in FIG. 129 and FIG. 120 , the side of the third earphone circuit board assembly 317h away from the main microphone 317i can be attached to the second main microphone net 315e. Primary microphone 317i may correspond to second primary microphone mesh 315e. The sound from the user can sequentially pass through the sound pickup hole 315c, the first main microphone net 315g, the through hole 315j on the rear shell support 315d, the second main microphone net 315e, and the corresponding on the circuit board of the third earphone circuit board assembly 317h. The through-hole of the main microphone 317i is picked up by the main microphone 317i.
  • the feed end 315z1 and the feed end 315y1 of the antenna 315f are both connected to a feed point on the circuit board in the third earphone circuit board assembly 317h, for example by soldering.
  • the two feeding points may be symmetrical about the center line of the first earphone 31 .
  • the antenna 315f can realize signal radiation and reception.
  • the wearable device 1 since the wearable device 1 includes the above-mentioned host 2 and earphones, the wearable device 1 can have the following characteristics and functions. Among them, for some characteristics or functions related to the host computer 2 and the earphone at the same time, since the first earphone (such as the first earphone 31, the first earphone 41, and the first earphone 51) is completely consistent with the second earphone, for the sake of brevity, we mainly use The first earphone 31 will be described as an example.
  • the first earphone 31 is adsorbed to the first part 21 of the host 2
  • the first earphone 31 when the main unit 2 is in the closed state, the first earphone 31 is stored in the first receiving groove 213y of the first part 21 and the third receiving groove 231f of the second part 23 to form a circle. within the space.
  • Figure 130 shows the first main body adsorption magnet 213r2 in the first part 21, the second main body adsorption magnet 231v in the second part 23, and the earphone magnet 313g in the first earphone 31 when the main body 2 is in the closed state from a side view angle. location relationship.
  • the first host magnet 213r2 and the second host magnet 231v are both magnetically attracted to the earphone magnet 313g.
  • the magnetic field of the first host magnet 213r2 is strong, and the magnetic attraction force between the first host magnet 213r2 and the earphone magnet 313g is relatively large; the magnetic field of the second host magnet 231v is relatively weak, and the second host magnet 231v The magnetic attraction force between 231v and the earphone magnet 313g is relatively small.
  • the first earphone 31 will be attracted to the The first part 21 rotates with the first part 21 relative to the second part 23 .
  • each first host magnet 213r2 is a Halbach array spliced by two single magnets, and the magnetic field directions of the two single magnets (using The arrows from N pointing to S) are different, so that each first host magnet 213r2 has two magnetic field directions.
  • the magnetic field direction of one of the single magnets is roughly directed from the radially outer side of the first earphone 31 to the radially inner side (for example, the upper part in FIG. 131 single magnet), and the direction of the magnetic field of another single magnet is roughly directed from the radially inner side of the first earphone 31 to the radially outer side (such as the single magnet in the lower part of FIG. 131 ).
  • each earphone magnet 313g can be a Halbach array formed by a single magnet, and different parts of each earphone magnet 313g can have different magnetic field directions.
  • the magnetic field direction of a part Q1 of each earphone magnet 313g is roughly directed from the radially outer side of the first earphone 31 to the radially inner side
  • the magnetic field direction of the other part Q2 is roughly directed from the first earphone 31 to the radially inner side.
  • the radially inner side of the earphone 31 is directed radially outward.
  • the design that each earphone magnet 313g is a single magnet can reduce the difficulty of assembling the earphone magnet 313g.
  • each earphone magnet 313g may also be spliced by several (for example, two) single magnets.
  • the design of the first host magnet 213r2 and the earphone magnet 313g enables the first host magnet 213r2 and the earphone magnet 313g to be magnetically attracted. And after product verification, this design makes the magnetic attraction force between the first host magnet 213r2 and the earphone magnet 313g larger.
  • each first host magnet 213r2 is a Halbach array with four magnetic field directions.
  • Each first host magnet 213r2 can be spliced by four single magnets, or a single magnet with four magnetic field directions.
  • the magnet design in Embodiment 2 can meet the design requirement that the first earphone 31 is magnetically attracted to the first part 21 .
  • each first host magnet 213r2 is a single magnet with a single magnetic field direction.
  • the direction of the magnetic field of each first main body attracting magnet 213r2 can roughly point from the radial inner side of the first earphone 31 to the radial outer side.
  • Each earphone magnet 313g is a single magnet with a single magnetic field direction.
  • the magnetic field direction of each earphone magnet 313g can roughly point from the radial inner side of the first earphone 31 to the radial outer side.
  • the magnet design of the third embodiment can meet the design requirement that the first earphone 31 is magnetically attracted to the first part 21 .
  • each first host magnet 213r2 is a Halbach array with three magnetic field directions.
  • Each first host magnet 213r2 can be spliced by three single magnets, or a single magnet with three magnetic field directions.
  • Each earphone magnet 313g may have a single magnetic field direction.
  • the first electrode 312 and the second electrode 314 can be made of materials that can be magnetically attracted by the first host magnet 213r2, such as magnetically permeable materials (such as common cold-rolled steel plates (steel plate cold common, SPCC), SUS430, etc.) . Both the first electrode 312 and the second electrode 314 can be magnetically attracted to the first host magnet 213r2.
  • the magnet design of Embodiment 4 not only meets the design requirement that the first earphone 31 is magnetically attracted to the first part 21, but also has a simple design structure, is easy to manufacture, and is low in cost.
  • the first earphone 31 may not need a built-in earphone magnet.
  • the first electrode 312 and the second electrode 314 can be made of materials that can be magnetically attracted by the first host magnet 213r2, such as magnetically permeable materials (such as SPCC, SUS430, etc.). As shown in FIG. 135 , both the first electrode 312 and the second electrode 314 can be magnetically attracted to the first host magnet 213r2.
  • the first host magnet 213r2 can be flexibly designed according to needs, and can have a single magnetic field direction or several magnetic field directions.
  • the magnet design of Embodiment 5 not only meets the design requirement that the first earphone 31 is magnetically attracted to the first part 21 , but also has a simple design structure, is easy to manufacture, and is low in cost.
  • the radial dimension of the first earphone 31 can be at least twice the depth of the first receiving groove 213y, most of the first earphone 31 will be exposed in the first receiving groove. 213y outside. This design is convenient for the user to take the first earphone 31 directly from the first part 21 after the host 2 is turned on.
  • the magnetic field strength of the first main body attracting magnet 213r2 can also be smaller than the magnetic field strength of the second main machine attracting magnet 231v, so that the first earphone 31 is not blocked after the main machine 2 is turned on.
  • the first part 21 is sucked up, but is still accommodated in the second part 23 .
  • the first receiving slot is not provided on the first part of the host, and the first earphone can be adsorbed to the first part after the host is opened.
  • the first earphone 31 When the first earphone 31 is placed on the first part 21, the first earphone 31 can automatically return to its position
  • Matching attitude meaning that the earplug 311 of the first earphone 31 is generally facing the first receiving groove 213y for accommodating one end of the earplug 311, and the earphone rear shell assembly 315 of the first earphone 31 is generally facing the first receiving groove 213y for accommodating the earphone rear shell
  • the first earphone 31 can be rotated at any angle around its center line), and then the first earphone 31 is close to the first receiving groove 213y.
  • the first earphone 31 Under the action of the magnetic attraction force of the first host magnet 213r2 in the first part 21 on the earphone magnet 313g in the first earphone 31, the first earphone 31 will be corrected to the posture matching the first receiving groove 213y, and will be automatically attracted In the first receiving groove 213y, the first earphone 31 can be placed into the first receiving groove 213y accurately and in place.
  • the automatic homing design of this embodiment enables the user to conveniently put the first earphone 31 into the host 2, and the placement can be completed without precise alignment, thereby improving user experience.
  • the first earphone 31 If the user puts the first earphone 31 into the third receiving groove 231f of the second part 23, under the magnetic attraction force of the second host magnet 231v in the second part 23 to the earphone magnet 313g in the first earphone 31, The first earphone 31 will be absorbed in the third receiving groove 231f. Even if the main unit 2 is turned over, the first earphone 31 will not be disengaged from the third receiving slot 231f.
  • both the second charging elastic piece 231c and the first charging elastic piece 231e in the third receiving groove 231f can exert a certain pressing force on the first earphone 31, and the pressing force can increase the tension between the first earphone 31 and the second part 23.
  • the frictional force of the second main body casing 231 makes it harder for the first earphone 31 to disengage from the third receiving groove 231f.
  • the first earphone 31 can be put into the receiving slot at a relatively random angle
  • the first earphone 31 can overlap with itself every time it rotates around its center line by a certain angle, so the rotated first earphone 31 can always be accurately accommodated in the first receiving groove 213y or the third receiving groove 231f, and fit with the inner wall of the first receiving groove 213y or the third receiving groove 231f. This enables the user to put the first earphone 31 into the first receiving groove 213y or the third receiving groove 231f without holding the first earphone 31 at a fixed angle.
  • the first earphone 31 can coincide with itself every time the first earphone 31 rotates 90° around its center line, even if the user rotates the first earphone 31 by 90°, 180° or 270°, etc.
  • the first earphone 31 can still be adapted to the inner wall of the first receiving groove 213y or the third receiving groove 231f, so the first earphone 31 can be smoothly and accurately put into the first receiving groove 213y or the third receiving groove 231f.
  • the magnetic force of the first host magnet 213r2 can also correct the angle of the first earphone 31 to a normal angle, so that the first earphone 31 can be smoothly and accurately put into the first housing groove 213y, and fit with the inner wall of the first receiving groove 213y.
  • the first earphone 31 can coincide with itself after being rotated at any angle around its center line. Therefore, even if the user rotates the first earphone 31 at any angle, the first earphone 31 can still be adapted to the inner wall of the first or third accommodating groove, so the first earphone 31 can be smoothly and accurately put into the first or third accommodating groove.
  • the third holding tank for the first earphone 31 that is roughly in the shape of a cylinder, the first earphone 31 can coincide with itself after being rotated at any angle around its center line. Therefore, even if the user rotates the first earphone 31 at any angle, the first earphone 31 can still be adapted to the inner wall of the first or third accommodating groove, so the first earphone 31 can be smoothly and accurately put into the first or third accommodating groove.
  • the third holding tank for the first earphone 31 that is roughly in the shape of a cylinder, the first earphone 31 can coincide with itself after being rotated at any angle around its center line. Therefore, even if the user rotates the first
  • the first part 21 of the host 2 has a magnetic field sensor 212g (may be referred to as a first magnetic field sensor), and the magnetic field sensor 212g may be arranged on a circuit board 212a in the first part 21, for example.
  • the magnetic field sensor 212g is used to detect the magnetic flux of the state detection magnet 231x in the second part 23 of the main body 2 .
  • the magnetic flux of the state detection magnet 231x detected by the magnetic field sensor 212g may be proportional to the distance between the magnetic field sensor 212g and the state detection magnet 231x.
  • the magnetic field sensor 212g may be, for example, a Hall sensor or a magnetometer.
  • the Hall sensor can detect the change of the magnetic flux.
  • the Hall sensor detects that the magnetic flux exceeds the hardware threshold value of the Hall sensor, the Hall sensor can generate a corresponding signal and report it to the processor of the host 2 .
  • the processor of the host 2 can perform corresponding processing according to the signal of the Hall sensor.
  • the magnetometer can detect the magnitude of the magnetic flux and report it to the processor of the host 2 .
  • the processor of the host computer 2 can judge whether the magnetic flux detected by the magnetometer exceeds the software threshold value built in the processor, and perform corresponding processing according to the judgment result.
  • the following description will be made by taking the magnetic field sensor 212g as a Hall sensor as an example.
  • the host 2 when the user presses the keycap 251, the host 2 will gradually open from the closed state, the distance between the magnetic field sensor 212g and the state detection magnet 231x will gradually increase, and the magnetic flux of the state detection magnet 231x detected by the magnetic field sensor 212g will tends to decrease.
  • a first signal may be generated.
  • the processor of the host 2 determines that the host 2 is in an open state according to the first signal.
  • the distance between the magnetic field sensor 212g and the state detection magnet 231x gradually decreases, and the magnetic flux of the state detection magnet 231x detected by the magnetic field sensor 212g tends to increase.
  • a second signal may be generated. The processor of the host 2 determines that the host 2 is in the closed state according to the second signal.
  • the processor of the host 2 when the processor of the host 2 confirms that the host 2 is turned on, the processor will control the display screen 211 to display a corresponding interface.
  • the communication electrode of the host 2 A signal may be sent to the communication electrodes of the first earphone 31 to wake up the first earphone 31 .
  • the host 2 can start the foreign object detection, and after confirming that no foreign matter enters, start charging the first earphone 31.
  • the positions of the magnetic field sensor 212g and the state detection magnet 231x can be interchanged, that is, the magnetic field sensor 212g can be in the second part 23 , and the state detection magnet 231x can be in the first part 21 .
  • the box-in and out state of the first earphone 31 refers to the relative positional relationship between the first earphone 31 and the first receiving groove 213y, and the relative positional relationship between the first earphone 31 and the third receiving groove 231f, including: the first earphone 31 is in the first housing The first earphone 31 is inside the first receiving groove 213y and outside the third receiving groove 231f (the host 2 is open and the first earphone 31 is inside the host 2). The first earphone 31 is attached to the first part 21), the first earphone 31 is in the third receiving groove 231f and outside the first receiving groove 213y (the host 2 is opened and the first earphone 31 is attached to the second part 23), etc. state.
  • both the host 2 and the first earphone 31 can detect whether the first earphone 31 is in or out of the box. The description will be given below in order.
  • the host 2 detects the status of the first earphone 31 in and out of the box
  • the second part 23 of the host 2 has a magnetic field sensor 237 and a magnetic field sensor 238 (both can be referred to as the second magnetic field sensor, as shown in the dotted line box), and the magnetic field sensor 237 can be close to the third accommodation slot On the outer surface of the groove wall of 231f, the magnetic field sensor 238 may be close to the outer surface of the groove wall of the fourth receiving groove 231g.
  • Both the magnetic field sensor 237 and the magnetic field sensor 238 can be, for example, a single-axis Hall sensor or a magnetometer, and the following description will be made by taking the magnetic field sensor 237 and the magnetic field sensor 238 as both Hall sensors as an example.
  • the magnetic field sensor 237 is used to detect the change of the magnetic flux of the earphone magnet 313g in the first earphone 31 .
  • the magnetic flux of the earphone magnet 313g detected by the magnetic field sensor 237 may be proportional to the distance between the magnetic field sensor 237 and the earphone magnet 313g.
  • a third signal may be generated.
  • the processor of the host 2 determines according to the third signal that the first earphone 31 is located in the third receiving slot 231f.
  • the processor of the host 2 can combine the third signal sent by the magnetic field sensor 237 and the first signal or the second signal sent by the magnetic field sensor 212g to determine the status of the first earphone 31 in and out of the box. For example, when the processor receives the third signal and the first signal, the processor determines that the host 2 is turned on and the first earphone 31 is attached to the second part 23 . When the processor receives the third signal and the second signal, the processor determines that the host 2 is closed and the first earphone 31 is inside the host 2 .
  • a fourth signal may be generated.
  • the processor of the host 2 determines according to the fourth signal that the first earphone 31 leaves the third receiving groove 231f and is attached to the first part 21 (as shown in FIG. 141 ).
  • the magnetic field sensor 238 is used to detect the change of the magnetic flux of the earphone magnet in the second earphone 32 .
  • the host 2 can determine the status of the second earphone 32 in and out of the box through the signal sent by the magnetic field sensor 238 , or by combining the signals sent by the magnetic field sensor 238 and the magnetic field sensor 212g.
  • the magnetic field sensor 237 located in the second part 23 is used to determine whether the first earphone 31 is inside the third receiving slot 231f or outside the third receiving slot 231f.
  • the magnetic field sensor 238 located in the second part 23 is used to detect whether the second earphone 32 is inside the fourth receiving slot 231g or outside the fourth receiving slot 231g.
  • At least one of the magnetic field sensor 237 and the magnetic field sensor 238 may also be located in the first part 21 of the host 2 .
  • the magnetic field sensor 237 may be located in the first portion 21 (eg, close to the outer surface of the groove wall of the first receiving groove 213y).
  • the change of the magnetic flux of the earphone magnet 313g in the first earphone 31 can be detected by the magnetic field sensor 237 to determine whether the first earphone 31 is in the first receiving groove 213y or outside the first receiving groove 213y.
  • the specific principles are the same as those described above and will not be repeated here.
  • the communication electrode of the host 2 can send a signal to the communication electrode of the first earphone 31 to wake up the first earphone 31 .
  • the host 2 can also charge the first earphone 31 through the first charging elastic piece 231e and the second charging elastic piece 231c.
  • the host 2 can also activate a charging overheating protection mechanism (described below). According to product requirements, it is not necessary to charge the first earphone 31 and the charging overheating protection mechanism may not be activated.
  • the host 2 when the host 2 confirms that the first earphone 31 is in the host 2 and the host 2 is in a closed state, the host 2 can start the foreign object detection mechanism (described below), and can also charge the first earphone 31 and start charging. Overheat protection mechanism. According to product requirements, it is not necessary to charge the first earphone 31 and the charging overheating protection mechanism may not be activated.
  • the first earphone 31 when the host 2 confirms that the first earphone 31 is in the first receiving slot 213y and the host 2 is turned on, the first earphone 31 will wake up (the principle will be described below).
  • the first earphone 31 detects the status of the first earphone 31 in and out of the box
  • the first earphone 31 may have a magnetic field sensor 317z (which may be referred to as a third magnetic field sensor, as indicated by a dashed box), and the magnetic field sensor 317z may be arranged on a circuit board of the third earphone circuit board assembly 317h, for example.
  • the magnetic field sensor 317z may be, for example, a Hall sensor or a magnetometer, and the following description will be made by taking the magnetic field sensor 317z as a Hall sensor as an example.
  • the magnetic field sensor 317z is used to detect a change in the magnetic flux of the state detection magnet 231x in the second portion 23 of the host 2 .
  • the magnetic flux of the state detection magnet 231x detected by the magnetic field sensor 317z may be proportional to the distance between the magnetic field sensor 317z and the state detection magnet 231x.
  • the magnetic field sensor 317z When the first earphone 31 is located in the third receiving groove 231f (maybe the host 2 is closed and the first earphone 31 is in the host 2, or the host 2 is opened and the first earphone 31 is attached to the second part 23), the magnetic field sensor 317z The detected magnetic flux is relatively large; when the first earphone 31 leaves the third receiving slot 231f and is attracted to the first part 21 , the magnetic flux detected by the magnetic field sensor 317z is relatively small.
  • a sixth signal may be generated.
  • the controller of the first earphone 31 determines according to the sixth signal that the first earphone 31 is located in the third receiving slot 231f.
  • the controller (which may be a central processing unit or a microcontroller (microcontroller unit, MCU)) of the first earphone 31 may synthesize the sixth signal sent by the magnetic field sensor 317z, and the first signal sent by the magnetic field sensor 212g or
  • the second signal (the first signal and the second signal can be transmitted through the communication electrode of the host 2 and the communication electrode of the first earphone 31 ) determines the status of the first earphone 31 in and out of the box. For example, when the controller receives the sixth signal and the first signal, the controller determines that the host 2 is turned on and the first earphone 31 is attached to the second part 23 . When the controller receives the sixth signal and the second signal, the controller determines that the host 2 is closed and the first earphone 31 is inside the host 2 .
  • a seventh signal may be generated.
  • the controller of the first earphone 31 determines according to the seventh signal that the first earphone 31 leaves the third receiving groove 231f and is adsorbed to the first part 21 .
  • the second earphone 32 can also have a magnetic field sensor 327z (indicated by a dotted box), and the magnetic field sensor 327z is used to detect the change of the magnetic flux of the state detection magnet 231w in the second part 23 .
  • the magnetic field sensor 327z can be, for example, a single-axis Hall sensor.
  • the second earphone 32 can determine the status of the second earphone 32 in and out of the box through the signal sent by the magnetic field sensor 327z, or by combining the signals sent by the magnetic field sensor 327z and the magnetic field sensor 212g.
  • the first earphone 31 detects its own state of entering and leaving the box, which is used to make the first earphone 31 perform corresponding operations:
  • the first earphone 31 may be in a dormant state.
  • the first earphone 31 can be woken up by the host 2 .
  • the communication electrodes of the host 2 can send a signal to the communication electrodes of the first earphone 31 to wake up the first earphone 31 .
  • the detection signal of the magnetic field sensor 317z will trigger the controller of the first earphone 31 to wake up the first earphone 31 .
  • both the host 2 and the first earphone 31 can detect the state of the first earphone 31 in and out of the box, which can avoid the risk that may be caused by only relying on the host 2 or the first earphone 31 for detection (for example, if only relying on the host 2 Carry out detection, if host computer 2 power is exhausted, then can't accurately detect the state of entering and exiting the box of the first earphone 31), guarantee the reliability of the detection of the state of entering and exiting the first earphone 31.
  • a foreign object detection shrapnel 231 d is further provided in the third receiving groove 231 f for realizing foreign object detection.
  • the detection principle can be as follows:
  • the waveform of the charging signal of the host 2 will change.
  • the first charging shrapnel 231e and the second charging shrapnel 231c are all three.
  • the waveform of the charging signal of the charging circuit of the host 2 will change, and the charging signal with such a waveform change can be called an abnormal charging signal. If only at least one of the first charging shrapnel 231e and the second charging shrapnel 231c is in contact with a foreign object, the waveform of the charging signal of the host 2 will not change, and such a charging signal with a constant waveform can be called a normal charging signal.
  • the waveform of the charging signal of the host 2 will not change, that is, the charging circuit is normal. Charging signal.
  • the processor of the host 2 can confirm whether there is foreign matter entering the third receiving groove 231f according to the type of the charging signal. For example, when judging that the charging signal is an abnormal charging signal, the processor determines that there is foreign matter entering the third receiving groove 231f; otherwise, when judging that the charging signal is a normal charging signal, the processor determines that there is no foreign matter entering the third receiving groove 231f.
  • the processor of the host 2 can control the charging circuit in the host 2 to turn off. Therefore, when the first earphone 31 is accommodated in the third receiving groove 231f, there is no charging current between the first charging elastic piece 231e and the first electrode of the first earphone 31, and there is no charging current between the second charging elastic piece 231c and the second electrode of the first earphone 31. There is no charging current between the electrodes, which prevents charging abnormalities (such as short circuits).
  • the processor of the host 2 can also control the alarm module in the host 2 to issue an alarm, so as to warn the user.
  • the alarm module can be, for example, a speaker, a buzzer, a motor, etc. in the host computer 2 . It can be understood that according to product requirements, the alarm mechanism is not necessary.
  • the processor of the host 2 can control the charging circuit in the host 2 to turn on.
  • the host 2 will normally charge the first earphone 31 .
  • the host may not have the foreign object detection mechanism.
  • the host 2 charges the first earphone 31
  • the first charging shrapnel 231e can In contact with the first electrode 312 , the second charging shrapnel 231 c can both contact the second electrode 314 , so as to ensure that the host 2 charges the first earphone 31 normally.
  • This design can simplify user operations and improve user experience.
  • the host 2 charges the first earphone 31 , heat will be generated, which may cause the temperature rise of the host 2 or the first earphone 31 to be too high.
  • the charging current of the host 2 is too large due to improper use by the user or short circuit of the internal circuit, which easily leads to excessive temperature rise. Excessive temperature will affect the safety, life and reliability of the product, and may also reduce the user experience.
  • the host computer 2 may have a temperature detection module, and the temperature detection module may be disposed near the first receiving groove 213y and/or the third receiving groove 231f, for example.
  • the temperature detection module may be, for example, a thermistor.
  • the temperature detection module is used to detect the temperature at the place where it is installed, and report it to the processor of the host computer 2 .
  • the processor can judge whether the temperature rise exceeds a threshold according to the detection information of the temperature detection module. When the temperature rise is greater than or equal to the threshold, the processor may control the charging circuit of the host 2 to turn off, so that the host 2 may not charge the first earphone 31, thereby suppressing the temperature rise. If the temperature rise is less than the threshold, the processor can control the charging circuit of the host 2 to turn on, so that the host 2 can charge the first earphone 31 .
  • This charging overheating protection mechanism can improve product safety, lifespan and reliability, and ensure user experience.
  • the processor of the host 2 when the processor of the host 2 confirms that the temperature rise is too large, the processor can also control the alarm module in the host 2 to issue an alarm, so as to warn the user.
  • the alarm module can be, for example, a speaker, a buzzer, a motor, etc. in the host computer 2 . It can be understood that according to product requirements, the alarm mechanism is not necessary.
  • the host may not have the charging overheating protection mechanism.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Acoustics & Sound (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Telephone Set Structure (AREA)
  • Headphones And Earphones (AREA)
  • Casings For Electric Apparatus (AREA)

Abstract

本申请提供了一种可穿戴设备，包括耳机与主机；耳机具有耳机磁体；主机包括能开合的第一部分与第二部分；第一部分具有第一容纳槽，第二部分具有第三容纳槽，主机闭合时，第一容纳槽与第三容纳槽围成容纳空间；第一部分具有第一主机吸附磁体；主机闭合时，耳机收容于容纳空间，耳机磁体与第一主机吸附磁体磁吸；主机打开时，耳机能够吸附于第一容纳槽内并随第一部分运动；耳机收容于第一容纳槽时，耳机的小部分位于第一容纳槽内，耳机的大部分位于第一容纳槽外。通过设计能开合的主机，使得无线耳机能收容在主机内，实现无线耳机与可穿戴产品的产品形态融合，使得用户随身携带的设备减少，提升了用户体验。

Description

可穿戴设备
本申请要求于2021年12月31日提交中国专利局、申请号为202111677026.6、申请名称为“可穿戴设备”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及电子设备领域，尤其涉及一种可穿戴设备。
背景技术
智能手表、智能手环等可穿戴产品以及无线耳机已经被用户普遍使用。在日常场景下时，用户往往会同时佩戴可穿戴产品与无线耳机。为了收纳无线耳机，用户还需要随身携带耳机盒，这样导致用户需要携带较多设备，不利于用户体验。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供了一种可穿戴设备，能够将无线耳机直接收容在可穿戴产品内，实现无线耳机与可穿戴产品的产品形态融合，使得用户随身携带的设备减少，提升了用户体验。
本申请实施例的可穿戴设备包括耳机与主机；耳机具有耳机磁体；主机包括第一部分与第二部分，第一部分能够相对第二部分转动并相对第二部分张开以使得主机打开，或者第一部分能够与第二部分闭合以使得主机闭合；第一部分具有第一容纳槽，第二部分具有第三容纳槽，主机闭合时，第一容纳槽与第三容纳槽围成容纳空间；第一部分具有第一主机吸附磁体；主机闭合时，耳机收容于容纳空间，耳机磁体与第一主机吸附磁体磁吸；第一部分相对第二部分张开时，耳机能够吸附于第一容纳槽内并随第一部分运动；耳机收容于第一容纳槽时，耳机位于第一容纳槽内的部分与第一容纳槽的开口所在的平面的最大距离为第一距离，耳机位于第一容纳槽外的部分与第一容纳槽的开口所在的平面的最大距离为第二距离，第一距离小于第二距离。
本方案中，通过设计能开合的主机，使得无线耳机能收容在主机内，实现无线耳机与可穿戴产品的产品形态融合，使得用户随身携带的设备减少，提升了用户体验。并且，当主机打开时，耳机可以吸附于第一部分，且耳机的大部分可以外露于第一部分，这样便于用户取放耳机。
在一种实现方式中，第一主机吸附磁体为海尔贝克阵列，耳机磁体为单磁体或海尔贝克阵列。通过使得第一主机吸附磁体为海尔贝克阵列，能够增强主机的第一部分对耳机的磁吸力，使得用户在将耳机放至第一部分时，无需精准对位也能使耳机准确吸附至第一部分。
在一种实现方式中，第一主机吸附磁体为海尔贝克阵列，第一主机吸附磁体包括两个相连的单磁体，两个单磁体的磁场方向不同；耳机磁体包括一个单磁体，一个单磁体为具有两个不同磁场方向的海尔贝克阵列。此种磁体设计能极大增强主机的第一部分对耳机的磁吸力，使得用户在将耳机放至第一部分时，无需精准对位也能使耳机准确吸附至第一部分。
在一种实现方式中，第二部分具有第二主机吸附磁体；耳机收容于容纳空间时，耳机磁体与第一主机吸附磁体以及第二主机吸附磁体均磁吸，且耳机磁体与第一主机吸附磁体间的 磁力，大于耳机磁体与第二主机吸附磁体间的磁力。此种磁体设计不仅能够实现主机打开后耳机吸附于第一部分，而且若主机打开时耳机位于第二部分，由于第二部分对耳机的磁吸力，耳机能够可靠地放置于第二部分，即使翻转主机耳机也不易掉落。
在一种实现方式中，第一部分的周缘开设有凹槽；第一部分具有密封件，密封件的表面设有若干凸起，若干凸起两两间隔；密封件固定于第一部分的凹槽内，密封件的若干凸起均与第一部分的凹槽的底面连接，密封件背离密封件的凸起的一侧露在第一部分的凹槽外；主机闭合时，密封件露在第一部分的凹槽外的部分与第二部分接触，以将第一部分与第二部分的间隙密封；或者，第二部分的周缘开设有凹槽；第二部分具有密封件，密封件的表面设有若干凸起，若干凸起两两间隔；密封件固定于第二部分的凹槽内，密封件的若干凸起均与第二部分的凹槽的底面连接，密封件背离述密封件的凸起的一侧露在第二部分的凹槽外；主机闭合时，密封件露在第二部分的凹槽外的部分与第一部分接触，以将第一部分与第二部分的间隙密封。本方案能够对主机的两部分的间隙进行密封，保证主机的内部及主机所收容的耳机不易被异物侵蚀。
在一种实现方式中，第二部分具有第一充电弹片和第二充电弹片；耳机具有中心对称的外形；耳机包括第一电极和第二电极，第一电极与第二电极均位于耳机的外侧，并均为环绕耳机的中心线的环状结构，第一电极与第二电极间隔设置；耳机位于第二部分时，第一电极与第一充电弹片接触，第二电极与第二充电弹片接触；主机包括充电电路，充电电路用于通过第一充电弹片及第二充电弹片向耳机充电。本方案能够使得耳机以较为随意的旋转角度放入第二部分时，均能实现主机对耳机的充电。
在一种实现方式中，第二部分具有异物检测弹片；主机包括处理器，处理器用于根据充电电路的异常充电信号控制充电电路关闭，以及根据充电电路的正常充电信号控制充电电路工作；其中，当第一充电弹片与第二充电弹片中的至少一个，以及异物检测弹片均接触异物后，充电电路产生异常充电信号，否则充电电路产生正常充电信号。本方案能够使得主机在确定有异物进入第二部分内时，停止向耳机充电，以避免导致异常，保证产品的安全可靠性。
在一种实现方式中，第一部分或第二部分具有温度检测模块；主机包括处理器，处理器用于根据温度检测模块的检测结果确定检测到的温度大于或等于阈值时，控制充电电路关闭；处理器还用于根据温度检测模块的检测结果确定检测到的温度小于阈值时，控制充电电路工作。本方案能够使得主机在确定主机的温度过高时停止向耳机充电，以避免导致异常，保证产品的安全可靠性。
在一种实现方式中，第二部分具有状态检测磁体；第一部分具有第一磁场传感器，第一磁场传感器用于检测状态检测磁体的磁通量；主机包括处理器，处理器用于根据第一磁场传感器的检测信号，确定主机是处于打开状态还是闭合状态。本方案能够实现主机的开合状态检测，以便于使得主机和耳机实现相应的功能，以保证用户体验。
在一种实现方式中，第一部分或者第二部分具有第二磁场传感器，第二磁场传感器用于检测耳机磁体的磁通量；主机包括处理器；处理器用于根据第一部分的第二磁场传感器的检测信号，确定耳机是否位于第一容纳槽内；或者，处理器用于根据第二部分的第二磁场传感器的检测信号，确定耳机是否位于第三容纳槽内。本方案能够使得主机检测耳机在主机内的位置状态，以便于使得主机和耳机实现相应的功能，以保证用户体验。
在一种实现方式中，第二部分具有状态检测磁体；耳机具有第三磁场传感器，第三磁场传感器用于检测状态检测磁体的磁通量；耳机具有控制器，控制器用于根据第三磁场传感器的检测信号，确定耳机是否位于第三容纳槽内。本方案能够使得耳机检测自身在主机内的位 置状态，以便于使得耳机实现相应的功能，以保证用户体验。
在一种实现方式中，主机包括转轴组件，转轴组件包括套、从动件、弹性件和第一轴；轴套具有内腔，轴套的外侧与第一部分固定连接；从动件具有轴配合面和通孔，从动件的通孔贯穿轴配合面；从动件位于内腔，从动件能沿内腔的表面滑动但无法相对轴套转动；弹性件位于内腔，并抵压从动件背向轴配合面的表面；第一轴的一部分位于内腔中并与轴套转动连接；第一轴位于内腔中的部分穿过从动件的通孔，并与从动件的轴配合面配合形成凸轮机构；第一轴的另一部分位于内腔外，并与第二部分固定连接；第一部分能通过转轴组件相对第二部分转动；在主机从闭合状态切换为打开状态的过程中，第一部分的转动行程依次包括第一段行程、第二段行程和第三段行程；其中，在第一段行程中，从动件能够在弹性件的弹力驱动下沿第一轴移动，且从动件能够在凸轮机构与弹性件的共同作用下绕第一轴转动，以带动轴套绕第一轴转动，以使轴套带动第一部分相对第二部分转动；在第二段行程中，第一部分能够受外力驱动相对第二部分转动，以带动轴套与从动件绕第一轴转动；在第三段行程中，从动件能够在弹性件的弹力驱动下沿第一轴移动，且从动件能够在凸轮机构与弹性件的共同作用下绕第一轴转动，以带动轴套绕第一轴转动，以使轴套带动第一部分相对第二部分转动。本方案通过转轴组件的结构设计，使得第一部分在各个行程中具有不同的运动特性，能够给用户营造出特别的手感，极大提升了用户体验。
在一种实现方式中，轴配合面包括依次相连的第一斜面、平面和第二斜面，第一斜面与平面形成钝角，平面与第二斜面形成钝角，且第一斜面、平面和第二斜面形成两级阶梯；在第一段行程中，第一斜面与第一轴位于内腔中的部分滑动接触；在第二段行程中，平面与第一轴位于内腔中的部分滑动接触；在第三段行程中，第二斜面与第一轴位于内腔中的部分滑动接触。本方案通过凸轮配合面的设计，能够可靠地实现第一部分的三段式行程设计。
在一种实现方式中，转轴组件包括轴套、第二轴和柔性电路板；轴套具有内腔；第二轴上沿第二轴的轴向形成通道；第二轴的一部分位于内腔并与轴套转动连接；第二轴的另一部分位于内腔外；柔性电路板包括第一电连接端、安装部分和第二连接端，安装部分位于第一电连接端与第二电连接端之间，安装部分包括相连的卷绕部分与叠层部分；当柔性电路板安装于第二轴时，第一电连接端与第二电连接端均位于内腔外，卷绕部分卷绕于第二轴位于内腔的部分上，叠层部分呈折叠状态，且叠层部分的至少一部分收容于第二轴的通道内；第一部分具有第一主机电路板组件，第一主机电路板组件与第一电连接端电连接；第二部分具有第二主机电路板组件，第二主机电路板组件与第二电连接端电连接；第一部分与轴套的外侧固定连接，第二部分与第二轴位于内腔外的部分固定连接，第一部分能通过转轴组件相对第二部分转动。本方案通过转轴组件的结构设计，使得主机的两部分可以通过转轴组件实现电连接和通信，保证了主机的正常工作。
在一种实现方式中，第一主机电路板组件包括电路板，电路板具有接地点与馈电点；第一部分包括第一主机壳体，第一主机壳体与轴套的外侧固定连接，第一主机电路板组件固定于第一主机壳体背向轴套的一侧；第一主机壳体与接地点及馈电点均电连接，第一主机壳体作为主机的天线。本方案通过合理的结构设计，利用第一主机壳体实现了主机的天线功能。
在一种实现方式中，转轴组件包括轴接触件；轴接触件固定于轴套内，并与第二轴位于内腔的部分滑动接触；第二部分包括第三主机壳体，第三主机壳体与第二轴位于内腔外的部分固定连接，第三主机壳体作为主机的天线。本方案通过合理的结构设计，利用第一主机壳体、转轴组件和第三主机壳体构造天线系统，实现了主机的天线功能。
在一种实现方式中，主机闭合时，第一主机壳体与第三主机壳体之间具有间隙，且第一 主机壳体与第二主机壳体产生耦合。本方案中，通过设计耦合方式的馈电路径，能够满足主机在打开状态下与闭合状态下的不同通信需求，保证主机在不同状态下的天线性能。
在一种实现方式中，第一部分为主机的盖体与主机的主体中的一个，第二部分为盖体与主体中的另一个；主机包括开启键，开启键包括键帽、弹性件和手感弹片；键帽的一部分位于第二部分内，键帽的另一部分位于第二部分外；键帽与第二部分活动连接；键帽具有位于第二部分内的凸点；弹性件安装于第二部分内，以向键帽提供反弹力；手感弹片位于第二部分内，手感弹片与键帽的凸点间隔相对；主机闭合时，键帽与第一部分形成卡扣连接，以将第一部分与第二部分锁合；键帽受压时能够向第二部分内运动，以使得卡扣连接被解除，并使得键帽的凸点挤压手感弹片。本方案通过设计上述结构的开启键，能够实现主机的打开与关闭。
在一种实现方式中，耳机的外形与第一容纳槽的形状适配，和/或，耳机的外形与第三容纳槽的形状适配。通过使得耳机的形状与主机的内部形状适配，能充分利用主机的内部空间收容耳机，确保主机的结构紧凑，外形美观。
在一种实现方式中，耳机包括耳塞、第一电极、耳机前壳、第二电极和耳机后壳，第一电极位于耳塞与耳机前壳之间，耳机前壳连接第一电极与第二电极，第二电极连接耳机前壳与耳机后壳；耳机收容于第一容纳槽或第三容纳槽时，耳塞朝向转轴组件，耳机后壳背向转轴组件。通过使得耳机在主机内具有上述放置姿态，使得用户从主机中取出耳机后能快速佩戴，能够满足人体工程学要求。
在一种实现方式中，主机包括智能手表。本方案能够将无线耳机直接收容在智能手表内，实现无线耳机与智能手表的产品形态融合，使得用户随身携带的设备减少，提升了用户体验。
附图说明
图1是本申请实施例中的可穿戴设备的组装结构示意图；
图2是本申请实施例中的可穿戴设备的组装结构示意图；
图3是本申请实施例中的可穿戴设备的组装结构示意图；
图4是本申请实施例中的可穿戴设备的组装结构示意图；
图5是本申请实施例中的可穿戴设备的组装结构示意图；
图6是本申请实施例中的可穿戴设备的分解结构示意图；
图7是图6中的可穿戴设备的第一主机壳体的组装结构示意图；
图8是图7中的第一主机壳体的分解结构示意图；
图9是图6中的可穿戴设备的第一主机壳体的组装结构示意图；
图10是图8中的第一主机壳体的锁扣部的组装结构示意图；
图11是图8中的第一主机壳体的磁体组件的分解结构示意图；
图12是图8中的第一主机壳体的密封支架的结构示意图；
图13是图9中的第一主机壳体的A-A剖视结构示意图；
图14是图13中B处的局部放大结构示意图；
图15是图6中的可穿戴设备的第一主机电路板组件的结构示意图；
图16是图6中的可穿戴设备的第二主机壳体的结构示意图；
图17是图6中的可穿戴设备的第二主机壳体的结构示意图；
图18是图17中的第二主机壳体的分解结构示意图；
图19是图16中的第二主机壳体的第二支架的结构示意图；
图20是第二主机壳体与主机电池的组装结构示意图；
图21是图6中的可穿戴设备的第三主机壳体的组装结构示意图；
图22是图6中的可穿戴设备的第三主机壳体的组装结构示意图；
图23是图22中A处的局部放大结构示意图；
图24是图6中的可穿戴设备的第三主机壳体的组装结构示意图；
图25是图6中的可穿戴设备的开启键的组装结构示意图；
图26是图25中的开启键的分解结构示意图；
图27是图25中的开启键的键帽的结构示意图；
图28是图25中的开启键的按键支架的结构示意图；
图29是图25中的开启键的手感弹片的结构示意图；
图30是开启键与第三主机壳体的组装结构示意图；
图31是图30的A-A剖视结构示意图；
图32是开启键与第一主机壳体的组装结构示意图；
图33是图32中B处的局部放大结构示意图；
图34是第二主机壳体、第三主机壳体和开启键的组装结构示意图；
图35是图6中的可穿戴设备的第四主机壳体的组装结构示意图；
图36是图6中的可穿戴设备的第四主机壳体的组装结构示意图；
图37是图36的第四主机壳体的分解结构示意图；
图38是图6中的可穿戴设备的转轴组件的组装结构示意图；
图39是图38的A-A剖视结构示意图；
图40是图38中的转轴组件的分解结构示意图；
图41是转轴组件中的轴套的结构示意图；
图42是图41的轴套的B-B剖视结构示意图；
图43是转轴组件中的轴套的结构示意图；
图44是转轴组件中的轴套的结构示意图；
图45是转轴组件中的凸点配合件的结构示意图；
图46是转轴组件中的从动件的结构示意图；
图47是图46中的从动件的A-A剖视结构示意图；
图48是转轴组件中的从动件的结构示意图；
图49是转轴组件中的垫片的结构示意图；
图50是转轴组件中的垫片的结构示意图；
图51是转轴组件中的第一轴的结构示意图；
图52是转轴组件中的第一轴的结构示意图；
图53是转轴组件中的第一轴的结构示意图；
图54是转轴组件中的第一轴、从动件和弹性件的组装结构示意图；
图55是转轴组件中的限位件的结构示意图；
图56是转轴组件中的第二轴的结构示意图；
图57是转轴组件中的第二轴的结构示意图；
图58是转轴组件中的第二轴的结构示意图；
图59是转轴组件中的柔性电路板的结构示意图；
图60是转轴组件中的柔性电路板的结构示意图；
图61是转轴组件中的柔性电路板的结构示意图；
图62是转轴组件中的第二轴与柔性电路板的组装结构示意图；
图63是转轴组件中的第二轴与柔性电路板的组装结构示意图；
图64是转轴组件的组装结构示意图；
图65是转轴组件中的夹持件的结构示意图；
图66是转轴组件的组装结构示意图；
图67是转轴组件的剖视结构示意图；
图68是转轴组件与第三主机壳体的组装结构示意图；
图69是转轴组件、第三主机壳体与第二主机壳体的组装结构示意图；
图70是转轴组件、第三主机壳体、第二主机壳体与第一主机壳体的组装结构示意图；
图71是图70中A处的局部放大结构示意图；
图72是可穿戴设备中的主机的组装结构示意图；
图73是可穿戴设备中的主机的局部剖视组装结构示意图；
图74是转轴组件的剖视结构示意图；
图75是图74中B处的局部放大结构示意图；
图76是图75所示结构的A-A剖视结构示意图；
图77是转轴组件中的第一轴、从动件和弹性件的配合结构示意图；
图78是表示转轴组件中的轴套与凸点配合件的配合状态的结构示意图；
图79是转轴组件中的第一轴、从动件和弹性件的配合结构示意图；
图80是表示转轴组件中的轴套与凸点配合件的配合状态的结构示意图；
图81是转轴组件中的第一轴、从动件和弹性件的配合结构示意图；
图82是表示转轴组件中的轴套与凸点配合件的配合状态的结构示意图；
图83是主机的第一部分相对第二部分张开至极限位置时的结构示意图；
图84是图83中A处的局部放大结构示意图；
图85是图6中的可穿戴设备的第一耳机的组装结构示意图；
图86是图85中的第一耳机的分解结构示意图；
图87是第一耳机中的耳机前壳组件的组装结构示意图；
图88是第一耳机中的耳机前壳组件的组装结构示意图；
图89是第一耳机的耳机前壳组件的分解结构示意图；
图90是图88中的耳机前壳组件的A-A剖视结构示意图；
图91是夹具将中间组件夹持的结构示意图；
图92是本申请实施例的组装治具的分解结构示意图；
图93是组装治具的底座的结构示意图；
图94是组装治具的底座的结构示意图；
图95是组装治具的上盖的结构示意图；
图96是组装治具的上盖的结构示意图；
图97是将夹具与中间组件放入底座的结构示意图；
图98是将上盖与底座配合的结构示意图；
图99是上盖与底座配合结构示意图；
图100是图99中A处的局部放大结构示意图；
图101是将耳机磁体装入组装治具内的结构示意图；
图102是第一耳机的第一电极的结构示意图；
图103是第一耳机的耳塞支架组件的结构示意图；
图104是第一耳机的耳塞支架组件的结构示意图；
图105是耳塞支架组件的分解结构示意图；
图106是耳塞支架组件中的耳塞支架的结构示意图；
图107是第一耳机的耳塞的结构示意图；
图108是第一耳机的耳塞的结构示意图；
图109是图108中的耳塞的A-A剖视结构示意图；
图110是耳塞中的耳塞内罩的几种拾音通孔的结构示意图；
图111是第一耳机的第二电极的结构示意图；
图112是第一耳机的耳机后壳组件的分解结构示意图；
图113是耳机后壳组件的组装结构示意图；
图114是耳机后壳组件中的耳机后壳的结构示意图；
图115是图112中的耳机后壳的A-A剖视结构示意图；
图116是耳机后壳组件中的天线的一种结构示意图；
图117是耳机后壳组件中的天线的另一种结构示意图；
图118是耳机后壳组件中的天线的另一种结构示意图；
图119是耳机后壳组件中的后壳支架的结构示意图；
图120是图113中的耳机后壳组件的B-B剖视结构示意图；
图121是第一耳机的剖视结构示意图；
图122是图121中A处的局部放大结构示意图；
图123是另一种第一耳机的结构示意图；
图124是另一种第一耳机的结构示意图；
图125是第一耳机中的电子组件的结构示意图；
图126是第一耳机中的电子组件的结构示意图；
图127是第一耳机的剖视结构示意图；
图128是图127中A处的局部放大结构示意图；
图129是图127中B处的局部放大结构示意图；
图130是主机中的第一主机吸附磁体与第一耳机中的耳机磁体的配合关系示意图；
图131是第一主机吸附磁体与耳机磁体的一种磁体设计示意图；
图132是第一主机吸附磁体与耳机磁体的另一种磁体设计示意图；
图133是第一主机吸附磁体与耳机磁体的另一种磁体设计示意图；
图134是第一主机吸附磁体与耳机磁体的另一种磁体设计示意图；
图135是第一主机吸附磁体，与耳机中的第一电极及第二电极磁吸的设计示意图；
图136是表示主机打开后第一耳机吸附于第一部分的结构示意图；
图137是表示将第一耳机从主机外放至第一部分时第一耳机自动归位的过程示意图；
图138是表示将第一耳机从主机外放至第一部分时第一耳机自动归位的过程示意图；
图139是表示将第一耳机从主机外放至第一部分时第一耳机自动归位的过程示意图；
图140是表示主机进行开合状态检测的示意图；
图141是表示主机进行耳机的出入盒状态检测的示意图；
图142是表示耳机检测自身的出入盒状态的示意图；
图143是表示主机进行异物检测的示意图。
具体实施方式
本申请以下实施例提供了一种可穿戴设备，该可穿戴设备是一种将主机与耳机融合的全新产品形态。其中，该主机的产品形态包括但不限于智能手表、电子血压计、智能手环、智能头盔、智能服装、智能眼镜、移动Wi-Fi、智能背包等电子设备。该耳机为无线耳机，包括但不限于蓝牙耳机(例如真无线立体声(True Wireless Stereo，TWS)耳机)、红外线耳机等。下文将以该主机具有智能手表的产品形态、该耳机为蓝牙耳机为例进行描述。
如图1、图2、图3、图4和图5所示，本实施例的可穿戴设备1可以包括主机2和耳机3，耳机3可以收纳在主机2内。下文先说明主机2的相关设计，再说明耳机3的相关设计，最后说明可穿戴设备1整体的特性与功能。
主机2的产品形态及运动设计
如图1-图4所示，主机2可以包括第一部分21、转轴组件22、第二部分23、功能键24和开启键25。其中，第一部分21可以称为盖体，第二部分23可称为主体。
主机2还可以包括腕带，该腕带可以连接在第二部分23的相对两侧。
如图1-图3所示，转轴组件22连接第一部分21和第二部分23，第一部分21能够通过转轴组件22相对第二部分23转动，以使主机2处于闭合状态和打开状态。主机2闭合时，第一部分21和第二部分23可以围成容纳空间，耳机3收容在该容纳空间内。
图1表示主机2处于闭合状态，此时第一部分21与第二部分23闭合。图2-图5均表示主机2处于打开状态，此时第一部分21相对第二部分23张开一定角度。例如，图2中第一部分21的张角a可大致为15度。图3中第一部分21的张角b可大致为75度。图5中第一部分21转动至极限位置，第一部分21的张角c可大致为90度。可以理解的是，第一部分21处于极限位置时的张角c的具体数值可以根据产品需要设计，不限于上文所述。
另外在本实施例中，如图2-图4所示，当主机2处于打开状态时，耳机3可以脱离第二部分23并依附于第一部分21。此种设计便于用户取放耳机3(下文还将继续说明)。在其他实施例中，当主机2打开后，耳机3可以收纳于第二部分23。
在本实施例中，通过转轴组件22的特殊结构设计，能够将第一部分21的转动行程分段，在每段行程内，第一部分21均具有相应的转动特性。在其中某段行程中，第一部分21能提供手感反馈(具体原理将在下文详细描述)。
例如，在将闭合的主机2打开的过程中，第一部分21的转动行程可以分为三段。其中，由图1所示状态到图2所示状态可以表示第一部分21的第一段行程。在第一段行程内，第一部分21的张角逐渐增大至张角a，且第一部分21在转轴组件22的转矩驱动下自动转动，无需外力。由图2所示状态到图3所示状态可以表示第一部分21的第二段行程。在第二段行程内，第一部分21的张角由张角a逐渐增大至张角b，其中转轴组件22不再向第一部分21提供转矩，第一部分21需要在外力驱动下转动。由图3所示状态到图5所示状态可以表示第一部分21的第三段行程。在第三段行程内，第一部分21的张角由张角b逐渐增大至张角c，其中第一部分21在转轴组件22的转矩驱动下自动转动，无需外力。当第一部分21的张角为张角c时，转轴组件22的该转矩可以继续存在。容易理解，主机2具有限位结构，在该限位结构与转轴组件22的共同作用下，第一部分21可以保持平衡状态。
常规的翻盖电子设备(如笔记本电脑、翻盖手机等)的翻盖需要用户持续施力才能打开，手感体验较为单调。但是本实施例中，通过转轴组件22的结构设计将第一部分21的转动行程进行分段，使得第一部分21仅在第二段行程中需要用户施力驱动，在其他段行程中可以自动转动无需用户施力，由此提供了一种新颖的手感体验。
并且，在第三段行程内，第一部分21受转轴组件22的驱动朝远离第二部分23的方向运动。当第一部分21的张角达到张角c时，转轴组件22的该驱动力依然存在，因此用户从第一部分21上取下耳机3的操作不易将第一部分21拉向第二部分23。此种设计便于用户取下耳机3，且能增加用户体验。
在其他实施例中，可以设计转轴的结构，使得第一部分21的转动行程无需分段，而是通过用户持续施力或者始终自动的方式转动。
如图1-图3所示，开启键25可安装于第二部分23，并可与转轴组件22分别位于第二部分23的径向的两端。开启键25的一部分可外露于第二部分23，以供用户按压。开启键25中的锁扣结构(下文将会描述)可与第一部分21中的锁扣结构(下文将会描述)形成可拆卸连接。开启键25与第一部分21中的锁扣结构配合，以实现主机2的打开与锁闭。
例如图1所示，当主机2处于闭合状态时，开启键25中的锁扣结构与第一部分21中的锁扣结构形成可拆卸连接。
结合图1和图2，当用户要打开主机2时，用户可以按压开启键25，使得开启键25产生机构运动，开启键25中的锁扣结构不再与第一部分21中的锁扣结构配合。此时，第一部分21可以在转轴组件22的驱动下自动张开，并进行第一段行程。相反的，当用户欲闭合主机2时，用户可以下压第一部分21，使其朝向第二部分23转动。当第二部分23中的锁扣结构与开启键25中的锁扣结构接触时，开启键25将产生机构运动，开启键25中的锁扣结构恢复与第一部分21中的锁扣结构的配合。
通过开启键25与第一部分21中的锁扣结构实现主机2的打开与锁闭的具体原理将在下文详细描述。
在其他实施例中，开启键也可以安装在第一部分，第二部分具有锁扣结构，该开启键与第二部分中的锁扣结构配合，以实现主机的打开与锁闭。其中，该第一部分可以是盖体，该第二部分可以是主体。下文将以开启键25安装于第二部分23的设计为例继续说明。
上文概要说明了可穿戴设备1的产品形态及运动设计，下面将按照先描述第一部分21、第二部分23、开启键25及功能键24，再描述转轴组件22的次序，详细描述可穿戴设备1的具体结构。
主机2的结构
如图5和图6所示，可穿戴设备1的主机2的第一部分21可以包括显示屏211、第一主机电路板组件212和第一主机壳体213。其中，显示屏211与第一主机电路板组件212均安装在第一主机壳体213上，第一主机电路板组件212位于显示屏211与第一主机壳体213之间。
第一主机壳体213的结构
如图7和图8所示，第一主机壳体213的外形可以近似呈圆盘状。第一主机壳体213可以由若干部件组装而成，例如其可以包括第一框体213a、第一支架213b、磁体组件213r、锁扣部213d(也即上文所述的第一部分21中的锁扣结构)、密封支架213t和密封圈213s。
如图7-图9所示，第一框体213a可大致为具有圆形外轮廓的框架结构。第一框体213a的边缘可以开设通孔213z，通孔213z可以是腰型孔(或称跑道形孔)。第一框体213a可由导 电材料制造，例如金属。第一框体213a可作为天线(下文将会说明)。
如图7-图9所示，第一支架213b可近似呈圆盘状结构。第一支架213b的局部区域可以形成第一容纳槽213y与第二容纳槽213x，第一容纳槽213y与第二容纳槽213x间隔布置。如图9所示，从第一支架213b的一侧看，形成第一容纳槽213y与第二容纳槽213x的该局部区域呈凹陷状。如图7-图8所示，从第一支架213b的另一侧看，形成第一容纳槽213y与第二容纳槽213x的该局部区域呈凸起状。如图9与图4所示，第一容纳槽213y可用于容纳第一耳机31，第二容纳槽213x可用于容纳第二耳机32。
参考图9所示，第一支架213b的周缘还可以开设环绕一周的凹槽，该凹槽的开口与第一容纳槽213y的开口位于第一支架213b的同一侧。该凹槽围绕在第一容纳槽213y与第二容纳槽213x的外周。下文将会描述，该凹槽用于安装密封支架213t和密封圈213s。
如图7-图9所示，第一支架213b与第一框体213a固定连接，第一框体213a的周缘区域环绕于第一支架213b的外周，第一框体213a的通孔213z也位于第一支架213b的外侧。
如图9所示，锁扣部213d可固定于第一支架213b的边缘处，并可与第一框体213a的通孔213z相对设置。结合图9与图10所示，锁扣部213d背离第一支架213b的一端可具有框架结构213w，框架结构213w可以与第一容纳槽213y的开口位于第一支架213b的同一侧。框架结构213w可以围成通孔213v。框架结构213w的背离第一支架213b的一侧可以具有斜面213u。锁扣部213d的框架结构213w用于与开启键25中的锁扣结构形成可拆卸的卡扣连接(下文将会描述)，其中该斜面213u起导向作用，使得框架结构213w能够顺利地与开启键25中的锁扣结构配合。
磁体组件213r
如图8和图11所示，磁体组件213r可以包括固定支架213r1与第一主机吸附磁体213r2。
示意性的，第一主机吸附磁体213r2可由两个单磁体拼接而成，每个该单磁体具有单一磁场方向，由两个该单磁体构成的第一主机吸附磁体213r2可以具有两个磁场方向，第一主机吸附磁体213r2可以形成海尔贝克阵列。
根据产品需要，在其他实施例中，第一主机吸附磁体可以是由其他数量的单磁体拼接而成的海尔贝克阵列。例如第一主机吸附磁体是由三个单磁体拼接而成的海尔贝克阵列，该第一主机吸附磁体可以具有三个磁场方向。或者，第一主机吸附磁体是由四个单磁体拼接而成的海尔贝克阵列，该第一主机吸附磁体可以具有四个磁场方向。
或者在其他实施例中，第一主机吸附磁体可以是单个磁体，且具有单一磁场方向。或者，第一主机吸附磁体可以是单个磁体，但该第一主机吸附磁体可以形成具有至少两个磁场方向的海尔贝克阵列(可以通过对物理上的单个磁体的不同区域进行不同方向的充磁制得)。
如图11和图7所示，本实施例的第一主机吸附磁体213r2的形状，可与第一支架213b中的第一容纳槽213y(或者第二容纳槽213x)的槽壁的外表面的形状适配。第一主机吸附磁体213r2可以固定至第一容纳槽213y的槽壁的外表面以及第二容纳槽213x的槽壁的外表面。
如图11所示，第一主机吸附磁体213r2例如可以有四个，四个第一主机吸附磁体213r2的结构例如可以一致。结合图11和图7所示，四个第一主机吸附磁体213r2可以两两为一组。其中，第一组安装在第一容纳槽213y的槽壁的外表面，第一组的两个第一主机吸附磁体213r2可以对称安装于第一容纳槽213y的槽壁的两侧(例如图7视角中的左右两侧)。第二组安装在第二容纳槽213x的槽壁的外表面，第二组的两个第一主机吸附磁体213r2对称安装于第二容纳槽213x的槽壁的两侧(例如图7视角中的左右两侧)。
在其他实施例中，第一主机吸附磁体213r2的数量可以根据产品需要设计，不限于上文 所述。
如图11所示，固定支架213r1的数量与第一主机吸附磁体213r2的数量可以一致，例如固定支架213r1也为四个。结合图11与图7所示，固定支架213r1可以安装至第一支架213b上，且一个固定支架213r1可以对应一个第一主机吸附磁体213r2，使得每个第一主机吸附磁体213r2均固定在一个固定支架213r1与第一支架213b之间。
本实施例中，固定支架213r1能够保证第一主机吸附磁体213r2的可靠固定。在其他实施例中，根据产品需要也可以不设固定支架213r1。
密封支架213t与密封圈213s
如图12和图8所示，密封支架213t可以围成一周，其形状与第一支架213b的周缘的形状匹配。密封支架213可以包括支架主体部213p，以及凸设于支架主体部213p的一侧的若干凸起213q。所有凸起213q可以相互间隔。前一个凸起213q可以靠近支架主体部213p的外侧，与该前一个凸起213q相邻的后一个凸起213q可以靠近支架主体部213p的内侧，所有凸起213q可以按照此种规律排列。在其他实施例中，所有凸起213q也可以无需按照“一内一外”的方式排列，例如所有凸起213q均可以位于支架主体部213p的外侧或内侧。
如图8所示，密封圈213s可以围成一周，其形状与密封支架213t的形状匹配。密封圈213s与密封支架213t固定连接，例如二者可以一体成型，如通过一体注塑工艺成型。其中，密封支架213t的材质可以较硬、结构强度较大、不易形变，密封圈213s的材质可以较软、结构强度较小、容易形变。密封圈213s与密封支架213t组成的部件可以称为密封件。
图13表示第一框体213a、第一支架213b、密封支架213t以及密封圈213s的装配结构。图14为图13中B处的局部放大示意图。
如图14所示，第一支架213b的周缘可以开设凹槽213n。结合图14和图13所示，凹槽213n环绕第一支架213b的周缘一周，凹槽213n可以围绕在第一容纳槽213y与第二容纳槽213x的外周。密封支架213t固定在凹槽213n内，凸起213q可以接触凹槽213n的底面。支架主体部213p上未设凸起213q的部位与凹槽213n的底面之间形成间隙。
密封支架213t例如可以通过点胶工艺粘接在凹槽213n内。其中，粘胶可以填充在凹槽213n内，并填充在支架主体部213p上未设凸起213q的部位与凹槽213n的底面的间隙内。由于密封支架213t具有间隔分布的若干凸起213q，使得密封支架213t与凹槽213n的底面形成若干间隙，这样能保证粘胶的填充量，进而保证粘接强度。另外，由于该间隙的存在，粘胶也不易溢出，这样能保证点胶工艺的良率。
如图14所示，密封圈213s位于密封支架213t背离凸起213q的一侧。下文将会说明，密封圈213s用于对第一支架213b以及主机2的第二主机壳体231之间的间隙进行密封。
本实施例中，第一框体213a的凹槽213n较窄，密封圈213s较细且质地也较软(即密封圈213s的材料硬度较小)。若单独将密封圈213s装入凹槽213n，会产生密封圈213s难以装入的问题。但是，通过将较软的密封圈213s与较硬的密封支架213t(密封支架213t的材料硬度较大)连接，再将密封支架213t装入凹槽213n，就能够较为容易地将密封圈213s组装至第一框体213a。
第一主机电路板组件212
如图15所示，第一主机电路板组件212可以包括电路板212a以及布置于电路板212a上的器件。电路板212a例如可以是主机2的主电路板。电路板212a上的器件例如可以包括接地弹片212b、接地弹片212c、接地弹片212d、接地弹片212e和馈电弹片212f。其中，接地弹片212b、接地弹片212c、接地弹片212d、接地弹片212e均可与电路板212a上的接地电连 接，馈电弹片212f可与电路板212a上的馈电点连接。电路板212a上的器件还可以包括磁场传感器，例如霍尔传感器或者磁力计。
结合图6与图7所示，第一主机电路板组件212可以安装在第一支架213b上的与第一容纳槽213y的开口背离的一侧，并部分位于第一容纳槽213y的槽壁与第二容纳槽213x的槽壁之间。
显示屏211
如图6所示，显示屏211可具有圆形外轮廓，其边缘可具有过渡圆角。显示屏211可与第一主机壳体213的第一框体213a与第一支架213b均连接。显示屏211可以朝向第一主机电路板组件212。显示屏211可与第一主机电路板组件212电连接，以实现图像显示。显示屏211还可以具有触控功能。
如图4和图6所示，可穿戴设备1的主机2的第二部分23可以包括第二主机壳体231、主机电池234、第三主机壳体232、第二主机电路板组件235、无线充电线圈236和第四主机壳体233。
第二主机壳体231
如图16、图17和图18所示，第二主机壳体231可以包括第二支架231a、第二充电弹片231c、第一充电弹片231e、异物检测弹片231d、状态检测磁体231x与状态检测磁体231w，以及第二主机吸附磁体231v。
如图19所示，第二支架231a可大致具有圆形的外形轮廓。第二支架231a的局部区域可以形成第三容纳槽231f与第四容纳槽231g，第三容纳槽231f与第四容纳槽231g间隔布置，二者的结构可以基本一致。从第二支架231a的一侧看，形成第三容纳槽231f与第四容纳槽231g的该局部区域呈凹陷状。从第二支架231a的另一侧看，形成第三容纳槽231f与第四容纳槽231g该局部区域呈凸起状。
结合图19与图4所示，第三容纳槽231f用于容纳第一耳机31，第四容纳槽231g用于容纳第二耳机32。当主机2闭合时，第三容纳槽231f与第一容纳槽213y围成用于收容第一耳机31的容纳空间，第四容纳槽231g与第二容纳槽213x围成用于收容第二耳机32的容纳空间。
本实施例中，第三容纳槽231f的槽深可以大于第一容纳槽213y的槽深，第四容纳槽231g的槽深可以大于第二容纳槽213x的槽深。其中，槽深的定义可以是：沿主机2中的电路板的法向方向，从容纳槽(第一容纳槽213y、第二容纳槽213x、第三容纳槽231f和第四容纳槽231g的统称)的开口到容纳槽的槽底面的最大距离。
本实施例中，主机2打开时，耳机3可以吸附于第一部分21。其中，第一耳机31的一部分位于第一容纳槽213y内，另一部分位于第一容纳槽213y。可以将第一耳机31位于第一容纳槽213y内的部分与第一容纳槽213y的开口所在的平面的最大距离定义为第一距离，将第一耳机31位于第一容纳槽213y外的部分的部分与第一容纳槽213y的开口所在的平面的最大距离定义为第二距离，第一距离小于所述第二距离。也即主机2打开时，第一耳机31的小部分位于第一容纳槽213y内，第一耳机31的大部分露在第一容纳槽213y外。对于第二耳机32，类似的，主机2打开时，第二耳机32的小部分位于第二容纳槽213x内，第二耳机32的大部分位于第二容纳槽213x外。上述设计将在下文继续说明。
如图19所示，第三容纳槽231f的槽壁可以开设两个通孔231z，两个通孔231z例如可以设于第三容纳槽231f远离第四容纳槽231g的一侧的侧壁。两个通孔231z具有间距。两个通孔231z分别用于安装第二充电弹片231c及第一充电弹片231e(下文将继续描述)。第三容纳 槽231f的槽壁还可以开设通孔231y，通孔231y例如可以大致位于第三容纳槽231f的底壁。通孔231y与两个通孔231z均具有间距。通孔231y用于安装异物检测弹片231d(下文将继续描述)。
参考图19所示，第四容纳槽231g的槽壁也可以开设上述的通孔231z和通孔231y(下文统称通孔)。第四容纳槽231g的槽壁上的通孔，可以位于第四容纳槽231g背离第三容纳槽231f的一侧。第四容纳槽231g的槽壁上的通孔与第三容纳槽231f的槽壁上的通孔，可以基本对称分布在第二支架231a的对称面的两侧。
如图19所示，第二支架231a的边缘可以形成通孔231b。通孔231b可以位于第三容纳槽231f与第四容纳槽231g之间，通孔231b与第三容纳槽231f及第四容纳槽231g可以基本等距。结合图19和图4所示，通孔231b用于供第一部分21中的锁扣部213d穿过(下文将继续描述)。
充电弹片
如图18所示，第二充电弹片231c和第一充电弹片231e均可以有两个。结合图16-图19所示，一个第二充电弹片231c和一个第一充电弹片231e安装在第三容纳槽231f的槽壁上，另一个第二充电弹片231c和另一个第一充电弹片231e安装在第四容纳槽231g的槽壁上。其中，对于第三容纳槽231f而言，第二充电弹片231c可位于第三容纳槽231f的一个通孔231z处，第二充电弹片231c的触头可以穿过该通孔231z伸入第三容纳槽231f。第一充电弹片231e可位于第三容纳槽231f的另一个通孔231z处，第一充电弹片231e的触头可以穿过该另一个通孔231z伸入第三容纳槽231f。对于第四容纳槽231g而言，第二充电弹片231c可位于第四容纳槽231g的一个通孔231z处，第二充电弹片231c的触头可以穿过该通孔231z伸入第四容纳槽231g。第一充电弹片231e可位于第四容纳槽231g的另一个通孔231z处，第一充电弹片231e的触头可以穿过该另一个通孔231z伸入第四容纳槽231g。
本实施例中，两个第二充电弹片231c和两个第一充电弹片231e均可通过线路(例如柔性电路板)与第一主机电路板组件212电连接。第三容纳槽231f中的第二充电弹片231c和第一充电弹片231e分别用于弹性接触第一耳机31上的两个电极，第四容纳槽231g中的第二充电弹片231c和第一充电弹片231e分别用于弹性接触第二耳机32上的两个电极(下文将继续描述)。由此，第一耳机31可以通过第三容纳槽231f中的第二充电弹片231c和第一充电弹片231e实现充电，第二耳机32可以通过第四容纳槽231g中的第二充电弹片231c和第一充电弹片231e实现充电。
异物检测弹片
如图18所示，异物检测弹片231d可以有两个。结合图16-图19所示，一个异物检测弹片231d可以安装在第三容纳槽231f的槽壁上，该异物检测弹片231d可以位于第三容纳槽231f的通孔231y处，该异物检测弹片231d的触头可以穿入该通孔231y。另一个异物检测弹片231d可以安装在第四容纳槽231g的槽壁上，该异物检测弹片231d可以位于第四容纳槽231g的通孔231y处，该异物检测弹片231d的触头可以穿入该通孔231y。
本实施例中，异物检测弹片231d可通过线路(例如柔性电路板)与第一主机电路板组件212电连接。异物检测弹片231d用于实现异物检测(检测是否有异物进入第三容纳槽231f和第四容纳槽231g)，具体原理将在下文说明。
状态检测磁体
如图18所示，示意性的，状态检测磁体231x可以是单个磁体。状态检测磁体231x可以具有单一磁场方向，或者具有至少两个磁场方向(即形成海尔贝克阵列)。状态检测磁体231w 可以是单个磁体。状态检测磁体231x可以具有单一磁场方向，或者具有至少两个磁场方向(即为海尔贝克阵列)。
在其他实施例中，上述的状态检测磁体可以是由至少两个单磁体拼接而成的海尔贝克阵列。
如图18和图17所示，状态检测磁体231x可以固定至第二支架231a的背离第三容纳槽231f的开口的一侧，状态检测磁体231x可以与第三容纳槽231f的槽壁相邻，还可以靠近通孔231b。状态检测磁体231w与状态检测磁体231x位于第二支架231a的同侧，状态检测磁体231w可以与第四容纳槽231g的槽壁相邻。
第二主机吸附磁体231v
如图18所示，示意性的，第二主机吸附磁体231v可以是单个磁体。第二主机吸附磁体231v可以具有单一磁场方向，或者具有至少两个磁场方向(即形成海尔贝克阵列)。
根据产品需要，在其他实施例中，第二主机吸附磁体231v也可以是由至少两个单磁体拼接而成的海尔贝克阵列。
如图18和图17所示，本实施例的第二主机吸附磁体231v例如可以有两个，两个第二主机吸附磁体231v的结构例如可以一致。两个第二主机吸附磁体231v均可以固定在第二支架231a的背离第三容纳槽231f的开口的一侧，其中一个第二主机吸附磁体231v可以位于第三容纳槽231f的槽壁朝向第四容纳槽231g的一侧，另一个第二主机吸附磁体231v可以位于第四容纳槽231g的槽壁朝向第三容纳槽231f的一侧。
在其他实施例中，第二主机吸附磁体231v的数量及位置可以根据产品需要设计。例如，第三容纳槽231f的槽壁的两侧均可安装一个第二主机吸附磁体231v，第四容纳槽231g的槽壁的两侧均可安装一个第二主机吸附磁体231v。
主机电池234
如图6和图20所示，主机电池234可以固定于第二支架231a，并位于第二支架231a的背离第三容纳槽231f的开口的一侧。主机电池234可以位于第三容纳槽231f的槽壁与第四容纳槽231g的槽壁之间。主机电池234可以通过线路(例如柔性电路板)与第二主机电路板组件235电连接，第二主机电路板组件235可以通过线路(例如柔性电路板)与第一主机电路板组件212电连接，因此主机电池234能够与第一主机电路板组件212电连接。
第三主机壳体232
如图21所示，第三主机壳体232可大致呈圆环状结构。第三主机壳体232可以包括周侧壁232a、内承台232b和内承台232g。其中，周侧壁232a可以围成圆环状。内承台232b和内承台232g均连接于周侧壁232a的内侧，内承台232b和内承台232g可以间隔设置，例如二者可以大致分别位于周侧壁232a的径向的两端。
如图22所示，第三主机壳体232可以具有转轴安装空间232f，转轴安装空间232f可以是形成于内承台232g且贯通周侧壁232a的凹槽。转轴安装空间232f用于安装转轴组件22。如图24所示，转轴安装空间232f的内表面可以具有限位凹槽232h，限位凹槽232h可以与转轴安装空间232f在周侧壁232a上形成的开口相对。
如图22所示，第三主机壳体232还可以具有开启键安装空间，开启键安装空间可以在内承台232b上形成第二开口232c，开启键安装空间还可以贯通周侧壁232a并在周侧壁232a上形成第一开口232d。开启键安装空间可与转轴安装空间232f相对，例如二者可大致位于第三主机壳体232的同一条直径的相对两端。
如图22和图23所示，开启键安装空间中的与第二开口232c相对的内表面可以开设凹槽 232i。凹槽232i可以为长条形槽。开启键安装空间中的与第一开口232d相对的内表面可以开设导向槽232j和凹槽232k。其中，导向槽232j可以为圆孔，导向槽232j可以有两个。凹槽232k可以为跑道形，凹槽232k可以位于两个导向槽232j之间。
如图21和图22所示，第三主机壳体232还可以具有功能键安装通孔232e，功能键安装通孔232e可以开设于周侧壁232a，并可以位于转轴安装空间232f与第一开口232d之间。功能键安装通孔232e用于安装功能键24。
开启键25
如图25和图26所示，开启键25可以包括键帽251、弹性件252、按键支架253和手感弹片254。
如图27所示，键帽251可以为一体式的框架结构。键帽251可以包括按压部251a、凸点251b、导向部251c、承载部251d与卡扣251e。
如图27所示，按压部251a可以大致为长条状，其横截面形状大致为梯形(横截面可垂直于按压部251a的长度方向)。按压部251a具有表面251h，表面251h为按压部251a的梯形横截面的上底所在的面。
如图27所示，凸点251b可设于按压部251a的另一表面，并背向按压部251a的表面251h。凸点251b的表面可以是弧面、平面，或者由弧面与平面相连构成。
如图27所示，导向部251c可以为柱状，例如圆柱。导向部251c可以凸设在按压部251a的另一表面，导向部251c与凸点251b可以位于按压部251a的同侧。导向部251c可以有两个，两个导向部251c可以分别位于按压部251a的相对两端。导向部251c用于在键帽251移动时起到导向作用。
如图27所示，承载部251d连接于按压部251a的背离表面251h的一侧，且承载部251d位于两个导向部251c之间。承载部251d可以大致呈C形，承载部251d的C形结构的两个自由端均与按压部251a相连，承载部251d与按压部251a可以共同形成开放空间251g。承载部251d用于承载按键支架253。
如图27所示，卡扣251e可以与承载部251d相连，并位于开放空间251g内。卡扣251e可以朝向凸点251b。卡扣251e可具有装配导向斜面251f。卡扣251e即上文所述的开启键25中的锁扣结构。
如图25和图26所示，弹性件252可以为弹簧。或者，弹性件252也可以为其他能够弹性伸缩的部件。弹性件252可以有两个。结合图26和图27所示，一个弹性件252可以套在一个导向部251c上，另一个弹性件252可以套在另一导向部251c上。
如图28所示，按键支架253可以包括支架主体253a，以及分别连接于支架主体253a的两侧的两个挂耳253b。其中，支架主体253a可以为平板状。挂耳253b可以为弯折板状。挂耳253b可以包括第一板253c与第二板253d，第一板253c与第二板253d可大致形成九十度弯折。两个挂耳253b中的两个第一板253c可以相对第二板253d背向弯折，例如在图视角中，左侧的第一板253c可相对左侧的第二板253d朝左侧弯折，右侧的第一板253c可相对右侧的第二板253d朝右侧弯折。
在其他实施例中，两个挂耳也可以同向弯折。
结合图27和图28所示，按键支架253可以装入键帽251的开放空间251g内，按键支架253的两个挂耳253b可以支承在键帽251的承载部251d上。按键支架253用于固定手感弹片254，还可以用于在键帽251移动至极限位置时对键帽251进行限位。
本实施例中，手感弹片254具有弹性形变性能，能够在受力时被压缩，当压力消失后回 弹。如图29所示，手感弹片254例如可以是圆顶弹片，该圆顶弹片可以由聚对苯二甲酸乙二醇酯(polyethylene glycol terephthalate，PET)片、锅仔片(或称按键弹片)、背胶、薄膜等构成。手感弹片254可具有弹性区254a，弹性区254a在不受压时可呈凸起状，在受压后内凹，当压力消失后恢复凸起状。
结合图29和图25所示，手感弹片254可以固定至按键支架253，弹性区254a可朝向凸点251b。
上文描述了开启键25的详细结构。下面将说明开启键25与第三主机壳体232的组装，以及开启键251与第一支架213b上的锁扣部213d的配合。
如图30和图31所示，开启键25可以安装至第三主机壳体232的开启键安装空间处。图30和图31所示的开启键25的状态对应主机2的闭合状态。
其中，如图31所示，按压部251a可从开启键安装空间的第一开口232d露出。结合图31和图23所示，导向部251c的一部分可位于导向槽232j内，但并未接触导向槽232j的底面。如图31所示，承载部251d中的与按压部251a间隔相对的一部分可以位于凹槽232k内。卡扣251e可以位于开启键安装空间内，并位于凹槽232k外。键帽251可以沿导向部251c的轴向移动，由于第一开口232d对按压部251a的限位作用，键帽251基本无法沿其他方向移动。
结合图31与图23所示，弹性件252套在导向部251c上，弹性件252的一部分可以位于导向槽232j内。弹性件252的一端接触按压部251a，另一端接触导向槽232j的底面。
如图31和图27所示，按键支架253可以与键帽251装配，并固定于开启键安装空间内。其中，按键支架253的支架主体253a可以位于键帽251的开放空间251g内并插入凹槽232i内，支架主体253a可与凹槽232i靠近第一开口232d的一侧的侧壁抵接。按键支架253的两个挂耳253b可以分别支承(或称搭接)在承载部251d的两侧。每个挂耳253b均可与承载部251d中的与按压部251a间隔相对的一部分抵持，使得键帽251无法继续向开启键安装空间外移动，此也即按键支架253对处于极限位置的键帽251的限位作用。每个挂耳253b均可与凹槽232k的侧壁的顶面(该侧壁朝向第一开口232d的面)抵接。由此，凹槽232i的侧壁与凹槽232k的侧壁可以从相反的方向对按键支架253进行限位，使得按键支架253基本无法沿导向槽232j的轴向移动。
如图31所示，手感弹片254可以固定至支架主体253a。手感弹片254可以插入凹槽232i内，或者手感弹片254也可以位于凹槽232i外。手感弹片254位于凸点251b与卡扣251e之间，手感弹片254的弹性区254a朝向凸点251b。手感弹片254与卡扣251e具有一定间距。
参考图31所示，当用户从按压部251a处按压键帽251时，键帽251将向开启键安装空间内运动。其中，导向部251c将向导向槽232j内移动，弹性件252逐渐被压缩。承载部251d将相对挂耳253b向凹槽232k内滑动，卡扣251e将向凹槽232k内移动。凸点251b将靠近手感弹片254，当凸点251b挤压弹性区254a并使弹性区254a发生弹性形变时，用户可以体验到手感反馈。
相反，当按压部251a不再受压时，弹性件252将反弹并推动键帽251将向开启键安装空间外运动。其中，导向部251c将向导向槽232j外移动，弹性件252逐渐伸长。承载部251d将相对挂耳253b向凹槽232k外滑动，卡扣251e将向凹槽232k外移动。凸点251b将远离手感弹片254。当承载部251d中的与按压部251a间隔相对的一部分与挂耳253b重新抵接后，键帽251停止运动。
图32为第一主机壳体213、第二主机壳体231、第三主机壳体232以及开启键25的组装 剖视示意图，其中为了清晰显示组装结构，未对第一主机壳体213做剖视。图33为图32中B处的局部放大示意图。
结合图33与图16所示，第一主机壳体213的第一支架213b上的锁扣部213d，可以穿过第二主机壳体231上的通孔231b，并进入到第三主机壳体232的开启键安装空间内，并且锁扣部213d可以与卡扣251e形成卡扣连接，该卡扣连接为可拆卸连接。由此，通过锁扣部213d与卡扣251e的配合，能够使第一主机壳体213保持与第三主机壳体232的闭合，也即能够实现主机2的第一部分21与第二部分23的闭合。
如图33所示，当用户按压按压部251a时，卡扣251e将移动并不再与锁扣部213d保持卡扣连接。此时，第一主机壳体213将在转轴组件22的驱动下自动张开。当用户欲合上第一部分21与第二部分23时，在锁扣部213d接触卡扣251e后，锁扣部213d可以挤压卡扣251e直到锁扣部213d再次与卡扣251e形成卡扣连接，此时第一部分21与第二部分23相锁合。
本实施例的开启键25，通过设计可往复移动的卡扣251e，能够实现主机2的打开与锁闭。通过设计手感弹片254，能够在打开主机2的过程中增加手感反馈，提升用户体验。
在其他实施例中，根据产品需要还可以通过具有其他结构的开启键，来实现主机的打开与锁闭。例如，可以将卡扣设在第一主机壳体的第一支架上(该卡扣对应上述的卡扣251e)，将锁扣部设在开启键中(例如将锁扣部设在键帽的承载部上，该锁扣部对应上述的锁扣部213d)。或者例如，可以使用扭簧机构向可动的键帽提供反弹力，在开启键的键帽上设计卡扣(或者锁扣部)，通过卡扣(或者锁扣部)与第一主机壳体的第一支架上的锁扣部(或者卡扣)的配合实现主机的开合。在其他实施例中，可以取消手感弹片。
另外，结合图33与图13所示，当第一部分21与第二部分23闭合时，第一支架213b与第二主机壳体231闭合并形成配合，第一支架213b上的密封圈213s抵接第二主机壳体231的周缘。由此，密封圈213s能够将第一支架213b与第二主机壳体231的间隙密封起来，避免外界水汽从该间隙进入主机2的内部。
在其他实施例中，容易理解，密封支架与密封圈也可以安装在第二主机壳体231的周缘，密封支架、密封圈及第二主机壳体的组装结构类似上文所述，此处不再赘述。当第一部分21与第二部分23闭合时，第二主机壳体231上的密封圈抵接第一支架的周缘，以将第二主机壳体231与第一支架213b的间隙密封起来。
或者与上述密封设计不同的是，在其他实施例中，可以不设密封支架213t，而是仅在第一支架213b或第二主机壳体231上设置密封圈，这样也可以将第一支架213b与第二主机壳体231的间隙密封。
如图6和图21所示，功能键24可以大致为圆柱体。功能键24可以装入第三主机壳体232的功能键安装通孔232e，并与第三主机壳体232活动连接。功能键24可以在功能键安装通孔232e内沿功能键安装通孔232e的轴线移动，和/或，功能键24可以绕功能键安装通孔232e的轴线转动。功能键24用于供用户按压和/或旋转，以使主机2实现相应的功能，如选择、确认、切换画面显示等。
如图34和图6所示，开启键25和功能键24可以组装至第三主机壳体232，第三主机壳体232又可与第二主机壳体231组装。第三主机壳体232的周侧壁232a围绕在第二主机壳体231与主机电池234的外周。结合图34和图16所示，第三主机壳体232的第二开口232c可与第二支架231a的通孔231b连通。第二支架231a的壁可以避让第三主机壳体232的转轴安装空间232f，以便安装转轴组件22。
第四主机壳体233
如图35、图36和图37所示，第四主机壳体233可以大致呈圆盘形。第四主机壳体233可以包括第三支架233a和镜片233b。其中，第三支架233a可以大致呈圆盘形。第三支架233a可以具有安装通孔233c。镜片233b安装在第三支架233a上，并遮盖安装通孔233c。镜片233b可供光电容积脉搏波描记(photoplethysmography，PPG)传感器(下文将会描述)发出的光线透过，以及供人体反射回来的光线透过。
第二主机电路板组件235
如图6所示，第二主机电路板组件235可以包括电路板及布置于其上的线路和器件。第二主机电路板组件235中的电路板例如可以是主机2的副电路板。该副电路板上例如可以布置PPG传感器等器件。如图6所示，第二主机电路板组件235可以安装在第四主机壳体233上。
无线充电线圈236
无线充电线圈236用于实现无线充电。无线充电线圈236可以安装在第四主机壳体233上。无线充电线圈236可与第二主机电路板组件235中的电路板电连接，例如无线充电线圈236的引脚可焊接至该电路板。如图6所示，示意性的，无线充电线圈236可以位于第二主机电路板组件235的外周。
如图5和图6所示，第四主机壳体233可以与第三主机壳体232组装固定，第四主机壳体233与第三主机壳体232共同将第二主机壳体231、主机电池234、第二主机电路板组件235和无线充电线圈236包围起来。其中，第二主机电路板组件235与无线充电线圈236可以均位于主机电池234与第四主机壳体233之间。
转轴组件22
如图38、图39和图40所示，在本实施例的实施方式一中，转轴组件22可以包括轴套222、凸点配合件227、从动件229、垫片225、弹性件228、第一轴221、限位件226、第二轴223和轴接触件224。
如图41所示，轴套222可大致为空心的长方体结构。轴套222可以具有第一外表面222a与第二外表面222f，二者为轴套222上的两个相交的外表面。在主机2中，轴套222的第一外表面222a所在的一侧可与第一部分21中的第一框体213a固定连接，并被第一部分21遮盖而不可见(下文将继续说明)。当主机2处于闭合状态时，第二外表面222f可作为主机2的外观面而被看到(下文将继续说明)。
如图41和图42所示，轴套222的内腔具有隔板222n，隔板222n将该内腔分为第一内腔222i和第二内腔222j。隔板222n上设有通孔222s，通孔222s将第一内腔222i和第二内腔222j连通。
如图42与图43所示，隔板222n朝向第一内腔222i的一侧的表面可以开设滑槽222q和若干配合槽222p，滑槽222q与所有配合槽222p可以连成圆环，该圆环位于通孔222s的外周，并可以与通孔222s同心。
如图42所示，配合槽222p可以是“凹坑”状，配合槽222p的内表面可以为弧面。全部配合槽222p可以沿圆弧线排布，全部配合槽222p可以分为两组，两组相隔，每组中的若干配合槽222p依次相连。两组中的配合槽222p数量可以一致，例如均可以为3个。每组中，相邻的两个配合槽222p具有共同的侧壁。该侧壁的边可以具有倒圆角。该侧壁的顶面还可以相对配合槽222p的开口所在的表面下陷(即存在段差)。
如图42和图43所示，滑槽222q可以是长条形槽，滑槽222q的延伸轨迹可以是圆弧线。滑槽222q可以有两个，两个滑槽222q均在同一圆周上。两个滑槽222q在圆周上的位置可以 是对称的，两个滑槽222q所对应的两个圆心角(滑槽222q的两端与圆周的中心的连线所成的夹角)可以是对顶角。两个滑槽222q与两组配合槽222p沿圆周交替排布，即两个滑槽222q与两组配合槽222p按照一个滑槽222q-一组配合槽222p-另一个滑槽222q-另一组配合槽222p的排布次序分布于圆周上。每个滑槽222q的一端与一组配合槽222p中的一个配合槽222p连接，该滑槽222q的另一端与另一组配合槽222p中一个配合槽222p连接。滑槽222q与配合槽222p之间可以有共同的侧壁；或者，二者之间没有侧壁，二者是连通的。
上文所述的滑槽222q的数量、构造和位置等设计，以及配合槽222p的数量、构造和位置等设计，仅仅是一种示意性说明，本实施例并不限于此。
本实施例中，滑槽222q与配合槽222p用于与凸点配合件227上的凸点配合(下文将会描述)。在其他实施例中，隔板222n可以不设滑槽222q与配合槽222p，转轴也可以不设凸点配合件227。
如图41和图42所示，第一内腔222i远离隔板222n的一端可以贯通轴套222，以形成开口222h。如图41和图43所示，第一内腔222i的内表面可以包括圆弧面a和两个平面b，两个平面b分别连接圆弧面a的相对两侧。圆弧面a与第一外表面222a距离较近，平面b与第一外表面222a距离较远。也即第一内腔222i具有近似拱门的形状，开口222h近似拱形。
如图41和图42所示，第二内腔222j可以包括相连通的第一区域222c与第二区域222d。第一区域222c位于隔板222n与第二区域222d之间。第一区域222c在第一外表面222a上形成开口222b。第二区域222d可以是轴线朝向隔板222n的圆孔。第二区域222d在第一外表面222a上形成开口222e，第二区域222d远离隔板222n的一端可以贯通轴套222。
如图41所示，轴套222的第一外表面222a还可以开设凹槽222k与凹槽222m，凹槽222k与凹槽222m分别位于第一区域222c的相对两侧，凹槽222m还可以位于第二区域222d的上方。凹槽222k朝向凹槽222m的一侧与第一区域222c连通，凹槽222m朝向凹槽222k的一侧与第一区域222c连通。
如图44所示，轴套222上的与第一外表面222a相对的一侧设有限位凸起222r。限位凸起222r的结构可以根据需要设计，本实施例不做限定。本实施例中，限位凸起222r可位于轴套222上的第一内腔222i所在的一侧。在其他实施例中，限位凸起222r的位置可根据需要灵活确定，不限于位于隔板222n靠近第一内腔222i的一侧。或者，可以不设限位凸起222r。
如图44所示，轴套222上的形成开口222h的表面还可以开设一个安装槽222g，该安装槽222g可与第一内腔222i连通。同样的，轴套222上的与开口222h相对的一端的表面也可以开设另一个安装槽222g，该另一个安装槽222g可与第二区域222d连通。安装槽222g用于安装轴接触件24(下文将继续说明)。在其他实施例中，安装槽222g的位置可根据需要灵活确定，不限于上文所述。或者，可以不设安装槽222g。
如图45所示，凸点配合件227的外形可大致为圆柱状。凸点配合件227的底面可设有凸点227a，凸点227a可以具有相对底面凸起的弧面。凸点227a的数量为至少一个，例如图45中示出了两个凸点227a。当凸点227a的数量为至少两个时，各个凸点227a可以沿圆周均匀间隔分布。凸点227a用于与轴套222的隔板222n上的滑槽222q及配合槽222p配合(下文将继续说明)。
如图45所示，凸点配合件227还可以具有通孔227b，通孔227b可沿凸点配合件227的中心线方向贯通凸点配合件227。本实施例中，通孔227b的内表面可以包括圆弧面227c、平面227d与平面227e，圆弧面227c的两侧分别与平面227d与平面227e连接，平面227d与平面227e可以形成夹角。凸点配合件227可安装在第一轴221上，通孔227b可与第一轴221 配合。上述结构的通孔227b可以使凸点配合件227能沿第一轴221移动，但无法相对第一轴221转动(下文将继续说明)。
在其他实施例中，转轴也可以不设凸点配合件227。
如图46和图47所示，从动件229可大致呈块状或片状。从动件229具有通孔229g，通孔229g的轴线大致沿从动件229的厚度方向。从动件229的厚度方向上的一侧的表面可称为轴配合面，该轴配合面可以形成两级阶梯，该轴配合面可以包括依次相连的第一斜面229a、平面229b和第二斜面229c(为凸显这三个区域，将这三个区域以阴影表示)，平面229b的法线可以沿通孔229g的轴线方向，第一斜面229a与平面229b形成钝角，平面229b与第二斜面229c形成钝角，第一斜面229a与第二斜面229c具有段差，第一斜面229a远离平面229b的一边可以高于平面229b，第二斜面229c远离平面229b的一边可以低于平面229b。
如图46所示，从动件229的该轴配合面可以包括两个第一斜面229a、两个平面和两个第二斜面229c，该轴配合面可以形成两个两级阶梯且可以沿该轴配合面的周向逐级向下延伸。两个两级阶梯可以间隔布置，例如两个两级阶梯可以关于通孔229g的中心对称。
如图48所示，从动件229的外侧面(该外侧面的法线指向通孔229g)可以近似呈拱形。该外侧面可以包括圆弧面229h、圆弧面229i、平面229d、平面229e和平面229f。其中，圆弧面229h与圆弧面229i可以作为拱形的顶部，二者可以关于通孔229g的轴线大致对称。平面229e可以作为拱形的底部。平面229f可以位于圆弧面229h与平面229e之间，平面229f的一边可与圆弧面229h连接。平面229d可以位于圆弧面229i与平面229e之间，平面229d的一边可与圆弧面229i连接。
从动件229可以安装在轴套222的第一内腔222i内，从动件229的外侧面具有上述结构，可以使从动件229在第一内腔222i内移动而不发生转动(下文将继续说明)。在其他实施例中，从动件229的外侧面可以具有其他合适的结构，只要能满足从动件229在第一内腔222i内移动而不发生转动的设计需求即可。
如图49和图50所示，垫片225可以大致呈片状。垫片225可以包括第一部分225a和第二部分225b，第一部分225a和第二部分225b可以相连(例如连为一体)，第一部分225a和第二部分225b例如可以形成夹角d，该夹角d例如大致为90°。第一部分225a和第二部分225b可以不在同一个平面内，第二部分225b可以与第一部分225a所在平面形成夹角e。例如，在图50视角中，第二部分225b可以相较第一部分225a向上翘起，并与第一部分225a所在平面形成夹角e(或者说与第一部分225a形成夹角e)。
垫片225的第一部分225a可以固定在轴套222的第一内腔222i内，垫片225的第二部分225b可与从动件229的平面229e抵接(下文将继续说明)。
如图51所示，第一轴221可以是一体式结构，其可以包括依次相连的第一部分221a、第二部分221b和第三部分221c。可以理解的是，图51中以三个虚线框分别区分第一部分221a、第二部分221b和第三部分221c，这仅仅为了直观地说明第一部分221a、第二部分221b和第三部分221c的大致位置，并非是在严格限定第一部分221a、第二部分221b和第三部分221c之间的边界。
如图51和图52所示，第一部分221a可以包括端部221d和主体部221g，端部221d和主体部221g均可以大致为圆柱体。其中，主体部221g与第二部分221b连接，端部221d远离第二部分221b。端部221d和主体部221g之间可以形成卡槽221e，卡槽221e可以环绕端部221d的轴线一周。卡槽221e的底面低于端部221d的外周面，也低于主体部221g的外周面。
如图51和图53所示，主体部221g靠近端部221d的一端可以形成凹陷空间221f，凹陷空间221f可以具有平面221i和平面221j，平面221i可以基本平行于端部221d的轴线，平面221j可以基本垂直于端部221d的轴线，平面221i可以与平面221j基本垂直。平面221j可以连接主体部221g的外周面以及平面221i。平面221i的两边均可与连接主体部221g的外周面连接。凹陷空间221f可以通过切削主体部221g的外周面形成。
如图53所示，凹陷空间221f可以有两个，两个凹陷空间221f可以具有一定间距。在其他实施例中，凹陷空间221f的数量不限于上文所述，例如可以为一个或三个以上。
本实施例中，主体部221g靠近端部221d的一端可与凸点配合件227的通孔227b配合，主体部221g的该端的表面可与通孔227b的内壁配合，使得凸点配合件227可沿主体部221g移动但无法转动(下文将继续说明)。在其他实施例中，若不设凸点配合件227，则主体部221g靠近端部221d的一端可以不形成凹陷空间221f。
如图51-图53所示，第二部分221b可具有外周面221h，外周面221h可以大致为圆柱面。本实施例中，第二部分221b可装入轴套22的第一内腔222i，外周面221h可与第一内腔222i的圆弧面a产生转动配合。
如图52和图53所示，第二部分221b朝向端部221d的一侧表面可以形成两级阶梯(图53中用阴影示意了该两级阶梯的表面)，该两级阶梯与上文所述的从动件229的两级阶梯的结构相似(或者说大致仿形)。结合图52、图46和图40所示，第二部分221b可与从动件229组装并形成凸轮机构，第二部分221b的两级阶梯中的面可与从动件229的两级阶梯中的面运动配合，使从动件229实现设定的运动(下文将继续说明)。
第三部分221c的结构可以根据需要设计，不限于图51-图53所示。第三部分221c用于固定至第三主机壳体232的内承台232g(下文将继续说明)。如图40所示，弹性件228是能提供反弹力的部件，例如可以是弹簧。
上文分别描述了轴套222、凸点配合件227、第一轴221、从动件229和弹性件228的结构，下面将说明上述部件的组装结构。
如图39、图45、图43和图46所示，从动件229、弹性件228和凸点配合件227均可以位于轴套222的第一内腔222i内。其中，凸点配合件227靠近轴套222的隔板222n，凸点配合件227的凸点227a可朝向隔板222n的滑槽222q(或朝向配合槽222p)。从动件229远离隔板222n，且从动件229的两级阶梯背向隔板222n。从动件229的圆弧面229h与圆弧面229i，均可与第一内腔222i的圆弧面a相对并形成配合，从动件229的平面229e和平面229f，均可与第一内腔222i的平面b相对并形成配合。由此，从动件229可以在第一内腔222i内移动，但无法相对第一内腔222i转动。
容易理解，从动件229与第一内腔222i的上述配合结构仅仅是一种举例，在其他实施例中可以根据需要设计其他合适的配合结构，来使得从动件229仅可以在第一内腔222i内移动，但无法相对第一内腔222i转动(下文将会说明从动件229可跟随轴套222转动)。
如图39所示，弹性件228位于从动件229和凸点配合件227之间，弹性件228的一端可以抵接从动件229，另一端可以抵接凸点配合件227。
如图51、图39、图41和图42所示，第一轴221的第一部分221a的主体部221g，以及第二部分221b均可以位于轴套222的第一内腔222i。第一部分221a的端部221d可以位于轴套222的第二内腔222j的第一区域222c，第一部分221a的卡槽221e的一部分或者全部可以位于第一区域222c。
如图51、图46、图45和图42所示，第一部分221a可穿过从动件229的通孔229g、弹 性件228、凸点配合件227的通孔227c以及隔板222n的通孔。第二部分221b的两级阶梯可朝向从动件229的两级阶梯，第二部分221b的两级阶梯可与从动件229的两级阶梯配合，以使第二部分221b与从动件229形成凸轮机构。
如图53和图45所示，主体部221g的一个凹陷空间221f的平面221i，可与凸点配合件227的通孔227b的平面227d相对并形成配合。主体部221g的另一个凹陷空间221f的平面221i，可与凸点配合件227的通孔227b的平面227e相对并形成配合。主体部221g的外周面可与凸点配合件227的通孔227b的圆弧面227c相对并形成配合。由此，凸点配合件227可以在第一内腔222i中沿主体部221g移动，但无法绕主体部221g转动。
容易理解，主体部221g与凸点配合件227的上述配合结构仅仅是一种举例，在其他实施例中可以根据需要设计其他合适的配合结构，以使凸点配合件227仅可沿主体部221g移动但无法绕主体部221g转动。
结合图51与图39所示，第一轴221的第三部分221c可位于轴套222的外部。
图54可以较为直观的表示第一轴221、从动件229、弹性件228和凸点配合件227的组装结构。
如图39和图50所示，垫片225可以固定在轴套222的第一内腔222i。垫片225的第一部分225a可以位于第一轴221的第三部分221c与轴套222之间。垫片225的第二部分225b可以位于从动件229与轴套222之间。在从动件229的整个运动过程中，第二部分225b可以始终与从动件229抵接。由于第二部分225b是相对第一部分225a翘起的，因此第二部分225b能将从动件229向轴套222的第一内腔222i的内表面抵压，使得从动件229与第一内腔222i的内表面紧密配合，这样能够避免由于制造误差导致从动件229在运动时发生晃动。在其他实施例中，根据实际需要，可以不设垫片225。
如图55所示，限位件226可基本呈板状，限位件226的结构可以根据需要设计，例如限位件226的外形轮廓可与轴套22的第二内腔222i的第一区域222c的形状适配。限位件226上可以形成开口226a。
结合图55、图39与图52所示，限位件226可以位于轴套22的第二内腔222i的第一区域222c并接触轴套22的隔板222n，限位件226的开口226a的边沿可以卡入第一轴221的第一部分221a的卡槽221e。由此，限位件226能够对第一轴221起到限位作用，防止第一轴221从轴套22中脱离，保证第一轴221与轴套22的相对位置不变，进而保证从动件229、弹性件228和凸点配合件227与轴套22的可靠组装。
如图56、图57与图58所示，第二轴223可以是一体式结构，其可以包括依次相连的第一部分223a、第二部分223b和第三部分223c。可以理解的是，图56中以三个虚线框分别区分第一部分223a、第二部分223b和第三部分223c，这仅仅为了直观地说明第一部分223a、第二部分223b和第三部分223c的大致位置，并非是在严格限定第一部分223a、第二部分223b和第三部分223c之间的分界。
如图56-图58所示，第一部分223a与第二部分223b均可以大致为圆柱体。第三部分223c的结构可以根据需要设计，图56-图58所示仅仅是一种示意。第二轴223上可以形成通道223d，通道223d可以基本沿第一部分223a的轴向延伸。通道223d可以贯通第一部分223a的径向上的相对的两端，以及沿第二部分223b的径向贯通第二部分223b与第三部分223c的一端。由此，第一部分223a可以被通道223d分为完全断开的两部分，第二部分223b与第三部分223c均可以被通道223d分为相连的两部分。
如图57和图58所示，第一部分223a远离第二部分223b的一端具有凹槽223e，凹槽223e 具体可以开设在通道223d的内表面。凹槽223e可以有两个，第一部分223a的每一部分均具有一个凹槽223e，两个凹槽223e的开口相向。
本实施例中，第二轴223上可安装柔性电路板。下文将详细描述。
图59、图60和图61表示柔性电路板26弯折和卷绕后的示意性结构(柔性电路板26安装至第二轴223后会被弯折和卷绕)，实际上柔性电路板26在安装至第二轴223之前是展平状态，在展平状态下柔性电路板26可以大致是长条片状结构。
如图59-图61所示，柔性电路板26可以包括电连接端261与电连接端263，当柔性电路板26展平后，电连接端261与电连接端263分别为柔性电路板26的延伸方向上的两端。电连接端261与电连接端263均用于传输电信号，二者均可以包括连接器。
示意性的，电连接端261可与第一主机电路板组件212连接，例如电连接端261的连接器可与第一主机电路板组件212的电路板212a上的连接器连接，以将柔性电路板26与第一主机电路板组件212电连接。
示意性的，电连接端263可与第二主机电路板组件235、连接功能键24与马达的柔性电路板(示意性的，功能键24与该马达可共用同一个柔性电路板)等均电连接。其中，连接功能键24与该马达的该柔性电路板例如可以固定在第二支架231a的背离第三容纳槽231f的开口的一侧。该柔性电路板上还可以布置磁场传感器(例如霍尔传感器或者磁力计)，该磁场传感器例如可以有两个，两个该磁场传感器可以分别靠近第三容纳槽231f的槽壁与第四容纳槽231g的槽壁。
如图59-图61所示，柔性电路板26还可以包括连接部分264和安装部分262，连接部分264连接安装部分262与电连接端261，安装部分262还与电连接端263相连。
如图59-图61所示，连接部分264具有接地部264a和限位部264b。其中，接地部264a例如可以距离电连接端261较近，限位部264b例如可以距离电连接端261较远。限位部264b例如可以呈凸耳状。限位部264b例如可以有两个，两个限位部264b分别位于连接部分264的两侧的边缘。
如图59-图61所示，安装部分262用于与第二轴223配合，并可呈弯折和卷绕状态。例如在图59视角中，安装部分262的一部分可以对折形成叠层，因此可将该部分称为叠层部分。安装部分262的另一部分可以与该叠层部分连接并卷绕成环，因此可将该部分称为卷绕部分。卷绕部分可以位于叠层部分的一端。可以理解的是，图59中以虚线框标明安装部分262，这仅仅为了直观地说明安装部分262的大致位置，并非是在严格限定安装部分262的边界。
本实施例中，柔性电路板26内的布线数量需要满足设计要求，而柔性电路板26的宽度尺寸会影响柔性电路板26内的布线数量，因而柔性电路板26的宽度尺寸(例如最小宽度尺寸)需要满足设计要求。图59和图62示意出了柔性电路板26的安装部分262的卷绕部分的宽度尺寸W1和叠层部分的折叠宽度尺寸W2(叠层部分展开的展开宽度近似为2*W2)，其中卷绕部分的宽度尺寸W1和叠层部分的折叠宽度尺寸W2可以根据需要设计。
如图59-图61所示，柔性电路板26还可以包括分隔支架266。分隔支架266的结构可以根据需要设计，例如大致为平板状。分隔支架266的数量可以根据需要确定，可以为单个，也可以为至少两个。分隔支架266夹在叠层部分的对折的层之间，每层均可与分隔支架266连接(例如粘接)。
本实施例中，叠层部分的展开宽度总体上较小，叠层部分折叠后不易保持折叠形态(对折的层容易翘起)。但是，由于设有分隔支架266，分隔支架266能使得叠层部分保持折叠形态。另外，分隔支架266也能限制叠层部分的弯折半径，避免叠层部分弯折过度导致损坏。 在其他实施例中，根据产品需要，可以不设分隔支架266。如图59和图61所示，柔性电路板26还可以包括防护层265，防护层265例如可以贴附于叠层部分的表面，并可以位于叠层部分远离卷绕部分的一端。防护层265的材料例如可以是麦拉(mylar)。本实施例中，防护层265的位置及材料也可以根据产品需要设计，不限于上文所述。
本实施例中，叠层部分可以固定至第三主机壳体232，防护层265可以将叠层部分与第三主机壳体232隔开，防止叠层部分与第三主机壳体232摩擦而导致柔性电路板26损坏(下文将继续说明)。另外，防护层265还可以对叠层部分起到一定的结构加强作用。在其他实施例中，根据产品需要，可以不设防护层265。
图62和图63表示柔性电路板26与第二轴223的组装结构。在将柔性电路板26与第二轴223组装时，可以先将展平状态的柔性电路板26的安装部分262的叠层部分对折，此时安装部分262的卷绕部分可以继续保持展平状态。结合图62、图63和图58，然后，将整个安装部分262从第二轴223的第三部分223c这一端装入第二轴223的通道223d，使安装部分262的卷绕部分定位至第二轴223的第一部分223a。此时，可将该卷绕部分弯折使其卷绕在第一部分223a的外周，卷绕的圈数可以根据实际需要确定。卷绕完成后，该卷绕部分与第一部分223a远离第二部分223b的端部具有一定距离(即该卷绕部分未将第一部分223a的该端部遮盖)，这有利于避免该卷绕部分被刮擦而影响寿命(下文将继续说明)。柔性电路板26的电连接端261与电连接端263均位于第二轴223的外部。电连接端261与电连接端263可以被弯折，以便适应主机2的内部空间。柔性电路板26的防护层265与连接部分264也可以外露于第二轴223。
本实施例中，柔性电路板26的该卷绕部分的内圈直接接触第二轴223的第一部分223a，该卷绕部分与该叠层部分的接合处可以固定至第一部分223a，固定方式例如可以是粘接。该卷绕部分的其他区域可以不固定并保持自然卷绕状态，该区域可以松弛以使该部分的直径增大，或收紧以使该部分的直径减小。
本实施例中，由于柔性电路板26的该卷绕部分卷绕在第二轴223的第一部分223a上，该卷绕部分的宽度尺寸W1可通过第一部分223a的轴向尺寸得以保证。由于柔性电路板26的该叠层部分以折叠状态收容在第二轴223的通道223d内，使得第二轴223只需要较小的空间就能容纳展开宽度为2*W2的该叠层部分，有利于实现第二轴223的小型化，进而有利于实现主机2的小型化。
综上所述，通过设计如上结构的第二轴223，并将柔性电路板26以弯折和卷绕的方式安装至第二轴223，既能实现主机2的电连接，还能保证柔性电路板26的宽度尺寸符合设计要求，又有利于实现主机2的小型化。
本实施例中，安装有柔性电路板26的第二轴223可以安装至轴套222的第二内腔222j。
其中，结合图57和图67所示，第二轴223的第一部分223a位于轴套222的第一区域222c。第二轴223的第二部分223b可位于第二内腔222j的第二区域222d。第二部分223b的外周面可与第二区域222d的内表面形成转动配合，即第二部分223b的外周面可与第二区域222d的内表面接触或者不接触(具有较小间隙)，第二区域222d的内表面可相对第二部分223b的外周面转动。第二轴223的第三部分223c位于轴套222的外部。
其中，如图59、图64和图67所示，柔性电路板26的该卷绕部分均位于第一区域222c。柔性电路板26的该叠层部分的一部分位于第一区域222c和第二区域222d，该叠层部分的另一部分位于轴套222的外部。柔性电路板26的电连接端261与电连接端263均位于轴套222的外部。柔性电路板26的连接部分264可穿过第一区域222c的开口，连接部分264的接地 部264a和限位部264b均位于轴套222之外。
结合图64所示，本实施例中，柔性电路板26的电连接端261可以固定至第一主机电路板组件212，电连接端261可跟随主机2的第一部分21运动。因而，与电连接端261相连的连接部分264也会跟随电连接端261运动。为了使连接部分264能按照设计要求运动，保证连接部分264的运动可控，也避免连接部分264产生疲劳损坏，可以通过夹持件将连接部分264夹住，以对连接部分264进行限位。下面将进行说明。
如图65所示，夹持件27可大致呈片状，其上可开设夹缝27a，夹缝27a可以基本呈直线状，夹缝27a的一端贯通夹持件27，另一端并未贯通夹持件27。夹持件27可采用具有较好的绝缘性、抗潮湿的材料制造，例如麦拉片(mylar)。
如图65和图66所示，连接部分264可穿入夹持件27的夹缝27a，连接部分264的限位部264b可以卡持在夹缝27a的边沿，夹持件27可固定至轴套222的凹槽222k与凹槽222m内，夹持件27遮盖第一区域222c的至少一部分区域。由此，夹持件27能够将连接部分264夹持住，并对连接部分264进行限位。当连接部分264运动时，由于存在夹持件27，连接部分264的运动行程将会符合设计要求，也不易产生疲劳损坏。另外，设计限位部264b也便于产线组装时准确地将夹持件27与柔性电路板26进行定位，保证组装良率。在其他实施例中，通过夹持件27将连接部分264夹住的设计可以取消。
上文描述了第二轴223、柔性电路板26、轴套222和夹持件27的结构及组装，下面将说明转轴组件22的整体组装结构，以及柔性电路板26、第二轴223以及第一轴221之间的组装关系。
图67表示转轴组件22与柔性电路板26和夹持件27的剖视组装结构，其中为了清晰表示柔性电路板26，未对柔性电路板26做剖视。如图67所示，第一轴221、从动件229、弹性件228、凸点配合件227、轴套222之间的组装关系，以及第二轴223、柔性电路板26、夹持件27、轴套222之间的组装关系，均已经在上文进行过说明，此处不再重复。上文已经说明，第二轴223的第一部分223a的端部未被柔性电路板26的该卷绕部分遮盖，这便于第一轴221的端部221d插入到第二轴223的第一部分223a的凹槽223e内。端部221d与该卷绕部分可以在第一轴221的轴向上具有一定间隙，以避免端部221d与该卷绕部分干涉。
另外，如图44和图38以及图40所示，轴套222靠近第一轴221的第二部分221b的安装槽222g内可以固定一个轴接触件224，轴接触件224与第二部分221b接触。类似的，轴套222靠近第二轴223的第二部分223b的凹槽内可以固定另一个轴接触件224，该轴接触件224与第二部分223b接触(由于视角原因，组装在轴套222靠近第二部分223b的凹槽，以及该凹槽内的轴接触件224并未显示)。本实施例中，轴接触件224可以是导体，例如可以是金属弹片。
下面将逐步说明转轴组件22、柔性电路板26、主机2的第一部分21以及第二部分23的组装结构。
如图68所示，第一轴221的第三部分221c与第二轴223的第三部分223c，均可以固定至第三主机壳体232的内承台232g。轴套222可以位于第三主机壳体232的转轴安装空间232f，轴套222可以在转轴安装空间232f内转动。轴套222的第二外表面222f可以朝向第三主机壳体232的周侧壁232a的外侧。柔性电路板26的电连接端261可以位于周侧壁232a的内侧。
结合图67与图68所示，柔性电路板26的电连接端263可以位于周侧壁232a的内侧，并固定至内承台232g。例如，电连接端263可以具有粘胶，电连接端263可以粘接至内承台232g。结合图67、图24与图68所示，柔性电路板26的防护层265可位于周侧壁232a的内 侧，并位于周侧壁232a与柔性电路板26的叠层部分之间，防止叠层部分与周侧壁232a直接接触而产生摩擦，避免柔性电路板26由于摩擦而损坏。
如图69所示，第二主机壳体231的第二支架231a可与第三主机壳体232组装固定，第二主机壳体231可位于周侧壁232a的内侧。在图69的视角中，第二支架231a上的第三容纳槽231f的开口与第四容纳槽231g的开口朝上。第二支架231a将第一轴221的第三部分221c以及第二轴223的第三部分223c均遮盖。第二支架231a的通孔231b与轴套222可分别大致位于周侧壁232a的同一条直径的相对两端。结合图69与图68所示，通孔231b可与第三主机壳体232的第二开口232c连通。
结合图70与图69所示，第一主机壳体213可覆盖第二主机壳体231与第三主机壳体232。在图70的视角中，第一主机壳体213的第一支架213b的第一容纳槽213y的开口与第二容纳槽213x的开口可以朝下。本实施例中，第一容纳槽213y的开口可以朝向第三容纳槽231f的开口，且第一容纳槽213y的开口与第三容纳槽231f的开口可以对准。第二容纳槽213x的开口可以朝向第四容纳槽231g的开口，且第二容纳槽213x的开口与第四容纳槽231g的开口可以对准。
结合图70和图69所示，第一主机壳体213中的第一框体213a可与轴套222具有第一外表面222a的一侧固定连接，第一框体213a可以遮盖第一外表面222a的一部分区域与夹持件27的一部分区域。第一外表面222a的另一部分区域与夹持件27的另一部分区域可从第一框体213a的通孔213z中露出。柔性电路板26的电连接端261与连接部分264可穿过第一框体213a的通孔213z。其中，电连接端261可与第一主机电路板组件212的电路板连接，以使柔性电路板26与第一主机电路板组件212电连接。连接部分264的接地部264a可穿过通孔213z，并通过导体与第一框体213a连接，该导体例如可以是导电泡棉或者导电胶。这样使得柔性电路板26能够接地，从而避免对主机2的天线辐射性能造成干扰(下文将继续说明)。连接部分264的限位部264b位于通孔213z内。
如图71和图69所示，第一框体213a的通孔213z内可以填充密封材料(用阴影表示)，密封材料可以填满通孔213z并覆盖第一外表面222a和夹持件27的表面，且密封材料包围柔性电路板26的连接部分264。密封材料例如可以是密封胶。密封材料具有密封作用，能够防止水分经第一框体213a的通孔213z侵入电连接端261与第一主机电路板组件212。其中，该水分可能来自外界，外界的水分可能经轴套222与周侧壁232a之间的装配缝隙进入到通孔处。该水分还可能来自主机2内部，主机2内部的水分可能经轴套222与第二支架231a之间的装配间隙进入到通孔处。
在其他实施例中，可以调整结构设计(例如调整第一框体213a的通孔的位置和/或尺寸)，使得只有夹持件27的一部分区域可从第一框体213a的通孔213z露出，轴套222的第一外表面222a完全被第一框体213a遮盖。相应的，通孔213z内的密封材料只覆盖夹持件27的表面。或者在其他实施例中，根据实际需要，第一框体213a可以不开设通孔213z，可以无需填充密封材料进行密封。
如图72所示，显示屏211安装在第一主机壳体213上。结合图72、图70和图6所示，显示屏211可以遮盖第一主机壳体213的第一支架213b、第一主机电路板组件212、柔性电路板26的电连接端261与连接部分264，以及第一主机壳体213的第一框体213a的一部分，第一框体213a的周缘可以环绕在显示屏211的外周。另外，图72示意了主机2的闭合状态，轴套222的第二外表面222f可作为主机2的外观面而被看到。
综上所述，在主机2中，转轴组件22的轴套222与第一部分21固定连接，转轴组件22 的第一轴221、第二轴223均与第二部分23固定连接，第一部分21可同轴套222一起绕第一轴221和第二轴223转动。
下面将说明主机2在开合过程中，主机2中产生的机构运动。
图73为处于闭合状态的主机2的侧视示意图，图74为图73中的主机2的转轴组件22的俯视示意图。图73与图74中为了显示转轴组件22的内部状态，将轴套222剖开显示。应注意，图73中轴套222的剖面与图74中轴套222的剖面是相互垂直的。图75为图74中B处的局部放大示意图。
如上所述，在主机2处于闭合状态时，第一部分21中的锁扣部213d与开启键25的卡扣251e形成卡扣连接，使得第一部分21被第二部分23锁定。
如图73和图75所示，在主机2处于闭合状态时，弹性件228的一端抵压从动件229，使得从动件229与第二部分221b保持接触。从动件229的第一斜面229a的顶部(即第一斜面229a远离平面229b的一端)，可与第一轴221的第二部分221b的斜面221k的顶部(即斜面221k靠近平面221m的一端)接触，从动件229的平面229b与第二部分221b的平面221m具有间隙。斜面221k对第一斜面229a的作用力可以使从动件229具有沿打开方向转动的趋势，主机2的第一部分21可以沿该打开方向转动以相对第二部分23张开。
如图75所示，由于从动件229与轴套222的配合，当从动件229具有沿顺时针方向转动的趋势时，轴套222也具有沿打开方向转动的趋势。轴套222与第一部分21固定连接，因此第一部分21也具有沿打开方向转动的趋势。但是，由于第一部分21被第二部分23锁定，因此第一部分21实际上无法沿打开方向转动。
如图75所示，弹性件228的另一端抵压凸点配合件227，使得凸点配合件227抵接隔板222n。
图76为图75的A-A剖视结构示意图，图76表示主机2处于闭合状态时凸点配合件227与隔板222n的剖视配合结构，其中将凸点配合件227上的凸点227a以虚线示意。如图76所示，凸点227a位于隔板222n上的滑槽222q内，凸点227a与配合槽222p具有一定间距。
当用户按压开启键25的键帽251时，开启键25的卡扣251e与第一部分21的锁扣部213d将不再形成卡扣连接，第一部分21不再被第二部分23锁定。此时，第一部分21将开始第一段转动行程。
如图77所示(图77中为了清晰表示从动件229与第二部分221b的配合，未显示轴套222，下同)，在弹性件228与斜面221k的共同作用下，从动件229将做复合运动。从动件229将沿打开方向转动同时朝向第二部分221b移动，直至第一斜面229a的根部(即第一斜面229a与平面229b连接的一端)与斜面221k的顶部接触、平面229b与平面221m接触(可以通过结构设计，忽略惯性对从动件229的位置的影响)。结合图73所示，从动件229运动时，轴套222和第一部分21也会沿打开方向绕第二部分221b转动。
如图73和图2所示，当从动件229、轴套222和第一部分21停止转动时，第一部分21将完成第一段转动行程，第一部分21将相对第二部分23张开角度a，角度a例如可以为15°左右。容易理解，在第一段转动行程中，第一部分21是被轴套222驱动而发生转动，因此第一部分21是自动转动的，无需用户施加外力。
结合图76与图78所示，在第一段转动行程中，由于轴套222与凸点配合件227产生相对转动，凸点配合件227的凸点227a将会在滑槽222q内滑动，并逐渐靠近配合槽222p。截止第一段转动行程结束时，凸点227a可以刚好达到滑槽222q与配合槽222p的结合处(如图78所示)。在第一段转动行程中，凸点227a始终是在滑槽222q内平稳滑动，凸点配合件227 与轴套222之间不会产生沿轴套222的转轴方向的位移(或称颠簸)，凸点配合件227不会对轴套222产生冲击。因此，当用户触摸第一部分21时，用户体验不到手感反馈。
或者在其他实施例中，截止第一段转动行程结束时，凸点227a可以进入到配合槽222p中，当凸点227a由滑槽222q进入第一个配合槽222p时，凸点配合件227与轴套222之间会产生沿轴套222的转轴方向的位移，凸点配合件227会对轴套222产生冲击。因此，若用户触摸第一部分21，用户可以体验到手感反馈。
如图77所示，当第一部分21相对第二部分23张开角度a后，平面229b与平面221m接触，弹性件228及第一轴221向从动件229施加的沿主体部221g的轴线方向的合力为零，因此仅仅依靠弹性件228与第一轴221无法继续驱动从动件229转动，也即第一部分21无法继续自动转动。此时，用户可以沿打开方向转动第一部分21。第一部分21可带动轴套222沿打开方向转动，轴套222又可以驱动从动件229沿打开方向转动。容易理解，在从动件229的转动过程中，平面229b与平面221m滑动接触，因此从动件229仅发生转动，在主体部221g的轴线方向上没有位移。
如图79所示，当平面229b远离第一斜面229a的一端与斜面221k的顶端接触时(或者说第二斜面229c的顶端与斜面221k的顶端接触)，第一部分21可以完成第二段行程。如图3所示，当完成第二段行程时，第一部分21将相对第二部分23张开角度b，角度b例如可以为75°左右。如上所述，在第二段行程中，第一部分21是需要用户手动转动的。
结合图78与图80所示，在第二段转动行程中，凸点227a将会依次进入各个配合槽222p。截止第二段转动行程结束时，凸点227a可以从一个配合槽222p滑出并进入滑槽222q中。在第二段转动行程中，凸点227a进出各个配合槽222p时，凸点配合件227与轴套222之间会产生沿轴套222的转轴方向的位移，凸点配合件227会对轴套222产生冲击。因此，用户可以体验到手感反馈。
如3所示，当第一部分21相对第二部分23张开角度b后，第一部分21可以开始进入第三段行程。第一部分21在第三段行程内的转动特性类似在第一段行程内的转动特性，第一部分21在第三段行程内也是自动转动的。下面将详细说明。
如图79和图81所示，当第三段行程开始时，第二斜面229c的顶端与斜面221k的顶端接触。在弹性件228与斜面221k的共同作用下，从动件229将做复合运动。从动件229将沿打开方向转动同时朝向第二部分221b移动，直至第二斜面229c的根部(即第二斜面229c背离平面229b的一端)与斜面221k的顶部接触。从动件229运动时，轴套222和第一部分21也会沿打开方向绕第二部分221b转动。
如图83和图84所示，轴套222上的限位凸起222r可进入第三主机壳体232的限位凹槽232h，且限位凸起222r与限位凹槽232h的内壁抵持，此时轴套222无法继续沿打开方向转动，因此第一部分21也停止转动。
当从动件229、轴套222和第一部分21停止转动时，第一部分21将完成第三段转动行程，如图5所示，第一部分21将相对第二部分23张开角度c，角度c例如可以为90°左右。容易理解，在第三段行程中，第一部分21是被轴套222驱动而发生转动，因此第一部分21是自动转动的，无需用户施加外力。
本实施例中，使用限位凹槽232h与限位凸起222r的配合，能够通过第三主机壳体232来对第一部分21进行运动限位。由于第三主机壳体232的体积较大(相较转轴组件22而言)，结构强度也较好，使得限位凹槽232h与限位凸起222r的装配可靠性较高，因而有利于保证主机2的配合可靠性。可以理解的是，根据实际需要，在其他实施例中可以依靠从动件的两 级阶梯与第一轴221的两级阶梯的配合来使第一部分21在达到第三段行程末尾时停止转动，无需在轴套上设计限位凸起222r，也无需在第三主机壳体232上开设限位凹槽232h。
结合图80与图82所示，在第三段转动行程中，凸点227a将会在滑槽222q内平稳滑动，凸点配合件227与轴套222之间不会产生沿轴套222的转轴方向的位移，凸点配合件227不会对轴套222产生冲击。因此，当用户触摸第一部分21时，用户体验不到手感反馈。
结合图73、图67与图62所示，在第一部分21的打开过程中，柔性电路板26的电连接端261将随第一部分21转动，柔性电路板26的该卷绕部分可以逐渐松弛，该卷绕部分的直径可以逐渐增大。
根据上文对主机2的打开过程的说明容易理解，将打开的第一部分21闭合的全过程，均需要沿该打开方向的反方向手动转动第一部分21，直至第一部分21与开启键锁扣。其中，在第一部分21的张角由角度b减小至角度a的行程中，由于凸点227a依次滑入和滑出各个配合槽222p，凸点配合件227会对轴套222产生冲击，因此存在手感反馈。在其他行程中，由于凸点227a在滑槽222q内平稳滑动，凸点配合件227不会对轴套222产生冲击，因而无手感反馈。另外，在第一部分21的闭合过程中，柔性电路板26的电连接端261将随第一部分21转动，柔性电路板26的该卷绕部分可以逐渐收紧，该卷绕部分的直径可以逐渐减小。
根据上文描述容易理解，转轴组件22中的第一轴221、从动件229、弹性件228和轴套222的组装结构，用于构造凸轮机构并实现主机2的开合。转轴组件22中的第二轴223用于安装和缠绕柔性电路板26。本实施例通过分别设计第一轴221与第二轴223这两个轴，便于将柔性电路板26组装至第二轴223以及轴套222。
由于制造误差，第一轴221与第二轴223组装后可能并未对心(第一轴221的轴线与第二轴223的轴线不重合)，若没有相应的措施，会导致转轴组件22在发生机构运动时产生应力，降低转轴组件22的可靠性，还可能导致异响。本实施例中，通过使第一轴221的端部221d与第二轴223的凹槽223e配合，能够吸收组装公差，从而减少或者避免由于不对心导致的应力。
与本实施例不同的是，其他实施例中的第一轴与第二轴可以不连接，该第二轴的端部可以不设用于容纳第一轴的端部的凹槽。或者在其他实施例中，可以没有柔性电路板缠绕于轴的设计，可以用一体式的单个轴来替代第一轴221与第二轴223。此时，可以取消限位件226。
根据上文描述容易理解，转轴组件22中的弹性件228、凸点配合件227和轴套222的组装结构，用于实现主机2开合过程中的手感反馈。在其他实施例中，可以取消该手感反馈设计，即可以取消凸点配合件227以及轴套222的隔板222n上的滑槽222q和配合槽222p。此时，弹性件可以直接抵接隔板222n。
本实施例中，当轴套222转动时，轴套222上安装的轴接触件224跟随轴套222一起转动，同时轴接触件224保持与第一轴221以及第二轴223的接触，也即轴接触件224与第一轴221以及第二轴223滑动接触。
主机2的天线系统的两种馈电路径
本实施例中，主机2的第一框体213a与第三主机壳体232均可以作为主机2的天线系统中的天线。下面将说明主机2的天线系统的两种馈电路径。
如图70所示，第一框体213a可与第一主机电路板组件212的馈电弹片212f接触，由此射频信号能通过馈电弹片212f馈入第一框体213a。另外，第一框体213a可与第一主机电路板组件212的接地弹片212b、接地弹片212c、接地弹片212d、接地弹片212e均接触，由此第一框体213a能够实现接地。从而，第一框体213a能够成为天线。
由上文所述，第一框体213a与轴套222连接，轴套222上的轴接触件224与第一轴221以及第二轴223均接触，第一轴221及第二轴223均与第三主机壳体232连接。因此，射频信号能从第一框体213a经轴套222、轴接触件224、第一轴221以及第二轴223传输至第三主机壳体232。因此，第三主机壳体232也能够成为天线。
可见，从第一主机电路板组件212起，中间经过实体机械结构到第一框体213a与第三主机壳体232，形成天线系统的第一种馈电路径。
当主机2呈闭合状态时，在第一框体213a的轴向(或者说主机2的厚度方向)上，第一框体213a与第三主机壳体232之间存在微小的间隙，该间隙例如为0.1mm。由于存在该间隙，第一框体213a可通过耦合向第三主机壳体232馈电，使得第三主机壳体232能够成为天线。
可见，从第一主机电路板组件212起，中间经过实体机械结构到第一框体213a，再通过电耦合到第三主机壳体232，形成天线系统的第二种馈电路径。
当主机2在闭合状态下，第二种馈电路径中第三主机壳体232的辐射较强，主机2通过第三主机壳体232与第一框体213a共同保证天线性能。当主机2在打开状态下，第二种馈电路径中第三主机壳体232的辐射较弱，此时主要依靠第一框体213a的辐射来保证天线性能。但是，相较于主机2的闭合状态，主机2在打开状态下天线系统的辐射方向发生变化，能够满足主机2在打开状态下的通信需求。因此，本实施例通过设计两种天线系统的馈电路径，能够满足主机2在打开状态下与闭合状态下的不同通信需求，保证主机2在不同状态下的天线性能。
容易理解，在其他实施例中，可以没有第二种馈电路径，即第一框体213a不会通过耦合向第三主机壳体232馈电。
本实施例中，柔性电路板26可对第一框体213a及第三主机壳体232的辐射性能造成干扰，尤其是柔性电路板26的长度较大干扰越严重。如上文所述，可以使柔性电路板26的接地部264a通过导体与第一框体213a连接，这样能够将柔性电路板26接地，从而避免柔性电路板26对主机2的天线辐射性能的干扰。在其他实施例中，根据产品需要，可不对柔性电路板26做上述接地设计。
耳机3
本实施例中，第一耳机31与第二耳机32的结构可以完全一致。下文将以第一耳机31为例进行描述。
如图85和图86所示，第一耳机31可以包括耳塞311、耳塞支架组件316、第一电极312、耳机前壳组件313、第二电极314、耳机后壳组件315以及电子组件317。其中，耳塞支架组件316与第一电极312均可以安装于耳机前壳组件313的一端，第二电极314与耳机后壳组件315均可安装于耳机前壳组件313的另一端。耳塞311与耳塞支架组件316位于耳机前壳组件313的同一端，且耳塞311安装于耳塞支架组件316远离耳机前壳组件313的一端。电子组件317可以安装在耳塞支架组件316、第一电极312、耳机前壳组件313、第二电极314以及耳机后壳组件315所围的空间内。
下文先说明第一耳机31中的耳塞311、耳塞支架组件316、第一电极312、耳机前壳组件313、第二电极314、耳机后壳组件315的结构与组装，再说明电子组件317的结构与组装。
如图85所示，本实施例中，第一电极312、耳机前壳组件313、第二电极314与耳机后壳组件315可以大致形成八面体的外观造型，该八面体的外周面可以包括平面与弧面，平面与弧面相连并交替排列围成一周(也即每个平面均连接于两个弧面之间，每个弧面均连接于两个平面之间)。第一耳机31的该八面体外观造型是一种中心对称的外形。在其他实施例中， 第一耳机也可以具有其他中心对称的外观造型，例如第一耳机大致为圆柱状或四面体状等。
本实施例中，第一耳机31的径向尺寸可以大于第一容纳槽213y的槽深，例如第一耳机31的径向尺寸可以至少为第一容纳槽213y的槽深的两倍。其中，该径向尺寸可以为第一耳机31上正对的两个平面的间距。
耳机前壳组件313
如图87、图88和图89所示，耳机前壳组件313可以包括耳机前壳313z、降噪麦克风网313j和耳机磁体313g。
如图87和图88所示，耳机前壳313z可以是中空且两端开口的筒状结构。耳机前壳313z可以包括依次相连的第一部分313a、第二部分313b和第三部分313c。第一部分313a的周向长度可以小于第二部分313b的周向长度，第二部分313b的周向长度可以小于第三部分313c的周向长度。其中，周向长度指环绕耳机前壳313z的筒状结构的中心线方向的尺寸。第三部分313c可以大致为八面体筒状结构，第三部分313c的壁可以包括平整部分与弧形部分，平整部分与弧形部分相连并交替排列围成一周(也即每个平整部分均连接于两个弧形部分之间，每个弧形部分均连接于两个平整部分之间)。
如图87和图90所示，第一部分313a远离第二部分313b的一端可以形成安装槽313f，安装槽313f可以环绕一周。耳机前壳313z的壁内还可以开设拾音通道313e，拾音通道313e可以大致沿直线延伸。拾音通道313e的一端贯通安装槽313f的底面，拾音通道313e的另一端与耳机前壳313z的内腔连通。第二部分313b上可以开设通孔313d，通孔313d与耳机前壳313z的内腔连通。
降噪麦克风网313j
降噪麦克风网313j可以大致呈片状，其可以包括若干层材料，例如声学网布、胶层等。如图89和图90所示，降噪麦克风网313j可以固定至耳机前壳313z内，并封盖拾音通道313e远离安装槽313f的一端，拾音通道313e内的声音可以透过降噪麦克风网313j。
耳机磁体313g
如图89所示，本实施例的耳机磁体313g可以是单个磁体。耳机磁体313g可以具有单一磁场方向。或者，耳机磁体313g可以具有至少两个磁场方向，耳机磁体313g可以形成海尔贝克阵列(可以通过对物理上的单个磁体的不同区域进行不同方向的充磁制得)。例如，耳机磁体313g是具有两个不同磁场方向的海尔贝克阵列。
在其他实施例中，耳机磁体可由至少两个单磁体拼接而成。该耳机磁体可以具有有至少两个磁场方向，该耳机磁体形成海尔贝克阵列。
如图89所示，本实施例的耳机磁体313g可以大致为弯板状结构，该弯板状结构可以沿环绕第一耳机31的中心线的方向弯曲。耳机磁体313g的形状可以与耳机前壳313z的第三部分313c的内壁的形状相适配。耳机磁体313g可以固定至耳机前壳313z的第三部分313c的内壁，例如固定于第三部分313c的弧形部分的内壁。
如图89所示，本实施例的耳机磁体313g可以有4个，4个耳机磁体313g可以等间隔均匀分布于第三部分313c的内壁，第三部分313c的每个弧形部分的内壁均安装有一个耳机磁体313g。4个耳机磁体313g的规格可以相同，4个耳机磁体313g的磁场方向可以一致。
在其他实施例中，耳机磁体的数量可以根据产品需要设计。例如，可以仅有1个耳机磁体，该耳机磁体可以围成闭合的环状结构，且该耳机磁体的形状可与第三部分313c的内壁形状匹配。该耳机磁体可形成海尔贝克阵列，该耳机磁体与第三部分313c的四个弧形部分一一对应的四个区域，可分别具有不同的磁场方向。
或者，例如可以有3个耳机磁体，每个耳机磁体均可以为环绕第一耳机的中心线的弯曲结构，3个耳机磁体可以间隔分布于耳机前壳的第三部分的内壁，其中，3个耳机磁体可以等间隔均匀分布或者不等间隔非均匀分布。此种设计中，耳机前壳的第三部分可以大致呈八面体筒状结构或者大致呈圆筒状结构。
组装治具100及耳机磁体313g的组装工艺
本实施例中，为了保证磁体能准确安装，可以使用组装治具辅助耳机磁体313g的安装。根据产品的装配需要，可以直接将耳机磁体313g与耳机前壳313z进行组装，组装治具可以据此进行定制。或者，如图91所示，也可以先将耳塞支架组件316及第一电极312等安装至耳机前壳313z并形成中间组件200，再将耳机磁体313g安装到该中间组件200的耳机前壳313z内。组装治具可以据此进行定制。下面将以后一种装配方式为例进行说明。
如图91和图92所示，本实施例为了对中间组件200进行组装，提供了一种组装治具100。其中，中间组件200可以包括已预先组装在一起的耳塞支架组件316、第一电极312和耳机前壳313z(耳塞支架组件316、第一电极312和耳机前壳313z的组装结构将在下文详细说明)。为了便于取放和定位中间组件200，可以在中间组件200中的耳机前壳313z的外周套设一个夹具300。夹具300可以呈卡箍状，夹具300将耳机前壳313z包绕并箍紧。夹具300也可以在第一耳机31的其他组装工序中使用。
如图92所示，本实施例的组装治具100可以包括底座120、治具磁体130和上盖110。
如图93和图94所示，底座120可以包括底板121以及固定于底板121的底座磁体122。底板121上可以开设上盖定位孔121a，上盖定位孔121a例如有两个，两个上盖定位孔121a分别位于底板121的两端。底板121上的一个区域(例如图93视角中的右端区域)还可以开设工件定位槽121c、治具磁体安装槽121b与夹具容纳槽121e。
如图93所示，工件定位槽121c的底部的内表面可与第一电极312的外表面仿形。工件定位槽121c的底壁可以开设通孔121d，通孔121d用于供耳机前壳313z与耳塞支架组件316穿过。
如图93所示，治具磁体安装槽121b可以位于工件定位槽121c的外侧，并可与工件定位槽121c连通，可以认为治具磁体安装槽121b将工件定位槽121c的侧壁贯通。治具磁体安装槽121b的数量与治具磁体130的数量可以一致，例如治具磁体安装槽121b为四个。四个治具磁体安装槽121b可以环绕工件定位槽121c等间隔分布。
结合图92与图94所示，每个治具磁体安装槽121b内均可以安装一个治具磁体130。一个治具磁体130可以仅包括单个磁体，也可以由至少两个单磁体连接而成。
如图93所示，夹具容纳槽121e可以位于工件定位槽121c的外周，并可与工件定位槽121c连通。夹具容纳槽121e可以位于两个治具磁体安装槽121b之间。
如图93所示，底板121的另一个区域(例如图93视角中的左端区域)也可以开设相同的工件定位槽121c、通孔121d、治具磁体安装槽121b与夹具容纳槽121e。此种设计使得组装治具100可以同时组装两个中间组件200。底板121的两个区域内的定位槽121c、通孔121d、治具磁体安装槽121b与夹具容纳槽121e，可以位于两个上盖定位孔121a之间。
如图95和图96所示，上盖110可以包括盖板111、上盖定位柱113、上盖限位柱112和上盖磁体114。
其中，上盖定位柱113可以有两个，两个上盖定位柱113分别位于盖板111的两端。盖板111的一个区域(例如图95视角中的右侧区域)可以开设磁体放置通孔111a，磁体放置通孔111a的数量可与耳机磁体313g的数量一致，例如磁体放置通孔111a也为四个。四个磁体 放置通孔111a可大致形成2*2矩阵。
上盖限位柱112设在盖板111的厚度方向的一侧，上盖限位柱112的中心可以大致位于四个磁体放置通孔111a之间。并且，对于每个磁体放置通孔111a与上盖限位柱112而言，上盖限位柱112在磁体放置通孔111a的轴线方向上的投影的一部分，均会落在该磁体放置通孔111a在该磁体放置通孔111a的轴线方向上的投影之内。也即从图95视角来看，每个磁体放置通孔111a内均有上盖限位柱112的一部分，可以将该部分称为限位部分。容易理解，该限位部分的数量同耳机磁体313g的数量。上盖限位柱112的形状可与耳机前壳313z的内腔的形状相适配。
上盖磁体114可固定至盖板111，并可与上盖限位柱112位于盖板111的同侧。
如图95与图96所示，盖板111的另一个区域(例如图95视角中的左侧区域)也可以设计同样的磁体放置通孔111a与上盖限位柱112。此种设计使得组装治具100可以同时组装两个中间组件200。盖板111的两个区域内的磁体放置通孔111a与上盖限位柱112，可以位于两个上盖定位柱113之间。
下文将结合图97-图101，示意性地说明使用组装治具100将四个耳机磁体313g装入一个中间组件200的过程。
结合图91与图97所示，先将夹具300与中间组件200定位至底座120，使得夹具300的环形部分置入工件定位槽121c内，夹具300的另一部分置入夹具容纳槽121e；使得耳塞支架组件316和耳机前壳313z进入通孔121d；使第一电极312进入工件定位槽121c，且使得第一电极312的外表面与工件定位槽121c的内表面配合。此时，每件治具磁体130均可对应耳机前壳313z内的一个用于安装耳机磁体313g的安装位置。
结合图98、图96与图97所示，将上盖110安装到底座120上，使得盖板111接触底座120，使得上盖定位柱113插入上盖定位孔121a内，使得上盖磁体114与底座磁体122磁吸。结合图96和图91所示，此时，上盖110中的上盖限位柱112将插入耳机前壳313z的内腔。结合图99、图100和图94，每个磁体放置通孔111a内均有工件定位槽121c的一部分，也即工件定位槽121c的不同区域在磁体放置通孔111a的轴线方向上的投影分别落入每个磁体放置通孔111a内。在图99和图100的视角中，上盖110的每个磁体放置通孔111a内均有耳机前壳313z的一部分，也即耳机前壳313z的不同区域在磁体放置通孔111a的轴线方向上的投影分别落入每个磁体放置通孔111a内。
并且，如图100所示，上盖限位柱112的每个该限位部分，与耳机前壳313z的内壁之间均形成间隙B(图中为了简洁，只标示了一个间隙B)。每个间隙B用于供一个耳机磁体313g装入。每个间隙B附近均有一件治具磁体130。
如图101所示，将四个耳机磁体313g分别从四个磁体放置通孔111a装入四个间隙B，使得每个间隙B内均有一个耳机磁体313g，并使得每个耳机磁体313g均定位至耳机前壳313z中的安装位置。每个间隙B附近的治具磁体130均可与该间隙B内的耳机磁体313g磁吸，以使耳机磁体313g可以保持在耳机前壳313z内的安装位置。由此，能够完成耳机磁体313g的预定位。
之后，可以去除上盖110，以将中间组件200以及预定位于其内的耳机磁体313g暴露出来。然后，可以采用合适的工艺将耳机磁体313g固定于耳机前壳313z的内壁。例如，可以采用点胶工艺，将耳机磁体313g粘接至耳机前壳313z的内壁。点胶工艺所采用的粘胶例如可以是快干胶。
通过以上描述容易理解，底座120能够对中间组件200进行良好的定位，上盖110与底 座120的配合结构能够准确地限定出耳机磁体313g安装空间，采用治具磁体130能够便捷地、可靠地使耳机磁体313g保持在耳机前壳313z内的安装位置。因此，使用组装治具100能极大提升耳机磁体313g的组装精度与可靠性，且使得组装工艺简单，量产性好。
第一电极312
如图102所示，第一电极312可以包括电极主体312a和导通部312b。电极主体312a可以大致为环绕第一耳机31的中心线一周的环状结构。导通部312b可以大致为柱状，导通部312b可以凸设于电极主体312a的内侧表面。第一电极312可由导电材料制造，例如金属材料。
结合图102与图87所示，第一电极312可以安装至耳机前壳313z。其中，第一电极312的电极主体312a与耳机前壳313z的第二部分313b配合。第一电极312的导通部312b可穿过耳机前壳313z的通孔313d，并与位于耳机前壳313z的内腔中的第一耳机电路板组件的电路板(下文将会描述)电连接，以使第一电极312作为一个充电电极。详细组装结构将在下文继续描述。
耳塞支架组件316
如图103、图104和图105所示，耳塞支架组件316可以包括耳塞支架316b、前泄孔声学网布316a和扬声器网316c。
如图103-图105所示，耳塞支架316b可以包括支架主体316u、第一裙边316v和第二裙边316w。其中，支架主体316u可以大致呈两端开口的中空筒状结构。第一裙边316v与第二裙边316w均可以为凸设于支架主体316u的外周面的凸台，第一裙边316v与第二裙边316w均可以环绕支架主体316u一周。第一裙边316v与第二裙边316w均可以位于支架主体316u的两端之间。第一裙边316v与第二裙边316w具有一定间距。
如图106和图103所示，支架主体316u靠近第二裙边316w的一端可以具有缺口并大致形成C形结构。支架主体316u的这一端还可以具有前泄孔316x，前泄孔316x贯通支架主体316u的壁。前泄孔316x在支架主体316u的外周面上的开口可以位于第二裙边316w朝向第一裙边316v的一侧，该开口可以与第二裙边316w相连。
如图105所示，支架主体316u靠近第一裙边316v的一端可以形成安装槽316t，安装槽316t的底壁设有通孔，该通孔与支架主体316u的内腔连通。
本实施例中，耳塞支架316b全部可由导电材料制造，或者仅有一部分由导电材料制造。该导电材料例如为金属。耳塞支架316b可以收容电子组件317中的扬声器(下文将会描述)，因此也可以将耳塞支架316b称为出音嘴。
前泄孔声学网布316a可以大致呈片状，其可以包括若干层材料，例如声学网布、胶层等。图表示弯折后的前泄孔声学网布316a。如图105所示，前泄孔声学网布316a可以包括固定区域316z和遮挡区域316y。固定区域316z可以呈圆环状。遮挡区域316y可以呈矩形条状，遮挡区域316y可以连接于固定区域316z的内侧。遮挡区域316y能够使空气和声波穿过。
如图105、图104和图106所示，前泄孔声学网布316a可以安装至耳塞支架316b。其中，固定区域316z可以安装至第二裙边316w远离第一裙边316v的一侧，例如固定区域316z中的胶层可以与第二裙边316w的这一侧粘接。遮挡区域316y可以弯折进入支架主体316u的内腔，并贴靠支架主体316u的内壁，例如遮挡区域316y中的胶层可以与支架主体316u的内壁粘接。并且，遮挡区域316y可以将前泄孔316x遮挡。
结合图103、图104和图87所示，耳塞支架316b可以安装至耳机前壳313z的安装槽313f内。例如，耳塞支架316b可以通过固定区域316z中的胶层与安装槽313f的底面粘接。详细 组装结构将在下文继续描述。
扬声器网316c
如图105所示，扬声器网316c可以大致呈片状，其可以包括若干层材料，例如声学网布、胶层、PET片等。扬声器网316c上可开设多个出声孔。
如图105所示，扬声器网316c可以安装至支架主体316u的安装槽316t内。支架主体316u的内腔中的声音(来自扬声器，下文将会说明)将会透过扬声器网316c进入人耳。
根据产品需要，在其他实施例中，耳塞支架还可以具有其他合适的结构，不限于上文所述。前泄孔可以不开设在耳塞支架上，而是可以开设在耳机前壳313z上，例如前泄孔开设于耳机前壳313z的第一部分313a，并与拾音通道313e连通。该前泄孔的孔径可以较小(例如小于0.22mm)，此时可以省去前泄孔声学网布316a。
耳塞311
如图107、图108和图109所示，耳塞311可以包括耳塞内罩311a与耳塞外罩311b，二者可以固定连接。
如图108和图109所示，耳塞内罩311a可以大致为两端开口的中空的回转体结构。耳塞内罩311a的轴向的一端可以形成若干出音通孔311d，这些出音通孔311d均与耳塞内罩311a的内腔连通。这些出音通孔311d相互间隔并可以按照一定规律排列。
如图108所示，在一种实施方式中，这些出音通孔311d可以并排排列。各个出音通孔311d的形状可以一致或者相似，例如每个出音通孔311d都可以为跑道形孔。在其他实施方式中，各个出音通孔311d的形状与排列方式均可以根据产品需要设计，例如图110示出了四种出音通孔311d的形状与排列。
本实施例中，耳塞内罩311a的内腔装有扬声器，出音通孔311d可以供扬声器的声音穿过以便进入人耳(下文将继续描述)。耳塞内罩311a形成出音通孔311d的一端可以作为防耳垢结构，该防耳垢结构能够减少或者避免耳垢进入扬声器。
如图109所示，耳塞内罩311a的内壁还可以形成卡槽311g，卡槽311g环绕一周，卡槽311g可以远离出音通孔311d。卡槽311g用于与耳塞支架316b的第一裙边316v配合，以使耳塞内罩311a安装至耳塞支架316b(详细的组装结构将在下文继续描述)。
如图108和图109所示，耳塞内罩311a的背向出音通孔311d的一端的表面可以设有若干第二凸点311c，这些第二凸点311c可以相互间隔，并环绕一周。
如图107-图109所示，耳塞外罩311b可以大致呈两端开口的中空的回转体。耳塞外罩311b的轴向的一端，可与耳塞内罩311a形成出音通孔311d的一端固定连接。耳塞外罩311b可以环绕在耳塞内罩311a的外周。耳塞外罩311b的轴向的另一端的内壁可以设有若干第一凸点311f。这些第二凸点311c可以相互间隔，环绕一周。
本实施例中，耳塞内罩311a可以采用较硬不易形变的材料制造，以便与耳塞支架316b形成可靠连接，并起到收容和防护耳塞支架316b的作用。耳塞外罩311b可以采用较软易形变的材料制造，以便贴合并适应耳道。
第二电极314
如图111所示，第二电极314可以包括电极主体314a、内承台314b和导通部314c。其中，电极主体314a可以大致为环绕第一耳机31的中心线一周的环状结构。内承台314b位于电极主体314a的内侧，内承台314b可以环绕电极主体314a一周。导通部314c可以大致为柱状，导通部314c可以位于电极主体314a的内侧，并可以凸设于内承台314b上。第二电极314可由导电材料制造，例如金属材料。
结合图111与图88所示，第二电极314可以连接至耳机前壳313z。其中，第二电极314的电极主体314a与耳机前壳313z的第三部分313c配合。第二电极314的导通部314c可与位于第二电极314内的第二耳机电路板组件317g中的电路板(下文将会描述)电连接，以使第二电极314作为另一个充电电极。详细组装结构将在下文继续描述。
耳机后壳组件315
如图112、图113和图114所示，耳机后壳组件315可以包括耳机后壳315a、第一主麦克风网315g、天线315f、后壳支架315d以及第二主麦克风网315e。其中，第一主麦克风网315g、天线315f、后壳支架315d以及第二主麦克风网315e均可以收容在耳机后壳315a的内侧。
如图113、图114和图115(图115为图112的耳机后壳315a的A-A剖视结构示意图)所示，耳机后壳315a可以大致呈碗形。耳机后壳315a可以包括底壁315h，以及围绕在底壁315h的周缘的周侧壁315i，周侧壁315i与底壁315h围成开放腔体。底壁315h上可以开设拾音通孔315c，拾音通孔315c与耳机后壳315a的内腔连通。周侧壁315i上可以开设若干防风噪通孔315b，防风噪通孔315b与耳机后壳315a的内腔连通。防风噪通孔315b例如可以有2个，2个防风噪通孔315b可以基本对称分布在拾音通孔315c的两侧。或者，防风噪通孔315b的数量可以大于或等于2，例如3个、4个等，这些防风噪通孔315b可以相互间隔设置。
天线315f
本实施例中，天线315f可以是共模天线，其可包括两个物理上隔开但能够耦合工作的天线枝节，两个天线枝节通过耦合以使天线315f工作在设定频段。天线315f例如可以是蓝牙天线，该设定频段例如可以为2.4GHz。
如图116所示，在本实施例的实施方式一中，天线315f可以包括第一天线枝节315z与第二天线枝节315y。第一天线枝节315z与第二天线枝节315y均可以大致为弯折状的窄条结构。
如图116所示，第一天线枝节315z可以包括第一段315z3和第二段315z4，第一段315z3与第二段315z4弯折连接，例如二者可大致垂直。第一段315z3远离第二段315z4的一端称为馈端315z1，第二段315z4远离第一段315z3的一端称为末端315z2，也即馈端315z1与末端315z2分别为第一天线枝节315z的相对两端。第一段315z3可大致呈直线状，第二段315z4可以呈弯折状。
如图116所示，类似的，第二天线枝节315y可以包括第三段315y3和第四段315y4，第三段315y3与第四段315y4弯折连接，例如二者可大致垂直。第三段315y3远离第四段315y4的一端称为馈端315y1，第四段315y4远离第三段315y3的一端称为末端315y2，也即馈端315y1与末端315y2分别为第二天线枝节315y的相对两端。第三段315y3可大致呈直线状，第四段315y4可以呈弯折状。如图116所示，第一天线枝节315z与第二天线枝节315y可以基本中心对称，即第一天线枝节315z绕一中心旋转180°后与第二天线枝节315y基本重合。对于第一天线枝节315z与第二天线枝节315y所占据的整个区域而言，从第一天线枝节315z的馈端315z1到末端315z2，第一天线枝节315z沿着从外向内的路径弯折延伸(例如在图116视角中，第一天线枝节315z沿顺时针方向弯折)；从第二天线枝节315y的馈端315y1与末端315y2，第二天线枝节315y沿着从外向内的路径弯折延伸(例如在图116视角中，第二天线枝节315y沿顺时针方向弯折)。馈端315z1与馈端315y1在外侧，馈端315z1与馈端315y1相距较远。末端315z2及末端315y2均位于馈端315z1与馈端315y1之间，末端315z2与末端315y2相距较近，末端315z2与末端315y2产生耦合使天线315f工作在2.4G频段。
下文将会描述，馈端315z1与馈端315y1均与电子组件317中的第三耳机电路板组件317h的电路板上的一个馈点连接，使得第一天线枝节315z与第二天线枝节315y均能收发信号。其中，这两个馈点可以关于第一耳机31的中心线对称。
结合图116、图112和图115所示，实施例方式一的天线315f可以设在耳机后壳315a的内壁，馈端315z1与馈端315y1均可位于耳机后壳315a的周侧壁315i的内表面，末端315z2及末端315y2均可以位于耳机后壳315a的底壁315h的内表面。其中，对于第一天线枝节315z，从馈端315z1到末端315z2，第一天线枝节315z的第二段315z4可以大致沿着从周侧壁315i到底壁315h的方向延伸。对于第二天线枝节315y，从馈端315y1到末端315y2，第二天线枝节315y的第四段315y4也可以大致沿着从周侧壁315i到底壁315h的方向延伸。
天线315f例如可以通过激光直接成型(laser direct structuring，LDS)工艺形成于耳机后壳315a的内壁，即天线315f例如可以是LDS天线。
第一耳机31在耳道内的不同佩戴角度，会导致第一天线枝节315z更靠近人体，或者第二天线枝节315y更靠近人体。更靠近人体的天线枝节的天线性能将会下降(例如天线效率较低)，天线的信号质量变差。
因此，当第一耳机31以不同的佩戴角度工作时，第一耳机31可以检测天线315f中哪个天线枝节的信号质量较好，并选择信号质量较好的天线枝节(更远离人体的天线枝节)作为馈电端，将另一个线枝节作为接地端。示意性的，可以检测接收信号强度(received signal strength indicator，RSSI)值，来确定天线枝节的信号质量。第一耳机31可以内置控制器和开关电路，控制器用于确定信号质量较好的那个天线枝节，并通过该开关电路将该天线枝节切换为馈电端，将信号质量较差的那个天线枝节切换为接地端。其中，该控制器例如可以布置于第二耳机电路板组件317g(下文将会描述)中的电路板。该开关电路例如可以布置于第三耳机电路板组件317h(下文将会描述)中的电路板。可以理解的是，该控制器与该开关电路的位置可以根据需要设计，不限于上文所述。
例如，当第一耳机31以第一佩戴角度佩戴时，此时第二天线枝节315y更远离人体。第一耳机31可以检测到第二天线枝节315y的信号质量较好，并选择第二天线枝节315y作为馈电端，将第一天线枝节315z作为接地端。或者，当第一耳机31以第二佩戴角度佩戴时，此时第一天线枝节315z更远离人体。第一耳机31可以检测到第一天线枝节315z的信号质量较好，并选择第一天线枝节315z作为馈电端，将第二天线枝节315y作为接地端。
本实施方式的天线315f，通过设计呈中心对称分布并耦合工作的两个天线枝节，能够在用户采用不同的佩戴角度佩戴第一耳机31时，均能确保第一耳机31的天线性能，从而保证第一耳机31的通信质量，保障用户体验。
如图117所示，在本实施例的实施方式二中，天线315f可以包括第一天线枝节315x与第二天线枝节315w。第一天线枝节315x与第二天线枝节315w均可以大致为弯折状的窄条结构。
如图117所示，第一天线枝节315x可以包括第一段315x3和第二段315x4，第一段315x3与第二段315x4弯折连接，例如二者可大致垂直。第一段315x3远离第二段315x4的一端称为馈端315x1，第二段315x4远离第一段315x3的一端称为末端315x2，也即馈端315x1与末端315x2分别为第一天线枝节315x的相对两端。第一段315x3可大致呈直线状，第二段315x4可以呈弯折状。
如图117所示，类似的，第二天线枝节315w可以包括第三段315w3和第四段315w4，第三段315w3与第四段315w4弯折连接，例如二者可大致垂直。第三段315w3远离第四段 315w4的一端称为馈端315w1，第四段315w4远离第三段315w3的一端称为末端315w2，也即馈端315w1与末端315w2分别为第二天线枝节315w的相对两端。第三段315w3可大致呈直线状，第四段315w4可以呈弯折状。
如图117所示，第一天线枝节315x与第二天线枝节315w可以基本中心对称。
与上述实施方式一不同的是，实施方式二中，对于第一天线枝节315x与第二天线枝节315w所占据的整个区域而言，从第一天线枝节315x的馈端315x1到末端315x2，第一天线枝节315x沿着从内向外的路径弯折延伸(例如在图117视角中，第一天线枝节315x沿逆时针方向弯折)；从第二天线枝节315w的馈端315w1与末端315w2，第二天线枝节315w沿着从内向外的路径弯折延伸(例如在图117视角中，第二天线枝节315w沿逆时针方向弯折)。馈端315x1、末端315x2、馈端315w1及末端315w2均在外侧。馈端315x1与馈端315w1相距较近并产生耦合，以使天线315f工作在2.4G频段。
参照结合图117、图112和图115所示，实施方式二的天线315f可以设在耳机后壳315a的内壁。馈端315x1与馈端315w1均可位于耳机后壳315a的周侧壁315i的内表面。末端315x2及末端315w2均可以位于耳机后壳315a的底壁315h的内表面，并可以均靠近周侧壁315i。与上述实施方式一不同的是，对于第一天线枝节315x，从馈端315x1到末端315x2，第一天线枝节315x的第二段315x4可以大致沿着从底壁315h到周侧壁315i的方向延伸。对于第二天线枝节315w，从馈端315w1到末端315w2，第二天线枝节315w的第四段315w4也可以大致沿着从底壁315h到周侧壁315i的方向延伸。
本实施方式二提供了另一种天线315f的拓扑结构，能够满足第一耳机31的天线设计需求。
如图118所示，在本实施例的实施方式三中，天线315f可以包括第一天线枝节315u与第二天线枝节315v。第一天线枝节315u与第二天线枝节315v均可以大致为弯折状的窄条结构。
如图118所示，第一天线枝节315u可以包括第一段315u3和第二段315u4，第一段315u3与第二段315u4弯折连接，例如二者可大致垂直。第一段315u3远离第二段315u4的一端称为馈端315u1，第二段315u4远离第一段315u3的一端称为末端315u2，也即馈端315u1与末端315u2分别为第一天线枝节315u的相对两端。第一段315u3可大致呈直线状，第二段315u4可以呈弯折状。
如图118所示，类似的，第二天线枝节315v可以包括第三段315v3和第四段315v4，第三段315v3与第四段315v4弯折连接，例如二者可大致垂直。第三段315v3远离第四段315v4的一端称为馈端315v1，第四段315v4远离第三段315v3的一端称为末端315v2，也即馈端315v1与末端315v2分别为第二天线枝节315v的相对两端。第三段315v3可大致呈直线状，第四段315v4可以呈弯折状。
与上述实施方式一不同的是，实施方式三中，对于第一天线枝节315u与第二天线枝节315v所占据的整个区域而言，从第一天线枝节315u的馈端315u1到末端315u2，第一天线枝节315u沿着从外向内的路径弯折延伸(例如在图118视角中，第一天线枝节315u沿顺时针方向弯折)；从第二天线枝节315v的馈端315v1与末端315v2，第二天线枝节315v沿着从内向外的路径弯折延伸(例如在图118视角中，第二天线枝节315v沿逆时针方向弯折)。馈端315u1、馈端315v1及末端315v2均在外侧，末端315u2在内侧。末端315u2与馈端315v1相距较近并产生耦合，以使天线315f工作在2.4G频段。
参照结合图117、图112和图115所示，实施方式三的天线315f可以设在耳机后壳315a 的内壁。馈端315u1与馈端315v1均可位于耳机后壳315a的周侧壁315i的内表面。末端315u2及末端315v2均可以位于耳机后壳315a的底壁315h的内表面，末端315v2还可以靠近周侧壁315i。与上述实施方式一不同的是，对于第一天线枝节315u，从馈端315u1到末端315u2，第一天线枝节315u的第二段315u4可以大致沿着从周侧壁315i到底壁315h的方向延伸。对于第二天线枝节315v，从馈端315v1到末端315v2，第二天线枝节315v的第四段315v4也可以大致沿着从底壁315h到周侧壁315i的方向延伸。
本实施方式三提供了另一种天线315f的拓扑结构，能够满足第一耳机31的天线设计需求。
以上实施方式示意性的列举了天线315f三种拓扑结构以及三种耦合方式。本申请实施例实际上并不限于此，还可以根据产品需要设计天线315f的其他拓扑结构与耦合方式。例如，从馈端到末端，第二段可以大致沿着从底壁315h到周侧壁315i的方向延伸，第四段可以大致沿着从周侧壁315i到底壁315h的方向延伸。第一天线枝节的馈端可与第二天线枝节的末端耦合，以使天线315f工作在设定频段。
上文描述了三种天线315f的示意性拓扑结构。可以理解的，本实施例中，天线315f的具体结构可以根据产品需要设计，并不限于上文所述。为了描述方便，下文涉及到天线315f的内容，均以上述实施方式一中的天线315f为例进行说明。
第一主麦克风网315g
第一主麦克风网315g可以大致呈圆片状，其可以包括若干层材料，例如声学网布、胶层等。结合图112与图115所示，第一主麦克风网315g可与耳机后壳315a的底壁315h固定连接，例如第一主麦克风网315g中的胶层可与底壁315h粘接。并且，第一主麦克风网315g将拾音通孔315c封盖，进入拾音通孔315c的声音可穿过第一主麦克风网315g进入耳机后壳315a的内腔。
后壳支架315d
如图112和图119所示，后壳支架315d可大致呈罩状。后壳支架315d上可开设通孔315j。
第二主麦克风网315e
如图112所示，第二主麦克风网315e可以大致呈圆片状，其可以包括若干层材料，例如声学网布、泡棉、胶层等。结合图112与图119所示，第二主麦克风网315e可固定在后壳支架315d的一侧，例如第二主麦克风网315e中的胶层可与后壳支架315d的该侧粘接。并且，第二主麦克风网315e将通孔315j封盖，进入通孔315j的声音可穿过第二主麦克风网315e。
图120为图113的耳机后壳组件315的B-B剖视图，图120可以表示耳机后壳组件315的组装结构。如图120所示，第一主麦克风网315g可以固定至耳机后壳315a的底壁315h的内表面。结合图120与图114所示，第一主麦克风网315g将拾音通孔315c封盖(由于图113中的剖切面的位置，拾音通孔315c未能在图120中显示)。后壳支架315d安装在耳机后壳315a的内腔中，后壳支架315d与底壁315h及第一主麦克风网315g具有一定间距，由此后壳支架315d与耳机后壳315a围成防风噪腔315k。防风噪通孔315b与防风噪腔315k连通。
如图120所示，第二主麦克风网315e位于耳机后壳315a的内腔中，第二主麦克风网315e可以固定至后壳支架315d背离底壁315h的一侧，且第二主麦克风网315e封盖后壳支架315d的通孔315j。
上文详细描述了第一耳机31中的耳塞311、耳塞支架组件316、第一电极312、耳机前壳组件313、第二电极314及耳机后壳组件315的结构，下文将说明以上各个部件的整体组装结构。
图121为第一耳机31的一个剖视结构示意图。其中，由于剖截面的位置选择，导致部分结构未能显示。图122为图121中A处局部放大示意图。
如图121所示，第一电极312可与耳机前壳313z的第二部分313b配合。结合图102与图87所示，第一电极312的导通部312b可穿过第二部分313b上的通孔313d，并伸入到耳机前壳313z的内腔。
如图121与图122所示，耳塞支架316b可以与耳机前壳313z的第一部分313a配合。结合图122与图90所示，耳塞支架316b的第二裙边316w可通过前泄孔声学网布316a的固定区域316z，粘接至第一部分313a的安装槽313f内。耳塞支架316b的支架主体316u可以伸入到耳机前壳313z的内腔。并且，如图122所示，耳塞支架316b上的前泄孔316x可靠近耳机前壳313z上的拾音通道313e，前泄孔声学网布316a的遮挡区域316y位于前泄孔316x与拾音通道313e之间。
如图122所示，耳塞内罩311a可以套在耳塞支架316b的外周。其中，结合图109与图122所示，耳塞内罩311a的卡槽311g可与耳塞支架316b的第一裙边316v配合，耳塞内罩311a设有出音通孔311d的一端可以与耳塞支架316b上的扬声器网316c具有一定间距。耳塞内罩311a上的第二凸点311c可接触耳塞支架316b的第二裙边316w，这样使得耳塞内罩311a与第二裙边316w之间具有间隙，避免耳塞内罩311a将第二裙边316w附近的前泄孔316x堵塞。可以理解的是，第二凸点311c可以与前泄孔316x错位，以避免第二凸点311c堵住前泄孔316x。
如图122所示，耳塞外罩311b环绕在耳塞内罩311a的外周，耳塞外罩311b的下端可以环绕于耳机前壳313z的第一部分313a的外周，耳塞外罩311b的内壁上的第一凸点311f也可以环绕于的第一部分313a的外周。设计第一凸点311f可以增加耳塞外罩311b的结构强度，使得第一耳机31被用户佩戴时，耳塞外罩311b的晃动或振动减少，从而减少“听诊器效应”。
如图121所示，第二电极314连接耳机前壳313z的第三部分313c以及耳机后壳315a。
本实施例中，耳塞支架组件316、耳机前壳组件313、第二电极314及耳机后壳组件315可以围成第一耳机31的内腔，电子组件317收容在该内腔中。
本实施例中，当第一耳机31在第三容纳槽231f内放置到位后，第一电极312可与第三容纳槽231f内的第一充电弹片231e接触，第二电极314可与第二充电弹片231c接触，由此实现主机2对第一耳机31的充电。由于第一电极312与第二电极314均为360度闭合的环状结构，因而当第一耳机31以任意角度放入第三容纳槽231f内时，第一电极312总是能与第一充电弹片231e接触、第二电极314总是能与第二充电弹片231c接触，均能确保主机2对第一耳机31进行充电。第一电极312与第二电极314的此种结构，使得用户可以较为随意地将第一耳机31放入第三容纳槽231f内，能够提升用户体验。
容易理解，在其他实施例中，第一电极与第二电极中的一个具有360度闭合的环状结构，另一个则并非360度闭合，而是形成开放环状结构，这样也可以在一定角度范围内保证第一耳机在能够充电的前提下随意放置。
例如图123所示的第一耳机41，第一电极411依然具有360度闭合的环状结构，但第二电极412有两个或更多，各第二电极412之间相互间隔设置，各个第二电极412可以分布在同一圆周上。每个第二电极412均可以为开放环状结构。或者在另一实施例中，第二电极412的数量为单个，第二电极412为具有缺口的开放环状结构，例如其所环绕的角度可以为120度、180度、270度(但小于360度)等。
或者，在其他实施例中，第一电极与第二电极均非360度闭合，二者均是具有缺口的单 个开放环状结构。或者，第一电极与第二电极中的一个是具有缺口的单个开放环状结构，另一个的数量为至少两个且相互间隔设置并分布在同一圆周上。或者，第一电极与第二电极的数量均为至少两个且相互间隔设置并分布在同一圆周上。上述设计也可以在一定角度范围内保证第一耳机在能够充电的前提下随意放置。
本实施例中，第一电极312与第一充电弹片231e的电连接，或者第二电极314与第二充电弹片231c的电连接，还可以用于实现第一耳机31与主机2的通信。也即，第一电极312或者第二电极314还可以复用为第一耳机31的通信电极，以便实现第一耳机31与主机2的通信。
与本实施例不同的是，在其他实施例中，如图124所示，第一耳机51可以具有第一电极512与第二电极512，第一电极512与第二电极512专用于实现主机对第一耳机51的充电。除此之外，第一耳机51还具有通信电极513，通信电极513专用于与主机的通信。可以理解的是，图124所示的第一电极512、第二电极512和通信电极513均为360度闭合的环状结构，这仅仅是一种举例。实际上，第一电极512、第二电极512和通信电极513的结构、数量及分布，均可以根据产品需要设计。
电子组件317
图125和图126表示本实施例的电子组件317的一种示意性结构。可以理解的，下文将要描述的电子组件317的结构仅仅是一种举例，并非是对本申请实施例的限定。
如图125和图126所示，电子组件317可以包括第一耳机电路板组件317e、第二耳机电路板组件317g、第三耳机电路板组件317h、柔性电路板317j、扬声器317a、佩戴检测极板317b、副麦克风317k、耳机电池317f和主麦克风317i。
第一耳机电路板组件317e、第二耳机电路板组件317g与第三耳机电路板组件317h
其中，第一耳机电路板组件317e、第二耳机电路板组件317g与第三耳机电路板组件317h依次层叠并间隔布置，三者可以通过柔性电路板317j电连接。第一耳机电路板组件317e、第二耳机电路板组件317g与第三耳机电路板组件317h均可以包括电路板及布置与电路板的电路和器件。
例如，第一耳机电路板组件317e的电路板上可以布置佩戴检测传感器，佩戴检测传感器用于实现第一耳机31的佩戴检测。佩戴检测传感器例如可以包括重力传感器(gravity sensor，G-sensor)、惯性测量单元(inertial measurement unit，IMU)传感器、骨传导传感器、红外线(infrared radiation，IR)传感器、语音加速度传感器(voice accelerometer，VACC)、拾音单元(voice pick-up unit，VPU)等中的至少一个。第一耳机电路板组件317e的电路板上还可以布置磁场传感器，该磁场传感器用于检测主机磁体的磁通量的变化量，以便实现第一耳机31的出入盒检测(下文将继续说明出入盒检测的原理)。该磁场传感器例如为霍尔传感器或者磁力计。该磁场传感器例如可以有两个。第二耳机电路板组件317g的电路板上例如可以布置有充电电路和放电电路。第三耳机电路板组件317h的电路板上例如可以布置射频电路。
扬声器317a
如图126所示，扬声器317a可与第一耳机电路板组件317e的电路板电连接。扬声器317a可以位于第一耳机电路板组件317e远离第二耳机电路板组件317g的一侧。
佩戴检测极板317b
如图125与图126所示，佩戴检测极板317b可以包括相连的极板317c与连接引脚317d，连接引脚317d从极板317c引出，并可与第一耳机电路板组件317e的电路板电连接(例如焊接)。极板317c可与扬声器317a位于第一耳机电路板组件317e的同一侧。佩戴检测极板317b 能够导电，例如可由金属材料制造。佩戴检测极板317b靠近人体时能够产生耦合电容，当佩戴检测极板317b与人体距离变化时，耦合电容值会发生变化，通过对佩戴检测极板317b的耦合电容值进行检测与处理，可以实现第一耳机31的佩戴检测。
副麦克风317k
如图125与图126所示，副麦克风317k位于第一耳机电路板组件317e远离扬声器317a的一侧，并可与第一耳机电路板组件317e的电路板电连接。副麦克风317k可以布置在第一耳机电路板组件317e的电路板上。第一耳机电路板组件317e的电路板上对应副麦克风317k的部位可开设通孔，声音能够通过该通孔被副麦克风317k拾取。副麦克风317k用于实现降噪，还可以用于佩戴检测。
耳机电池317f
如图125与图126所示，耳机电池317f可以位于第一耳机电路板组件317e与第二耳机电路板组件317g之间。耳机电池317f的电极引脚可与第一耳机电路板组件317e中的电路板电连接。
主麦克风317i
如图125与图126所示，主麦克风317i可位于第二耳机电路板组件317g与第三耳机电路板组件317h之间，并可与第三耳机电路板组件317h的电路板电连接。主麦克风317i可以布置在第三耳机电路板组件317h的电路板上。第三耳机电路板组件317h的电路板上对应主麦克风317i的位置可以开设通孔，人声可以通过该通孔被主麦克风317i拾取。
图127表示电子组件317与第一耳机31的其他部件的装配结构，图128为图127中A处的局部放大示意图，图129为图127中B处的局部放大示意图。
如图127所示，电子组件317可以收容在耳塞支架组件316、耳机前壳组件313、第二电极314及耳机后壳组件315所围成的内腔中。
如图128所示，扬声器317a的至少一部分可以位于耳塞支架316b的内腔。扬声器317a发出的声波可透过扬声器网316c与出音通孔311d传出，并进入耳道。由于存在前泄孔316x，耳塞支架316b的内腔中的气压与外界气压得以平衡，保证扬声器317a能正常工作。另外，开设前泄孔316x，也能提升副麦克风317k的降噪深度。
如图128所示，示意性的，佩戴检测极板317b的极板317c可与耳塞支架316b远离扬声器网316c的一端固定连接(例如焊接)，佩戴检测极板317b与耳塞支架316b可以连成一个具有较大面积的导体。因此，佩戴检测极板317b与耳塞支架316b均可以产生耦合电容，使得二者均可用于佩戴检测。也即，耳塞支架316b除了起到支撑与收容作用外，还可以复用为用于佩戴检测的检测极板。
可以理解，根据产品需要，佩戴检测极板与耳塞支架的组装结构还可以其是其他形式，不限于上文所述。例如，若耳塞支架仅有一部分是导电材料，则佩戴检测极板可以与耳塞支架的该部分固定连接，佩戴检测极板与耳塞支架的组装结构可根据二者各自的结构以及第一耳机的内部空间进行设计。
本实施例中，通过使佩戴检测极板317b与耳塞支架316b共同作为佩戴检测的检测极板，能够增大检测极板的面积，有利于保证佩戴检测的一致性和可靠性。由于耳塞支架316b相比佩戴检测极板317b更加靠近耳道内部，耳塞支架316b的电容检测数据更加准确与可靠，有利于从整体上提升佩戴检测的可靠性。同时，将耳塞支架316b复用为用于佩戴检测的检测极板，不会影响第一耳机31的整机尺寸，还能节省第一耳机31内部的堆叠空间。
另外，耳塞支架316b若采用金属等具有较高强度的材料制造，在保证耳塞支架316b的 结构强度满足要求的前提下，耳塞支架316b的壁厚及整体结构尺寸可以较小，这能使耳塞外罩311b具有充分的压缩形变空间，有利于保证用户的佩戴舒适度。
本实施例中，示意性的，可以同时采用佩戴检测传感器、佩戴检测极板317b与耳塞支架316b的方式实现佩戴检测，此种设计能够极大增加佩戴检测的一致性与可靠性，减少误检测的概率。
根据产品需要，在其他实施例中也可以采用佩戴检测传感器、佩戴检测极板317b、耳塞支架316b中的任意一个或者任意两个实现佩戴检测。
如图128所示，第一耳机电路板组件317e可以位于耳机前壳313z内。结合图102、图87和图88和图128所示，第一电极312的导通部312b可穿过耳机前壳313z的通孔313d，与第一耳机电路板组件317e的电路板电连接(例如焊接)，以使第一电极312作为一个充电电极。
如图128所示，第一耳机电路板组件317e的电路板的一侧可以与降噪麦克风网313j贴合。副麦克风317k位于该电路板的另一侧，且副麦克风317k可对应降噪麦克风网313j。耳道内的噪音可依次穿过扬声器网布316c、拾音通道313e、降噪麦克风网313j以及第一耳机电路板组件317e的电路板上对应副麦克风317k的通孔，被副麦克风317k拾取。扬声器317a可以产生与该噪音信号相位相反的反相信号，该反相信号可以抵消该噪音信号。由此，第一耳机31能够实现主动降噪。
其中，当第一耳机31工作时，扬声器317a的声音以及耳道内的噪音会穿过前泄孔声学网布316a，从前泄孔316x泄漏至外界。这样能够平衡耳道内外的压力，从而提升用户的佩戴舒适性。遮挡前泄孔316x的前泄孔声学网布316a也可以去掉，此时可以将前泄孔316x做的较小，例如前泄孔316x的直径小于0.22mm。
另外，副麦克风317k也可用于佩戴检测，其原理是：扬声器317a可以发出特定频率的声波信号。若第一耳机31未被用户佩戴，则大量的该声波信号可以经前泄孔316x泄露到外界，被副麦克风317k所拾取的该声波信号的信号强度较小。若第一耳机31被用户佩戴，由于从前泄孔316x在一定程度上或者完全被封堵，使得副麦克风317k能拾取到更多的该声波信号，使得副麦克风317k所拾取的该声波信号的信号强度较大。因此，通过检测副麦克风317k所拾取的信号的信号强度，可以确定第一耳机31是否被用户佩戴。
如图129所示，第二耳机电路板组件317g可位于第二电极314的内侧。结合图111与图129所示，第二电极314的导通部314c可与第二耳机电路板组件317g的电路板电连接(例如焊接)，使得第二电极314作为充电电极。
如图129所示，第三耳机电路板组件317h可承载于后壳支架315d。结合图129与图120所示，第三耳机电路板组件317h的背离主麦克风317i的一侧可以与第二主麦克风网315e贴合。主麦克风317i可与第二主麦克风网315e对应。用户发出的声音可依次穿过拾音通孔315c、第一主麦克风网315g、后壳支架315d上的通孔315j、第二主麦克风网315e以及第三耳机电路板组件317h的电路板上对应主麦克风317i的通孔，被主麦克风317i拾取。
结合图129与图120所示，当外界气流从一个防风噪通孔315b进入防风噪腔315k后，又可以从另一个防风噪通孔315b流出防风噪腔315k，这样可以减少或者避免外界气流导致的风噪被主麦克风317i拾取。
结合图116与图129所示，天线315f的馈端315z1与馈端315y1，均与第三耳机电路板组件317h中的电路板上的一个馈点连接，例如焊接。其中，这两个馈点可以关于第一耳机31的中心线对称。由此，天线315f能够实现信号的辐射与接收。
可穿戴设备1的特性与功能
本实施例中，由于可穿戴设备1包括上述的主机2与耳机，使得可穿戴设备1可具备如下的特性和功能。其中，对于同时涉及主机2与耳机的某些特性或功能，由于第一耳机(如第一耳机31、第一耳机41、第一耳机51)与第二耳机完全一致，为了简洁描述，主要以第一耳机31为例进行描述。
一、主机2打开时，第一耳机31被吸附于主机2的第一部分21
结合图1与图4所示，本实施例中，当主机2处于闭合状态时，第一耳机31收纳在第一部分21的第一容纳槽213y与第二部分23的第三容纳槽231f围成的空间内。
图130以侧视视角表示了主机2处于闭合状态时，第一部分21中的第一主机吸附磁体213r2、第二部分23中的第二主机吸附磁体231v，以及第一耳机31内的耳机磁体313g的位置关系。如图130所示，第一主机吸附磁体213r2及第二主机吸附磁体231v，均与耳机磁体313g磁吸。
本实施例中，第一主机吸附磁体213r2的磁场较强，第一主机吸附磁体213r2与耳机磁体313g之间的磁吸力较大；第二主机吸附磁体231v的磁场较弱，第二主机吸附磁体231v与耳机磁体313g之间的磁吸力较小。参考图1-图4所示，当主机2由闭合状态起逐渐打开时，由于第一主机吸附磁体213r2的磁吸力大于第二主机吸附磁体231v的磁吸力，因此第一耳机31将被吸附于第一部分21，并随第一部分21相对第二部分23转动。
本实施例中，为了使第一主机吸附磁体213r2与耳机磁体313g之间具有较强的磁吸力，可以进行合理的磁体设计。
如图131所示，在本实施例的实施方式一中，每个第一主机吸附磁体213r2均是由两个单磁体拼接而成的海尔贝克阵列，该两个单磁体的磁场方向(使用从N指向S的箭头表示)不同，使得每个第一主机吸附磁体213r2均具有两个磁场方向。结合图131与图130所示，示意性的，每个第一主机吸附磁体213r2中，其中一个单磁体的磁场方向大致从第一耳机31的径向外侧指向径向内侧(例如图131中上部的单磁体)，另一个单磁体的磁场方向大致从第一耳机31的径向内侧指向径向外侧(例如图131中下部的单磁体)。
如图131所示，每个耳机磁体313g均可以是单磁体形成的海尔贝克阵列，每个耳机磁体313g的不同部位可具有不同的磁场方向。结合图131与图130所示，示意性的，每个耳机磁体313g的一部分Q1的磁场方向大致从第一耳机31的径向外侧指向径向内侧，另一部分Q2的磁场方向则大致从第一耳机31的径向内侧侧指向径向外侧。每个耳机磁体313g均为单磁体的设计能够减小耳机磁体313g的组装难度。在其他实施方式中，每个耳机磁体313g也可以由若干(例如两个)单磁体拼接而成。
第一主机吸附磁体213r2与耳机磁体313g的设计，使得第一主机吸附磁体213r2与耳机磁体313g能够磁吸。并且经过产品验证，此种设计使得第一主机吸附磁体213r2与耳机磁体313g之间的磁吸力较大。
与上述实施方式一不同的是，如图132所示，在本实施例的实施方式二中，每个第一主机吸附磁体213r2均为具有四个磁场方向的海尔贝克阵列。每个第一主机吸附磁体213r2均可以由四个单磁体拼接而成，或者是具有四个磁场方向的单磁体。实施方式二的磁体设计能够满足第一耳机31磁吸于第一部分21的设计需求。
与上述实施方式一不同的是，如图133所示，在本实施例的实施方式三中，每个第一主机吸附磁体213r2均为具有单一磁场方向的单磁体。示意性的，每个第一主机吸附磁体213r2的磁场方向均大致可以从第一耳机31的径向内侧指向径向外侧。每个耳机磁体313g均为具 有单一磁场方向的单磁体。示意性的，每个耳机磁体313g的磁场方向均大致可以从第一耳机31的径向内侧指向径向外侧。实施方式三的磁体设计能够满足第一耳机31磁吸于第一部分21的设计需求。
与上述实施方式一不同的是，如图134所示，在本实施例的实施方式四中，每个第一主机吸附磁体213r2均为具有三个磁场方向的海尔贝克阵列。每个第一主机吸附磁体213r2均可以由三个单磁体拼接而成，或者是具有三个磁场方向的单磁体。每个耳机磁体313g均可以具有单一磁场方向。并且，第一电极312与第二电极314可采用能被第一主机吸附磁体213r2磁吸的材料制造，例如导磁材料(如普通用冷轧钢板(steel plate cold common，SPCC)、SUS430等)。第一电极312、第二电极314均可与第一主机吸附磁体213r2磁吸。实施方式四的磁体设计，不仅能够满足第一耳机31磁吸于第一部分21的设计需求，设计结构简单，容易制造，成本低廉。
或者，与上述实施方式均不同的是，在实施方式五中，第一耳机31可以无需内置耳机磁体。第一电极312与第二电极314可采用能被第一主机吸附磁体213r2磁吸的材料制造，例如导磁材料(如SPCC、SUS430等)。如图135所示，第一电极312、第二电极314均可与第一主机吸附磁体213r2磁吸。本实施方式五中，第一主机吸附磁体213r2可以根据需要灵活设计，可以具有单一磁场方向或者若干个磁场方向。本实施方式五的磁体设计，不仅能够满足第一耳机31磁吸于第一部分21的设计需求，设计结构简单，容易制造，成本低廉。
本实施例中，如图136所示，由于第一耳机31的径向尺寸可以至少为第一容纳槽213y的槽深的两倍，因此第一耳机31的大部分将裸露于第一容纳槽213y外。此种设计便于用户在主机2打开后，直接从第一部分21上拿取第一耳机31。
以上各实施方式描述了第一主机吸附磁体213r2与耳机磁体313g的磁体设计。实际上，也可以参照上文所述的原理，对第二主机吸附磁体231v与耳机磁体313g进行磁体设计，只要保证第二主机吸附磁体231v的磁场强度小于第一主机吸附磁体213r2的磁场强度即可。
根据上文描述可以理解，根据产品需要，在其他实施例中，第一主机吸附磁体213r2的磁场强度也可以小于第二主机吸附磁体231v的磁场强度，使得主机2打开后第一耳机31不被第一部分21吸起，而是仍然收纳于第二部分23内。或者，主机的第一部分不设第一容纳槽，主机打开后第一耳机可以吸附于第一部分。
二、将第一耳机31往第一部分21上放置时，第一耳机31可自动归位
如图137、图138和图139所示，在主机2打开、第一耳机31从主机2中取出后，用户可以拿起第一耳机31并使第一耳机31处于大致与第一容纳槽213y匹配的姿态(指第一耳机31的耳塞311大致朝向第一容纳槽213y用于收容耳塞311的一端，第一耳机31的耳机后壳组件315大致朝向第一容纳槽213y用于收容耳机后壳组件315的一端，第一耳机31可以绕其中心线转动任意角度)，然后将第一耳机31靠近第一容纳槽213y。在第一部分21中的第一主机吸附磁体213r2对第一耳机31中的耳机磁体313g的磁吸力作用下，第一耳机31将被纠正至与第一容纳槽213y匹配的姿态，并被自动吸附于第一容纳槽213y内，使得第一耳机31能够准确、到位地放入第一容纳槽213y。
本实施例的自动归位设计，使得用户能够很方便地将第一耳机31放入主机2，并且无需精确对准即可完成放置，从而提升了用户体验。
三、将第一耳机31放入第二部分23内，第一耳机31不易与第二部分23分离
若用户将第一耳机31放入第二部分23的第三容纳槽231f内，在第二部分23中的第二主机吸附磁体231v对第一耳机31中的耳机磁体313g的磁吸力作用下，第一耳机31将被吸 附于第三容纳槽231f内。即使翻转主机2，第一耳机31也不会从第三容纳槽231f中脱离。
另外，第三容纳槽231f内的第二充电弹片231c与第一充电弹片231e均可对第一耳机31施加一定挤压力，该挤压力能够增加第一耳机31与第二部分23中的第二主机壳体231的摩擦力，使得第一耳机31更加不易从第三容纳槽231f内脱离。
四、第一耳机31可以较为随意的角度放入容纳槽
本实施例中，第一耳机31每绕自身的中心线旋转一定角度后均能与自身重合，因此旋转后的第一耳机31总是能够准确地收容于第一容纳槽213y或第三容纳槽231f，并与第一容纳槽213y或第三容纳槽231f的内壁适配。这使得用户无需以固定的角度拿着第一耳机31，即能将第一耳机31放入第一容纳槽213y或第三容纳槽231f。
例如，对于大致呈八面体的第一耳机31，第一耳机31每绕自身中心线旋转90°后均能与自身重合，即使用户将第一耳机31旋转90°、180°或270°等，第一耳机31依然能够与第一容纳槽213y或第三容纳槽231f的内壁适配，因此第一耳机31能够顺利、准确地放入第一容纳槽213y或第三容纳槽231f。另外参考图137-图139所示，针对将第一耳机31放入第一容纳槽213y的情况，由于第一主机吸附磁体213r2的磁力具有角度纠正作用，即使用户随意旋转第一耳机31(例如旋转了10°、35°、55°等)，第一主机吸附磁体213r2的磁力也能将第一耳机31的角度纠正至正常角度，使得第一耳机31能够顺利、准确地放入第一容纳槽213y，并与第一容纳槽213y的内壁适配。
例如，对于大致呈圆柱体的第一耳机31，第一耳机31绕自身中心线旋转任意角度后均能与自身重合。因此即使用户将第一耳机31旋转任意角度，第一耳机31依然能够与第一容纳槽或第三容纳槽的内壁适配，因此第一耳机31能够顺利、准确地放入第一容纳槽或第三容纳槽。
五、主机2的开合状态检测
如图140所示，主机2的第一部分21具有磁场传感器212g(可称为第一磁场传感器)，磁场传感器212g例如可以布置于第一部分21中的电路板212a上。磁场传感器212g用于检测主机2的第二部分23中的状态检测磁体231x的磁通量。磁场传感器212g所检测到的状态检测磁体231x的磁通量，可与磁场传感器212g及状态检测磁体231x的间距成正比。当主机2为闭合状态时，磁场传感器212g所检测到的磁通量最大；当主机2完全打开后，磁场传感器212g所检测到的磁通量最小。
本实施例中，磁场传感器212g例如可以是霍尔传感器或者磁力计。其中，霍尔传感器能够检测磁通量的变化，霍尔传感器在检测到磁通量突破霍尔传感器的硬件门限值时，霍尔传感器能够生成相应的信号并上报给主机2的处理器。主机2的处理器可以根据霍尔传感器的该信号进行相应的处理。与霍尔传感器不同的是，磁力计能够检测磁通量的大小并上报给主机2的处理器。主机2的处理器可以判断磁力计检测的磁通量是否超过处理器内置的软件门限值，并根据判断结果进行相应的处理。下文将以磁场传感器212g为霍尔传感器为例进行说明。
参考图140所示，当用户按下键帽251后，主机2将由闭合状态逐渐打开，磁场传感器212g与状态检测磁体231x的间距逐渐增大，磁场传感器212g所检测到的状态检测磁体231x的磁通量趋于减小。当磁场传感器212g所检测到的磁通量小于第一门限值时，可以生成第一信号。主机2的处理器根据该第一信号确定主机2处于打开状态。
反之，当主机2由打开状态逐渐闭合时，磁场传感器212g与状态检测磁体231x的间距逐渐增小，磁场传感器212g所检测到的状态检测磁体231x的磁通量趋于增大。当磁场传感 器212g所检测到的磁通量大于第二门限值时，可以生成第二信号。主机2的处理器根据该第而信号确定主机2处于闭合状态。
本实施例中，当主机2的处理器确认主机2处于打开状态，该处理器将会控制显示屏211进行相应的界面显示。
本实施例中，当确认主机2处于打开状态且第一耳机31在第三容纳槽231f内时(下文将描述如何检测第一耳机31是否位于第三容纳槽231f内)，主机2的通信电极可向第一耳机31的通信电极发送信号，以唤醒第一耳机31。当确认主机2处于闭合状态且第一耳机31位于主机2内时，主机2可以启动异物检测，并在确认没有异物进入后，启动对第一耳机31的充电。在其他实施例中，磁场传感器212g与状态检测磁体231x的位置可以互换，即磁场传感器212g可以在第二部分23，状态检测磁体231x可以在第一部分21。
六、第一耳机31的出入盒状态检测
第一耳机31的出入盒状态指第一耳机31与第一容纳槽213y的相对位置关系，以及第一耳机31与第三容纳槽231f的相对位置关系，包括：第一耳机31在第一容纳槽213y内且在第三容纳槽231f内(主机2闭合且第一耳机31在主机2内)、第一耳机31在第一容纳槽213y内且在第三容纳槽231f外(主机2打开且第一耳机31吸附于第一部分21)、第一耳机31在第三容纳槽231f内且在第一容纳槽213y外(主机2打开且第一耳机31吸附于第二部分23)等几种位置状态。
本实施例中，主机2与第一耳机31均可以检测第一耳机31的出入盒状态。下面依次进行说明。
1.主机2检测第一耳机31的出入盒状态
如图141所示，主机2的第二部分23具有磁场传感器237与磁场传感器238(二者均可称为第二磁场传感器，如虚线方框所示)，磁场传感器237可以靠近第三容纳槽231f的槽壁的外表面，磁场传感器238可以靠近第四容纳槽231g的槽壁的外表面。磁场传感器237与磁场传感器238例如均可以是单轴霍尔传感器或者磁力计，下文以磁场传感器237与磁场传感器238均是霍尔传感器为例进行说明。
磁场传感器237用于检测第一耳机31中的耳机磁体313g的磁通量的变化。磁场传感器237所检测到的耳机磁体313g的磁通量，可与磁场传感器237及耳机磁体313g的间距成正比。当第一耳机31位于第三容纳槽231f内时(可能是主机2闭合且第一耳机31在主机2内，或者主机2打开且第一耳机31吸附于第二部分23)，磁场传感器237所检测到的磁通量较大；当第一耳机31离开第三容纳槽231f并吸附于第一部分21时，磁场传感器237所检测到的磁通量较小。
本实施例中，当磁场传感器237检测到的磁通量大于或等于第三门限时，可以生成第三信号。主机2的处理器根据该第三信号确定第一耳机31位于第三容纳槽231f内。
本实施例中，主机2的处理器可以综合磁场传感器237发送的第三信号，以及磁场传感器212g发送的第一信号或者第二信号，确定第一耳机31的出入盒状态。例如，当该处理器接收到第三信号与第一信号时，该处理器确定主机2打开且第一耳机31吸附于第二部分23。当该处理器接收到第三信号与第二信号时，该处理器确定主机2闭合且第一耳机31在主机2内。
当磁场传感器237检测到的磁通量小于第三门限但大于或等于第四门限时，可以生成第四信号。主机2的处理器根据该第四信号确定第一耳机31离开第三容纳槽231f并吸附于第一部分21(如图141所示)。
类似的，磁场传感器238用于检测第二耳机32中的耳机磁体的磁通量的变化。同上所述，主机2可以通过磁场传感器238发送的信号，或者综合磁场传感器238与磁场传感器212g发送的信号，来确定第二耳机32的出入盒状态。
综上容易理解，位于第二部分23内的磁场传感器237，用于判断第一耳机31是在第三容纳槽231f内，还是在第三容纳槽231f外。同理，位于第二部分23内的磁场传感器238，用于检测第二耳机32是在第四容纳槽231g内，还是在第四容纳槽231g外。
在其他实施例中，磁场传感器237与磁场传感器238中的至少一个也可以位于主机2的第一部分21内。例如，磁场传感器237可以位于第一部分21内(例如靠近第一容纳槽213y的槽壁的外表面)。可以通过磁场传感器237检测第一耳机31中的耳机磁体313g的磁通量的变化，来判断第一耳机31是在第一容纳槽213y内，还是在第一容纳槽213y外。具体原理同上文所述，在此不再重复。
本实施例中，当主机2确认第一耳机31在第三容纳槽231f内且主机2处于打开状态，主机2的通信电极可向第一耳机31的通信电极发送信号，以唤醒第一耳机31。主机2还可以通过第一充电弹片231e与第二充电弹片231c向第一耳机31充电。另外，主机2还可以启动充电过热保护机制(下文将会说明)。根据产品需要，也可以无需向第一耳机31充电和不启动充电过热保护机制。
本实施例中，当主机2确认第一耳机31在主机2内且主机2处于闭合状态，主机2可以启动异物检测机制(下文将会说明)，还可以向第一耳机31充电，以及启动充电过热保护机制。根据产品需要，也可以无需向第一耳机31充电和不启动充电过热保护机制。
在其他实施例中，当主机2确认第一耳机31在第一容纳槽213y内且主机2处于打开状态，第一耳机31将会唤醒(原理将在下文说明)。
2.第一耳机31检测第一耳机31的出入盒状态
如图142所示，第一耳机31可以具有磁场传感器317z(可称为第三磁场传感器，如虚线框表示)，磁场传感器317z例如可以布置于第三耳机电路板组件317h的电路板上。磁场传感器317z例如可以是霍尔传感器或者磁力计，下文以磁场传感器317z是霍尔传感器为例进行说明。
磁场传感器317z用于检测主机2的第二部分23中的状态检测磁体231x的磁通量的变化。磁场传感器317z所检测到的状态检测磁体231x的磁通量，可与磁场传感器317z及状态检测磁体231x的间距成正比。当第一耳机31位于第三容纳槽231f内时(可能是主机2闭合且第一耳机31在主机2内，或者主机2打开且第一耳机31吸附于第二部分23)，磁场传感器317z所检测到的磁通量较大；当第一耳机31离开第三容纳槽231f并吸附于第一部分21时，磁场传感器317z所检测到的磁通量较小。
本实施例中，当磁场传感器317z检测到的磁通量大于或等于第五门限时，可以生成第六信号。第一耳机31的控制器根据该第六信号确定第一耳机31位于第三容纳槽231f内。
本实施例中，第一耳机31的控制器(可以是中央处理器或者微控制器(microcontroller unit，MCU))可以综合磁场传感器317z发送的第六信号，以及磁场传感器212g发送的第一信号或者第二信号(该第一信号及该第二信号，可通过主机2的通信电极与第一耳机31的通信电极传输)，确定第一耳机31的出入盒状态。例如，当该控制器接收到第六信号与第一信号时，该控制器确定主机2打开且第一耳机31吸附于第二部分23。当该控制器接收到第六信号与第二信号时，该控制器确定主机2闭合且第一耳机31在主机2内。
当磁场传感器317z检测到的磁通量小于第五门限但大于或等于第六门限时，可以生成第 七信号。第一耳机31的控制器根据该第七信号确定第一耳机31离开第三容纳槽231f并吸附于第一部分21。
如图142所示，第二耳机32同样可以具有磁场传感器327z(虚线框表示)，磁场传感器327z用于检测第二部分23中的状态检测磁体231w的磁通量的变化。磁场传感器327z例如可以是单轴霍尔传感器。同上所述，第二耳机32可以通过磁场传感器327z发送的信号，或者综合磁场传感器327z与磁场传感器212g发送的信号，来确定第二耳机32的出入盒状态。
本实施例中，第一耳机31检测自身的出入盒状态，用于使第一耳机31执行相应的操作：
若主机2处于闭合状态，且第一耳机31检测到自身位于第三容纳槽231f内，则第一耳机31可处于休眠状态。
若主机2处于打开状态，且第一耳机31检测到自身位于第三容纳槽231f内，则第一耳机31可被主机2唤醒。例如，主机2的通信电极可向第一耳机31的通信电极发送信号，以唤醒第一耳机31。
若主机2处于打开状态，且第一耳机31检测到自身吸附于第一部分21，则磁场传感器317z的检测信号会触发第一耳机31的控制器工作，以将第一耳机31唤醒。
本实施例中，使得主机2与第一耳机31均能检测第一耳机31的出入盒状态，能够避免仅依靠主机2或者第一耳机31进行检测可能导致的风险(例如，若仅依靠主机2进行检测，若主机2电量耗尽，则无法准确检测出第一耳机31的出入盒状态)，保证第一耳机31的出入盒状态检测的可靠性。
七、异物检测机制
本实施例中，若异物(例如液体或者固体和半固体等脏污)进入主机2的第三容纳槽231f，可能导致主机2与第一耳机31的表面脏污、腐蚀生锈，甚至还会导致功能异常，影响产品可靠性与寿命。尤其是，若第三容纳槽231f内的第二充电弹片231c与第一充电弹片231e大量接触到异物，可能导致充电异常(或者还有通信异常)。
有鉴于此，如图143所示，第三容纳槽231f内还设有异物检测弹片231d，用于实现异物检测。检测原理可以如下：
当异物检测弹片231d，且第一充电弹片231e与第二充电弹片231c中的至少一个接触异物后，主机2的充电信号的波形将会发生变化。例如，异物检测弹片231d与第一充电弹片231e接触异物后，或者异物检测弹片231d与第二充电弹片231c接触异物后，或者异物检测弹片231d、第一充电弹片231e及第二充电弹片231c三者均接触异物后，主机2的充电电路的充电信号的波形将会发生变化，可以将此种波形变化的充电信号称为异常充电信号。若仅有第一充电弹片231e与第二充电弹片231c中的至少一个接触接触异物，主机2的充电信号的波形不会发生变化，可以将此种波形不变的充电信号称为正常充电信号。
若第一充电弹片231e、第二充电弹片231c与异物检测弹片231d三者中仅有一个接触异物或者三者均未接触异物，主机2的充电信号的波形不会发生变化，即充电电路产生正常充电信号。
因此，主机2的处理器可以根据该充电信号的类型，确认是否有异物进入第三容纳槽231f。例如，当判断该充电信号为异常充电信号时，该处理器确定有异物进入第三容纳槽231f；反之，当判断该充电信号为正常充电信号时，该处理器确定没有异物进入第三容纳槽231f。
本实施例中，当主机2确认有异物进入第三容纳槽231f时，主机2的处理器可以控制主机2中的充电电路关闭。由此，当第一耳机31收容在第三容纳槽231f内时，第一充电弹片231e与第一耳机31的第一电极间没有充电电流、第二充电弹片231c与第一耳机31的第二电 极间没有充电电流，这样能够防止发生充电异常(例如短路)。
本实施例中，当主机2确认有异物进入第三容纳槽231f时，主机2的处理器还可以控制主机2中的报警模块发出警报，以向用户发出警示。该报警模块例如可以是主机2中的扬声器、蜂鸣器、马达等。可以理解，根据产品需要，报警机制并非是必需的。
本实施例中，当主机2确认没有异物进入第三容纳槽231f时，主机2的处理器可以控制主机2中的充电电路开启。由此，当第一耳机31收容在第三容纳槽231f内时，主机2将向第一耳机31正常充电。
在其他实施例中，根据产品需要，主机可以没有该异物检测机制。
八、主机2对第一耳机31充电
结合上文所述，由于第一耳机31中的第一电极与第二电极的结构设计，使得第一耳机31以多种旋转角度放入第三容纳槽231f后，第一充电弹片231e均能与该第一电极312接触、第二充电弹片231c均能与该第二电极314接触，从而保证主机2向第一耳机31正常充电。此种设计能够简化用户操作，提升用户体验。
九、主机2的充电过热保护机制
本实施例中，主机2对第一耳机31充电时会产生热量，可能导致主机2或者第一耳机31温升过高。例如，由于用户使用不当或者内部电路短路，导致主机2的充电电流过大，此时容易导致温升过高。温度过高会影响产品的安全性、寿命与可靠性，还可能降低用户体验。
有鉴于此，主机2可以具有温度检测模块，该温度检测模块例如可以设于第一容纳槽213y和/或第三容纳槽231f附近。该温度检测模块例如可以是热敏电阻。该温度检测模块用于检测其安装处的温度，并上报给主机2的处理器。该处理器可以根据该温度检测模块的检测信息判断温升是否超过阈值。在温升大于等于阈值时，该处理器可以控制主机2的充电电路关闭，使得主机2可以不对第一耳机31充电，以此来抑制温升。若温升小于该阈值，该处理器可以控制主机2的充电电路开启，使得主机2可对第一耳机31充电。此种充电过热保护机制能够提升产品的安全性、寿命与可靠性，保证用户体验。
本实施例中，当主机2的处理器确认温升过大时，该处理器还可以控制主机2中的报警模块发出警报，以向用户发出警示。该报警模块例如可以是主机2中的扬声器、蜂鸣器、马达等。可以理解，根据产品需要，报警机制并非是必需的。
在其他实施例中，根据产品需要，主机可以没有该充电过热保护机制。
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (21)

  1. 一种可穿戴设备，其特征在于，
    包括耳机与主机；
    所述耳机具有耳机磁体；
    所述主机包括第一部分与第二部分，所述第一部分能够相对所述第二部分转动并相对所述第二部分张开以使得所述主机打开，或者所述第一部分能够与所述第二部分闭合以使得所述主机闭合；所述第一部分具有第一容纳槽，所述第二部分具有第三容纳槽，所述主机闭合时，所述第一容纳槽与所述第三容纳槽围成容纳空间；
    所述第一部分具有第一主机吸附磁体；所述主机闭合时，所述耳机收容于所述容纳空间，所述耳机磁体与所述第一主机吸附磁体磁吸；所述第一部分相对所述第二部分张开时，所述耳机能够吸附于所述第一容纳槽内并随所述第一部分运动；
    所述耳机收容于所述第一容纳槽时，所述耳机位于所述第一容纳槽内的部分与所述第一容纳槽的开口所在的平面的最大距离为第一距离，所述耳机位于所述第一容纳槽外的部分与所述第一容纳槽的开口所在的平面的最大距离为第二距离，所述第一距离小于所述第二距离。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的可穿戴设备，其特征在于，
    所述第一主机吸附磁体为海尔贝克阵列，所述耳机磁体为单磁体或海尔贝克阵列。
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的可穿戴设备，其特征在于，
    所述第一主机吸附磁体为海尔贝克阵列，所述第一主机吸附磁体包括两个相连的单磁体，两个所述单磁体的磁场方向不同；
    所述耳机磁体包括一个单磁体，所述一个单磁体为具有两个不同磁场方向的海尔贝克阵列。
  4. 根据权利要求1-3任一项所述的可穿戴设备，其特征在于，
    所述第二部分具有第二主机吸附磁体；
    所述耳机收容于所述容纳空间时，所述耳机磁体与所述第一主机吸附磁体以及所述第二主机吸附磁体均磁吸，且所述耳机磁体与所述第一主机吸附磁体间的磁力，大于所述耳机磁体与所述第二主机吸附磁体间的磁力。
  5. 根据权利要求1-4任一项所述的可穿戴设备，其特征在于，
    所述第一部分的周缘开设有凹槽；所述第一部分具有密封件，所述密封件的表面设有若干凸起，所述若干凸起两两间隔；所述密封件固定于所述第一部分的所述凹槽内，所述密封件的所述若干凸起均与所述第一部分的所述凹槽的底面连接，所述密封件背离所述密封件的所述凸起的一侧露在所述第一部分的所述凹槽外；所述主机闭合时，所述密封件露在所述第一部分的所述凹槽外的部分与所述第二部分接触，以将所述第一部分与所述第二部分的间隙密封；
    或者，
    所述第二部分的周缘开设有凹槽；所述第二部分具有密封件，所述密封件的表面设有若干凸起，所述若干凸起两两间隔；所述密封件固定于所述第二部分的所述凹槽内，所述密封件的所述若干凸起均与所述第二部分的所述凹槽的底面连接，所述密封件背离述密封件的所述凸起的一侧露在所述第二部分的所述凹槽外；所述主机闭合时，所述密封件露在所述第二部分的所述凹槽外的部分与所述第一部分接触，以将所述第一部分与所述第二部分的间隙密封。
  6. 根据权利要求1-5任一项所述的可穿戴设备，其特征在于，
    所述第二部分具有第一充电弹片和第二充电弹片；
    所述耳机具有中心对称的外形；所述耳机包括第一电极和第二电极，所述第一电极与所述第二电极均位于所述耳机的外侧，并均为环绕所述耳机的中心线的环状结构，所述第一电极与所述第二电极间隔设置；所述耳机位于所述第二部分时，所述第一电极与所述第一充电弹片接触，所述第二电极与所述第二充电弹片接触；
    所述主机包括充电电路，所述充电电路用于通过所述第一充电弹片及所述第二充电弹片向所述耳机充电。
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的可穿戴设备，其特征在于，
    所述第二部分具有异物检测弹片；
    所述主机包括处理器，所述处理器用于根据所述充电电路的异常充电信号控制所述充电电路关闭，以及根据所述充电电路的正常充电信号控制所述充电电路工作；其中，当所述第一充电弹片与所述第二充电弹片中的至少一个，以及所述异物检测弹片均接触异物后，所述充电电路产生所述异常充电信号，否则所述充电电路产生所述正常充电信号。
  8. 根据权利要求6或7所述的可穿戴设备，其特征在于，
    所述第一部分或所述第二部分具有温度检测模块；
    所述主机包括处理器，所述处理器用于根据所述温度检测模块的检测结果确定检测到的温度大于或等于阈值时，控制所述充电电路关闭；所述处理器还用于根据所述温度检测模块的检测结果确定检测到的温度小于所述阈值时，控制所述充电电路工作。
  9. 根据权利要求1-8任一项所述的可穿戴设备，其特征在于，
    所述第二部分具有状态检测磁体；所述第一部分具有第一磁场传感器，所述第一磁场传感器用于检测所述状态检测磁体的磁通量；
    所述主机包括处理器，所述处理器用于根据所述第一磁场传感器的检测信号，确定所述主机是处于打开状态还是闭合状态。
  10. 根据权利要求1-9任一项所述的可穿戴设备，其特征在于，
    所述第一部分或者所述第二部分具有第二磁场传感器，所述第二磁场传感器用于检测所述耳机磁体的磁通量；
    所述主机包括处理器；所述处理器用于根据所述第一部分的所述第二磁场传感器的检测信号，确定所述耳机是否位于所述第一容纳槽内；或者，所述处理器用于根据所述第二部分的所述第二磁场传感器的检测信号，确定所述耳机是否位于所述第三容纳槽内。
  11. 根据权利要求1-10任一项所述的可穿戴设备，其特征在于，
    所述第二部分具有状态检测磁体；所述耳机具有第三磁场传感器，所述第三磁场传感器用于检测所述状态检测磁体的磁通量；
    所述耳机具有控制器，所述控制器用于根据所述第三磁场传感器的检测信号，确定所述耳机是否位于所述第三容纳槽内。
  12. 根据权利要求1-11任一项所述的可穿戴设备，其特征在于，
    所述主机包括转轴组件，所述转轴组件包括套、从动件、弹性件和第一轴；
    所述轴套具有内腔，所述轴套的外侧与所述第一部分固定连接；
    所述从动件具有轴配合面和通孔，所述从动件的所述通孔贯穿所述轴配合面；所述从动件位于所述内腔，所述从动件能沿所述内腔的表面滑动但无法相对所述轴套转动；
    所述弹性件位于所述内腔，并抵压所述从动件背向所述轴配合面的表面；
    所述第一轴的一部分位于所述内腔中并与所述轴套转动连接；所述第一轴位于所述内腔 中的部分穿过所述从动件的所述通孔，并与所述从动件的轴配合面配合形成凸轮机构；所述第一轴的另一部分位于所述内腔外，并与所述第二部分固定连接；
    所述第一部分能通过所述转轴组件相对所述第二部分转动；在所述主机从闭合状态切换为打开状态的过程中，所述第一部分的转动行程依次包括第一段行程、第二段行程和第三段行程；其中，
    在所述第一段行程中，所述从动件能够在所述弹性件的弹力驱动下沿所述第一轴移动，且所述从动件能够在所述凸轮机构与所述弹性件的共同作用下绕所述第一轴转动，以带动所述轴套绕所述第一轴转动，以使所述轴套带动所述第一部分相对所述第二部分转动；
    在所述第二段行程中，所述第一部分能够受外力驱动相对所述第二部分转动，以带动所述轴套与所述从动件绕所述第一轴转动；
    在所述第三段行程中，所述从动件能够在所述弹性件的弹力驱动下沿所述第一轴移动，且所述从动件能够在所述凸轮机构与所述弹性件的共同作用下绕所述第一轴转动，以带动所述轴套绕所述第一轴转动，以使所述轴套带动所述第一部分相对所述第二部分转动。
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的可穿戴设备，其特征在于，
    所述轴配合面包括依次相连的第一斜面、平面和第二斜面，所述第一斜面与所述平面形成钝角，所述平面与所述第二斜面形成钝角，且所述第一斜面、所述平面和所述第二斜面形成两级阶梯；
    在所述第一段行程中，所述第一斜面与所述第一轴位于所述内腔中的部分滑动接触；
    在所述第二段行程中，所述平面与所述第一轴位于所述内腔中的部分滑动接触；
    在所述第三段行程中，所述第二斜面与所述第一轴位于所述内腔中的部分滑动接触。
  14. 根据权利要求1-13任一项所述的可穿戴设备，其特征在于，
    所述转轴组件包括轴套、第二轴和柔性电路板；
    所述轴套具有内腔；
    所述第二轴上沿所述第二轴的轴向形成通道；所述第二轴的一部分位于所述内腔并与所述轴套转动连接；所述第二轴的另一部分位于所述内腔外；
    所述柔性电路板包括第一电连接端、安装部分和第二连接端，所述安装部分位于所述第一电连接端与所述第二电连接端之间，所述安装部分包括相连的卷绕部分与叠层部分；当所述柔性电路板安装于所述第二轴时，所述第一电连接端与所述第二电连接端均位于所述内腔外，所述卷绕部分卷绕于所述第二轴位于所述内腔的部分上，所述叠层部分呈折叠状态，且所述叠层部分的至少一部分收容于所述第二轴的所述通道内；
    所述第一部分具有第一主机电路板组件，所述第一主机电路板组件与所述第一电连接端电连接；所述第二部分具有第二主机电路板组件，所述第二主机电路板组件与所述第二电连接端电连接；
    所述第一部分与所述轴套的外侧固定连接，所述第二部分与所述第二轴位于所述内腔外的部分固定连接，所述第一部分能通过所述转轴组件相对所述第二部分转动。
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的可穿戴设备，其特征在于，
    所述第一主机电路板组件包括电路板，所述电路板具有接地点与馈电点；
    所述第一部分包括第一主机壳体，所述第一主机壳体与所述轴套的外侧固定连接，所述第一主机电路板组件固定于所述第一主机壳体背向所述轴套的一侧；所述第一主机壳体与所述接地点及所述馈电点均电连接，所述第一主机壳体作为所述主机的天线。
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的可穿戴设备，其特征在于，
    所述转轴组件包括轴接触件；所述轴接触件固定于所述轴套内，并与所述第二轴位于所述内腔的部分滑动接触；
    所述第二部分包括第三主机壳体，所述第三主机壳体与所述第二轴位于所述内腔外的部分固定连接，所述第三主机壳体作为所述主机的天线。
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的可穿戴设备，其特征在于，
    所述主机闭合时，所述第一主机壳体与所述第三主机壳体之间具有间隙，且所述第一主机壳体与所述第二主机壳体产生耦合。
  18. 根据权利要求1-17任一项所述的可穿戴设备，其特征在于，
    所述第一部分为所述主机的盖体与所述主机的主体中的一个，所述第二部分为所述盖体与所述主体中的另一个；
    所述主机包括开启键，所述开启键包括键帽、弹性件和手感弹片；
    所述键帽的一部分位于所述第二部分内，所述键帽的另一部分位于所述第二部分外；所述键帽与所述第二部分活动连接；所述键帽具有位于所述第二部分内的凸点；
    所述弹性件安装于所述第二部分内，以向所述键帽提供反弹力；
    所述手感弹片位于所述第二部分内，所述手感弹片与所述键帽的所述凸点间隔相对；
    所述主机闭合时，所述键帽与所述第一部分形成卡扣连接，以将所述第一部分与所述第二部分锁合；所述键帽受压时能够向所述第二部分内运动，以使得所述卡扣连接被解除，并使得所述键帽的所述凸点挤压所述手感弹片。
  19. 根据权利要求1-18任一项所述的可穿戴设备，其特征在于，
    所述耳机的外形与所述第一容纳槽的形状适配，和/或，所述耳机的外形与所述第三容纳槽的形状适配。
  20. 根据权利要求1-19任一项所述的可穿戴设备，其特征在于，
    所述耳机包括耳塞、第一电极、耳机前壳、第二电极和耳机后壳，所述第一电极位于所述耳塞与所述耳机前壳之间，所述耳机前壳连接所述第一电极与所述第二电极，所述第二电极连接所述耳机前壳与所述耳机后壳；
    所述耳机收容于所述第一容纳槽或所述第三容纳槽时，所述耳塞朝向所述转轴组件，所述耳机后壳背向所述转轴组件。
  21. 根据权利要求1-20任一项所述的可穿戴设备，其特征在于，
    所述主机包括智能手表。
PCT/CN2022/141942 2021-12-31 2022-12-26 可穿戴设备 Ceased WO2023125414A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US18/720,554 US20250063283A1 (en) 2021-12-31 2022-12-26 Wearable device
EP22914668.3A EP4412241A4 (en) 2021-12-31 2022-12-26 WEARABLE DEVICE
JP2024532425A JP7694868B2 (ja) 2021-12-31 2022-12-26 ウェアラブル装置

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202111677026.6 2021-12-31
CN202111677026.6A CN116419113A (zh) 2021-12-31 2021-12-31 可穿戴设备

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023125414A1 true WO2023125414A1 (zh) 2023-07-06

Family

ID=86997803

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/141942 Ceased WO2023125414A1 (zh) 2021-12-31 2022-12-26 可穿戴设备

Country Status (5)

Country Link
US (1) US20250063283A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP4412241A4 (zh)
JP (1) JP7694868B2 (zh)
CN (1) CN116419113A (zh)
WO (1) WO2023125414A1 (zh)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2025189872A1 (zh) * 2024-03-13 2025-09-18 华为技术有限公司 充电盒及耳机组件

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP4523424A1 (en) * 2023-07-25 2025-03-19 Google Llc Capacitive on-head detection using a magnetically-sensitive section

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN109076276A (zh) * 2016-12-19 2018-12-21 华为技术有限公司 一种具有蓝牙耳机的可穿戴设备
CN109892756A (zh) * 2019-03-12 2019-06-18 万魔声学科技有限公司 可穿戴式智能终端设备
WO2019194344A1 (ko) * 2018-04-04 2019-10-10 엘지전자 주식회사 휴대용 음향기기
CN210005872U (zh) * 2019-07-25 2020-01-31 深圳市蓝之洋科技有限公司 一种具有蓝牙耳机充电及收纳功能的手表
CN112486250A (zh) * 2019-09-12 2021-03-12 万魔声学科技有限公司 可穿戴式智能终端设备
CN113303569A (zh) * 2021-05-31 2021-08-27 深圳市爱都科技有限公司 一种智能穿戴设备

Family Cites Families (16)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP3541092B1 (en) * 2015-09-30 2021-08-11 Apple Inc. Earbud case with charging system
CN205921717U (zh) * 2016-05-10 2017-02-01 深圳市惠博升科技有限公司 车用无线通话设备
CN208402075U (zh) * 2018-06-08 2019-01-18 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 耳机盒
US20200107106A1 (en) * 2018-09-28 2020-04-02 Apple Inc. Hybrid retention and sensor shunt for wireless listening devices
CN209045415U (zh) * 2018-12-10 2019-06-28 东莞市普禄达电子科技有限公司 一种可提高按压手感的薄膜按键
CN110417089A (zh) * 2019-07-31 2019-11-05 歌尔科技有限公司 一种无线耳机充电盒
CN110507042B (zh) * 2019-09-06 2021-11-26 歌尔股份有限公司 一种腕戴设备
CN110602584A (zh) * 2019-09-06 2019-12-20 华为技术有限公司 一种无线耳机及无线耳机系统
CN113015051A (zh) * 2019-12-20 2021-06-22 华为技术有限公司 唤醒耳机的方法及装置
CN211047182U (zh) * 2020-02-24 2020-07-17 潍坊歌尔电子有限公司 一种无线耳机及收纳装置
CN213694059U (zh) * 2020-06-30 2021-07-13 歌尔科技有限公司 耳机充电盒
CN212784816U (zh) * 2020-07-17 2021-03-23 广东硕美科科技有限公司 无线耳机充电仓
CN213849087U (zh) * 2020-11-27 2021-08-03 歌尔科技有限公司 一种腕戴电子产品
KR102312161B1 (ko) * 2021-02-26 2021-10-13 주식회사 액센코리아 스마트 워치
CN113329300A (zh) * 2021-06-29 2021-08-31 歌尔科技有限公司 耳机盒
CN215072924U (zh) * 2021-06-29 2021-12-07 荣成歌尔微电子有限公司 耳机出入盒检测电路、耳机盒及耳机

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN109076276A (zh) * 2016-12-19 2018-12-21 华为技术有限公司 一种具有蓝牙耳机的可穿戴设备
WO2019194344A1 (ko) * 2018-04-04 2019-10-10 엘지전자 주식회사 휴대용 음향기기
CN109892756A (zh) * 2019-03-12 2019-06-18 万魔声学科技有限公司 可穿戴式智能终端设备
CN210005872U (zh) * 2019-07-25 2020-01-31 深圳市蓝之洋科技有限公司 一种具有蓝牙耳机充电及收纳功能的手表
CN112486250A (zh) * 2019-09-12 2021-03-12 万魔声学科技有限公司 可穿戴式智能终端设备
CN113303569A (zh) * 2021-05-31 2021-08-27 深圳市爱都科技有限公司 一种智能穿戴设备

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP4412241A4

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2025189872A1 (zh) * 2024-03-13 2025-09-18 华为技术有限公司 充电盒及耳机组件

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP4412241A1 (en) 2024-08-07
US20250063283A1 (en) 2025-02-20
JP2024543961A (ja) 2024-11-26
JP7694868B2 (ja) 2025-06-18
EP4412241A4 (en) 2025-03-19
CN116419113A (zh) 2023-07-11

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11134329B2 (en) Wireless earbud
DK182151B1 (en) Portable listening device system with wireless power transmitter
WO2023125414A1 (zh) 可穿戴设备
CN117319859B (zh) 耳机及耳机组件
WO2023125727A1 (zh) 耳机、组装治具和耳机的制造方法
WO2023124858A1 (zh) 开启键和电子设备
WO2023125794A1 (zh) 转轴组件和电子设备
CN111464898A (zh) 组合式的内模块件

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22914668

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2022914668

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20240502

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2024532425

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 18720554

Country of ref document: US

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE